BSS Parameter Dictionary

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Nortel GSM BSS ParameterReferenceRelease: 16.0Document Revision: 16.14

www.nortel.com

411-9001-124.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Release: 16.0Publication: 411-9001-124Document status: StandardDocument release date: 28 May 2008

Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel NetworksAll Rights Reserved.

Sourced in Canada, France, and the United States of America.

LEGAL NOTICE

While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expresslyagreed to in writing NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OFANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document aresubject to change without notice.

Nortel, the Nortel logo, the Globemark, S2000, and S8000 are trademarks of Nortel Networks.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

.

3.

ContentsNew in this release 33

PM1270 - TDMA based counters (15405) 34Interference Matrix Processing and Mediation (16411) 34MS location E911 (20365) 34Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure (22810) 34Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS (22859) 35BSS Packet Flow Context (22860) 35EGPRS Uplink Incremental Redundancy (24498) 36Edge one phase access (24620) 36BSC 3000 Support of BTS SW BCKGRND DWNLDG (25316) 36PCUSN : MSA32 (single slot) board introduction (E1 & T1) (26742) 37Optimized Agprs cell allocation (26828, 26953) 37EDGE Dynamic Agprs minimum of joker TS (26954) 37GPRS/EDGE TDMA configuration improvements (27731) 37BTS/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement for IN and TCU (29718) 37MSS7480 platform ROHS compliance (29915) 37Tx power offset for signaling channels (30293) 38Repeated Downlink FACCH (30296) 38PCUSN MSA32 E1 board introduction (30377) 38Differentiation of the BTS 18000 RMs with power transmit level of 40 Watts

(30713) 38BTS18000 4-way Tx coupler (H4) introduction (32300) 38BTS18000 HPRM3T differentiation (33657) 39Frequency independent high speed enhancements (34756) 39

Introduction 41

Chapter 1 Introduction 431.1 Network configuration objects and their parameters 431.2 Different types of configuration parameters 491.3 Description of dictionary entries 50

1.3.1 Header line 501.3.2 Main body of entries 51

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference

411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008

Copyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel Networks

.

4

Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order 53A 53

abisSpy Class 3 53absoluteRFChannelNo Class 2 53access time end 54access time start 55accessClassCongestion Class 3 55accessibilityState 55acknowledged by 55acknowledgment time 56activationObject 56activationObject 56active (passive) chain disk state 56active (passive) chain Dmux state 57active (passive) chain ECI board state 57active (passive) chain REM link state 57active (passive) chain Sic board state 57active (passive) chain sic channels state 58active (passive) chain sls board state 58active (passive) chain state 58active (passive) chain switching capacity 58active (passive) chain tcu accessibility 59active (passive) chain ute board state 59active rem link 59activeChain 59additional supervised PCM 0 Class 2 60additional supervised PCM 1 Class 2 61additional supervised PCM 2 Class 2 61additional supervised PCM 3 Class 2 62additional supervised PCM 4 Class 2 63additional supervised PCM 5 Class 2 63additional unmasked users alarms Class 2 64addresses 65adjacent cell umbrella ref Class 3 65adjacentCellHandOver 66adjacentCellHandOverId 66adjacentCellReselection 67adjacentCellReselectionId 67administrativeState 68administrativeState 68administrativeState 68administrativeState 69administrativeState 69


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

5

administrativeState 71administrativeState 72administrativeState 73administrativeState 73administrativeState 73administrativeState 74administrativeState 74administrativeState 74administrativeState 74administrativeState 75administrativeState 75administrativeState 75administrativeState 75administrativeState 76administrativeState 76administrativeState 76administrativeState 76administrativeState 77administrativeState 77administrativeState 77administrativeState 77administrativeState 78administrativeState 78administrativeState 79administrativeState 80administrativeState 80administrativeState 81agprsFilterCoefficient Class 3 81agprsHysteresis Class 3 82agprsThreshold Class 3 82agprsTsSharingProtection Class 2 82agpsTimer Class 3 83aLAIntState 83alarm criteria 83alarm criteria 84alarm number 84alarm severity 85alarm state 85alarmDuration 85alarmListConverter 85alarmListFan 85alarmListFanBoard 86alarmListVCOTension 86alarmPriority 86


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

6

algoId class 2 87algorithm Used Class 2 87allocationState 88allocPriorityTable Class 3 88allocPriorityThreshold Class 3 89allocPriorityTimers Class 3 89allocWaitThreshold Class 3 90allOtherCasesPriority Class 3 90amrAdaptationSet Class 3 90amrDirectAllocIntRxLevDL Class 3 91amrDirectAllocIntRxLevUL Class 3 91amrDirectAllocRxLevDL Class 3 92amrDirectAllocRxLevUL Class 3 92amrDlFrAdaptationSet class 3 92amrDlHrAdaptationSet class 3 93amrFRIntercellCodecMode Class 3 93amrFRIntracellCodecMode Class 3 93amrHRIntercellCodecMode Class 3 94amrHRToFRIntraCodecMode Class 3 94amriRxLevDLH Class 3 95amriRxLevULH Class 3 95amrReserved1 95amrReserved2 Class 3 96amrUlFrAdaptationSet class 3 96amrUlHrAdaptationSet class 3 97answerPagingPriority Class 3 97architecture 97assignRequestPriority Class 3 98associatedInterface Class 0 98associatedLog 99associatedTMUPosition 99aterLapd 99atmRm 100atmRmId 100attenuation Class 2 100auditBdaStatus 100auditState 101authorised user 101availabilityStatus 101availabilityStatus 102availabilityStatus 102availabilityStatus 102availabilityStatus 103availabilityStatus 103


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

7

availabilityStatus 103availabilityStatus 103availabilityStatus 104available synchronization sources 104averagingPeriod Class 2 104

B 105backup manager addresses 105backupServer 105baseColourCode Class 3 105baseColourCode Class 2 105batteryRemoteControllerPresence Class 2 106bCCHFrequency Class 3 106bCCHFrequency Class 3 108bCCHFrequency Class 2 109bckgDLLayer3WindowSize Class 3 110bdaNewBscState 110bdaSelected 111bdaState 112bdaVersionBuild 112bdaVersionNumber 113beacBatteryRemoteControllerPresence Class 2 113beginning date 113beginSearchTime 114beginSearchTime 114beginSearchTime 115beginSearchTime 115beginSearchTime 115bEPPeriod Class 3 116biZonePowerOffset Class 3 116biZonePowerOffset Class 3 117bsc2GEqpt 117bsc2GEqptId 117bsc3GEqpt 117bsc3GEqptId 118bsc 118bsc 119bsc equipment name 119bscList 120bsc model 121bscNumber 121bscAlarmMask Class 3 121bscArchitecture Class 0 122bscCapacityReduction Class 3 122bscChainId 122


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

8

bscCounterList 123bscDateTime 123bscGprsActivation Class 3 123bscHighSwitchingCapacity Class 3 124bscHopReconfUse Class 1 124bscIPFirstAdr Class 2 124bscIPSecondAdr Class 2 125bscList 126bscLog 126bscLogId 126bscMdInterface 126bscMdInterfaceRef 127bscMdInterfaceVersionNumber 127bscMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3 127bscName 128bscPcuPcmRefList Class 2 128bscQueueingOption Class 1 129bscRefList 129bscReset 130bscSitePcmList Class 2 130bscTimeSlot 131bscType Class 0 131bscUsedAdr 132bsCvMax Class 3 132bscX25PrefAdr Class 2 132bscX25SecAdr Class 2 133bscX25UsedAdr 133bsPowerControl Class 3 134bssMapT1 Class 1 134bssMapT4 Class 1 134bssMapT7 Class 1 135bssMapT8 Class 1 135bssMapT12 Class 1 135bssMapT13 Class 1 136bssMapT19 Class 1 136bssMapT20 Class 1 136bssMapTchoke Class 1 137bssSccpConnEst Class 1 137bssSccpInactRx Class 1 137bssSccpInactTx Class 1 138bssSccpRelease Class 1 138bssSccpSubSysTest Class 1 139bsTxPwrMax Class 3 139bts 141


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

9

bts 142bts equipment name 143bts list 144btsSMSynchroMode Class 2 144bts time between HO configuration Class 3 145btsDescription 145btsHopReconfRestart Class 2 145btsIsHopping Class 2 146btsMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3 147btsReserved3 Class 3 147btsReserved4 Class 3 147btsSensitivity Class 3 147btsSensitivityInnerZone Class 3 148btsSiteManager 148btsSiteManager 149btsSiteManager model 150btsSiteManagerList Class 2 150btsThresholdHopReconf Class 2 151btsWithCavity Class 2 151buildState 152

C 152callClearing Class 3 152callDropActivation class 3 153callPathObservationArea Class 2 153callPathTrace 154callPathTraceType Class 2 154callReestablishment Class 3 155callReestablishmentPriority Class 3 155capacityAlarmThreshold 155capacityTimeRejection Class 3 156cause 156cCCHGprsAtBtsLevel Class 3 157cc 157ccId 157cellAllocation Class 2 158cellBarQualify Class 3 159cellBarred Class 3 159cellDeletionCount Class 3 160cellDtxDownLink Class 3 160cellIdentity Class 3 160cellIdentity Class 3 161cellIdentity Class 2 161cellName 161cellPagingState 162


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

10

cellReselectHysteresis Class 3 163cellReselectOffset Class 3 164cellReselInd Class 3 164cellThreshold Class 2 165cellType Class 3 165cellType Class 3 165cemId 166chain 166chain 166chain 166chainId 167chainId 167chainId 167channel 168channel state 168channelReleaseOnAbisFailure 169channelType Class 2 170chanState 173chosenChannelAsscomp Class 1 174chosenChannelCompL3Info Class 1 174chosenChannelHoPerf Class 1 175chosenChannelHoReq Class 1 175cic Class 0 175circuitGroupBlock Class 1 176circularFileId 177circularFileState 177clear time 177cleared by 178clearing cause 178cn 178control Node Id 178coderPoolConfiguration Class 2 for a BSC 12000HC V12, a BSC 12000HC V15

and a BSC 3000 V15, and class 3 for a BSC 3000 V14 179coderPoolList 179codingScheme Class 2 180command classes 180command line 180command number 181commandFile 181commandFile 181comment 182comment 182comments 182computeSyntheticCounters 182


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

11

concentAlgoExtMsRange Class 3 183concentAlgoExtRxLev Class 3 183concentAlgoIntMsRange Class 3 184concentAlgoIntRxLev Class 3 184concentric cell Class 2 185condition 186configRef Class 3 187configRefList 188configurationType 188confusion Class 1 188counter list 189counter list filename 189counterId 189counters 189counters 189cpueNumber Class 0 190cpueOccurrence 190cRC Class 0 191cRC Class 2 191creator 192criteriaEventType 192cSS7LocalSubSystemNumber Class 0 192cSS7RemoteSubSystemNumber Class 0 193CTU cable 193current log size 193current synchronization mode 194currentChannelHorqd Class 1 194cypherModeReject Class 1 194

D 195dARPPh1Priority class 2 195data mode 14.4 kbit/s Class 2 195data non transparent mode Class 3 195data non transparent mode Class 3 196data transparent mode Class 3 196data transparent mode Class 3 197data14-4OnNoHoppingTs Class 3 197date 197date 197date 198date 198date 198day intervention 198day to be purged 199dDTIIntState 199


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

12

degradedCause 199degradedCause 199delayBetweenRetrans Class 2 200delivery 200deltaUtc 202detectionFunction 202directedRetry Class 3 202directedRetryModeUsed Class 3 202directedRetryPrio Class 3 203directory 203display Data Configuration 204display Data Information 204distHreqt Class 3 204distributionActivation Class 3 204distributionDuration Class 3 205distributionTime Class 3 205distributionQualityThreshold Class 3 206distWtsList Class 3 207diversity Class 2 208dlGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3 208dlGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3 208dlMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3 208dlMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3 209dlMCS5UpperThreshold Class 3 209dlMCS6UpperThreshold Class 3 209dlMCS7UpperThreshold Class 3 210dlMCS8UpperThreshold Class 3 210drxTimerMax Class 3 210dtxMode Class 3 211duplex link state 211duration 212dwAckTime Class 3 (packetAckTime) 212dynamicAgprsAllowed Class 2 212

E 213early classmark sending Class 3 213edgeDataServiceType Class 2 213edgeFavor Class 3 213eDGEMixity Class 3 213efd 214efdType 214egprsIrULActivation Class 3 215egprsServices Class 3 215emergencyCallPriority Class 3 216emergencyCallRestricted Class 3 216


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

13

emergencyThreshold Class 3 217eMLPPThreshold Class 3 217enableRepeatedFacchFr Class 2 217encrypAlgoAsscomp Class 1 218encrypAlgoCiphModComp Class 1 218encrypAlgoHoperf Class 1 218encrypAlgoHoreq Class 1 219encryptionAlgorSupported Class 0 219encryptionAlgorSupported Class 1 219end date 220end date 220end of probative Phase Type 220end time 221end time 221endAlarmFilter 221endAlarmThreshold 222endAlarmThreshold 222endCounterThreshold 223endSearchTime 223endSearchTime 223endSearchTime 224endSearchTime 224endSearchTime 225endSessionCriteriaDuration 225endSessionCriteriaType 225enhancedTRAUFrameIndication 226enhCellTieringConfiguration 226equipment identity 228equipment processor number 228error concealment unit Class 2 228errorCorrectionMethod Class 3 229estimatedSiteLoad Class 3 229exclusive interval of codano 229exclusive list of codano 230executableSoftware 230executableSoftwareId 230executableSoftwareName 230extCommsInt 231extended cell Class 2 231extendedTimingAdvanceWindow 232external alarm configuration Class 2 232external battery cabinet Class 2 234externalTime 234extUtbfNoData Class 3 235


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

14

F 235facchPowerOffset Class 2 235Family 235faultNumber 238fERThreshold1 Class 3 238fERThreshold2 Class 3 239fERThreshold3 Class 3 239fERThreshold4 Class 3 240fhsRef Class 2 240filteredTrafficCoefficient Class 3 241floor 241flowControlMaxDelay 241flowControlMaxRate 242fnOffset class 2 242forced handover algo Class 3 242frAmrPriority Class 2 243frequencyHoppingSystem 243frPowerControlTargetMode Class 3 244frPowerControlTargetModeDl Class 3 244fullDlKa Class 3 244

G 245geographical coordinates 245geographical coordinates 246gprsAvgParam Class 3 246gprsCellActivation Class 3 246gprsNetworkModeOperation Class 3 247gprsPcuCrossConnectList Class 2 247gprsPcuLockExtendedConf Class 2 248gprsPermittedAccess Class 3 248gprsPreemption Class 3 248gprsPreemptionProtection Class 3 249gprsPriority Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) 249gprsState 249gprsState 249gprsTimerWaitPUAM Class 3 250gprsTimerWaitRLC Class 3 250gsmToUmtsReselection Class 3 251

H 252handOver from signalling channel Class 3 252handOverControl 253hardware configuration Class 2 253hardwareRef Class 2 255hardwareRef Class 2 255hardwareRef Class 2 255


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

15

hexa text 255highSpeedUplinkDistortionRemoval 256hoMargin Class 3 256hoMarginAMR Class 3 256hoMarginBeg Class 3 256hoMarginDist Class 3 257hoMarginRxLev Class 3 257hoMarginRxQual Class 3 257hoMarginTiering Class 3 258hoMarginTrafficOffset Class 3 258hoPingpongCombination Class 3 258hoPingpongTimeRejection Class 3 260hoppingSequenceNumber Class 2 260hoSecondBestCellConfiguration Class 3 261hoTraffic Class 3 261hoTraffic Class 3 261hrAmrPriority Class 2 262hrCellLoadEnd Class 3 262hrCellLoadStart Class 3 263hrPowerControlTargetMode Class 3 263hrPowerControlTargetModeDl Class 3 264

I 264identifier 264identifier 265identifier 265identifier 265iem 265iemId 266iMSIAttachDetach Class 2 266in 266inactivity timeout 266inclusive interval of codano 267inclusive list of codano 267incomingHandOver Class 3 267inhibitRequest 267inId 268initialMCSDL Class 3 268initialMCSUL Class 3 268interBscDirectedRetry Class 3 269interBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3 269interCellHOExtPriority Class 3 269interCellHOIntPriority Class 3 270interferenceType Class 3 270interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc 270


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

16

interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts 272interferer cancel algo usage Class 2 274internal DMUX alarm state 274internal DMUX state 276internal PCM states 277internal switching matrix 277interOmuEtherlinkOper 277intraBscDirectedRetry Class 3 278intraBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3 278intraCell Class 3 278intraCellHOIntPriority Class 3 279intraCellQueueing Class 3 279intraCellSDCCH Class 3 279

J 280job 280jobResult 280jokerPerMainTarget Class 3 280

L 281label 281language 281lapdConcentration 281lapdLink 282lapdLinkOMLRef Class 2 283lapdLinkOMLRef Class 2 283lapdLinkOMLRef Class 0 284lapdLinkRSLRef Class 2 284lapdTerminalNumber Class 0 285layer3MsgCyphModComp Class 1 286lcsType Class 0 286level to process 287lightning protection Class 2 287line 287locationAreaCode Class 3 288locationAreaCode Class 3 288locationAreaCode Class 2 288log 288logFullAction 289login command type 289longTbfLossThroughput Class 3 289longTbfSizeThreshold Class 3 290lRxLevDLH Class 3 290lRxLevDLP Class 3 290lRxLevULH Class 3 291lRxLevULP Class 3 291


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

17

lRxQualDLH Class 3 291lRxQualDLP Class 3 292lRxQualULH Class 3 292lRxQualULP Class 3 292lsaPcmList Class 3 293lsaRc 294lsaRcId 294lsaRc Reference 295

M 295machine name 295machine name 295mainNetworkBand Class 0 295maio Class 2 296managedObjectClass 296managedObjectInstance 297manager address type 297manager addresses 297managerServer 297manufacturerIntervention 298marking type 298masterBtsSMId class 2 298max log size 298maxAdjCHOARMPerBts 299maxBscPerNetwork 299maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone Class 3 299maxBtsPerBtsSM 299maxBtsPerNetwork 299maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3 300maxDnTbfPerTs Class 3 300maxDwAssign Class 3 300maxFileSize Class 2 300maximum acknowledgment time 301maximum alarm number 301maximum clear time 302maximum event time 302maximum MD notification number 302maximum OMC notification number 303maximum reception time 303maxLapdChPerBtsSM 303maxNbrConsMess 303maxNbOfCells Class 2 304maxNbrPDAAssig Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) 304maxNbrPUDWithoutVchange Class 2 (NN0002Max) gprsTranscvLockExtended

Conf 304


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

18

maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock Class 2 (n3101Max) (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf) 305

maxNumberRetransmission Class 3 305maxPcmCPerBtsSM 305maxPcmCPerTranscd 306maxRACH Class 3 306maxRowCount 306maxSigLPerSigLS 307maxTeiPerLapdCh 307maxTranscdBPerTranscd 307maxTranscdPerBsc 307maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3 308maxUpTbfPerTs Class 3 308md 308md notification number 308mdArchive 309mdConfirm 309mdFileName 309mdGranularityPeriod 309mdGranularityPeriod 310mdGranularityPeriod 311mdId 312mdLog 312mdObjectList 312mdObjectList 313mdObjectList 313mdScanner 313mdScannerType 314mdScannerType 314mdScannerType 314mdScannerType 315mdScannerType 315mdStorageDuration 315mdTransferMode 316mdWarning 316measurementProcAlgorithm Class 2 316microCellCaptureTimer Class 3 317microCellStability Class 3 318minimum acknowledgment time 318minimum alarm number 318minimum clear time 319minimum event time 319minimum MD notification number 319minimum OMC notification number 320


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

19

minimum reception time 320minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain Class 3 320minNbOfTDMA Class 2 321minNbrGprsTs Class 3 321minTimeQualityIntraCellHO Class 3 321missDistWt Class 3 322missRxLevWt Class 3 322missRxQualWt Class 3 323mms 323mmsId 323mmsUsage 324mobileAllocation Class 2 324mobileCountryCode Class 3 324mobileCountryCode Class 3 325mobileCountryCode Class 1 325mobileCountryCode Class 2 326mobileNetworkCode Class 3 326mobileNetworkCode Class 3 326mobileNetworkCode Class 1 327mobileNetworkCode Class 2 327modeModifyMandatory Class 3 327monitoredObjectClass 328monitoredObjectInstance 328monitoredSpecificProblemsList 329month 329msBtsDistanceInterCell Class 3 329msCapWeightActive Class 2 329msLeakRate 330msPowerClassToggle Class 3 330msRangeMax Class 3 330msTxPwrMax Class 3 331msTxPwrMax2ndBand Class 2 331msTxPwrMaxCCH Class 3 332msTxPwrMaxCell Class 3 333multi band reporting Class 3 334multiple site 334multipleVocoders Class 1 335muxNumber Class 3 335

N 336n3103 Class 3 336n3105max Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockBtsExtendedConf) 336nACCActivation Class 3 336nAvgl Class 3 (gprsAvgParam) 336nAvgT Class 3 (gprsAvgParam) 337


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

20

nAvgW Class 3 (gprsAvgParam) 337nbOfFramesForFER Class 3 337nbOfRepeat Class 2 338nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation Class 3 338nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation Class 3 339nbrTch Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList) 339nCapacityFRRequestedCodec Class 3 339nCHPosition Class2 340networkColourCode Class 3 341networkColourCode Class 2 341networkIndicator Class 1 342new name 342new password 1st try 342new password 2nd try 343new power control algorithm Class 3 343next execution time 344nFRRequestedCodec Class 3 344nHRRequestedCodec Class 3 345night intervention 345noOfBlocksForAccessGrant Class 2 345noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging Class 2 346notAllowedAccessClasses Class 3 346notification number 347notification type 347numberOfJokerDS0 Class 2 347number of records 348number of large reuse data channels Class 3 348numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts 348numberOfPwciSamples Class 3 349numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans Class 3 349numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion Class 3 351numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion Class 3 352numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion Class 3 352numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion Class 3 352nUsfExt Class 3 353nwExtUtbf Class 3 353

O 353objectClass 353objectInstance 354object Filter List 354objects 355objects assigned 355observation type 355observation type 356


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

21

observed counters 356observed object class 356occupationState 356offsetLoad Class 3 357offsetNeighbouringCell Class 3 357offsetPriority Class 3 359oMC notification number 359omu 359omuId 360on error 360onlyExtUtbf Class 3 360onePhaseAccess Class 2 360onePhaseDnMsCapability Class 3 361operationalState 361operationalState 362operationalState 363operationalState 363operationalState 364operationalState 364operationalState 365operationalState 366operationalState 366operationalState 366operationalState 367operationalState 367operationalState 368operationalState 368operationalState 369operationalState 369operationalState 370operationalState 370operationalState 371operationalState 371operationalState 371operationalState 372operationalState 372operationalState 373operationalState 374operationalState 374operationalState 375operationalState 375operationalState 376operationalState 376operationalState 377


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

22

operationalState 378operationalState 378otherServicesPriority Class 3 379output classes 379output classes 380owner 380

P 380packetAckTime Class 3 380packetFlowContext Class 3 381packetSiStatus Class 3 382pagingOnCell Class 3 382pan Class 3 382panDec Class 3 (pan) 382panInc Class 3 (pan) 383panMax Class 3 (pan) 383parameter(s) 384partialRecordCriteriaType Class 2 384partialRecordCriteriaEventType 385partialRecordCriteriaNbEvent 385partialrecordCriteriaTimer 385particular intervention 385password 385password 385password duration 386pcmCircuit 386pcmCircuit 388pcmCircuitBsc 389pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager 389pcmCircuitId 389pcmCircuitId Class 2 390pcmCircuitId Class 2 390pcmCircuitId Class 2 391pcmErrorCorrection Class 2 391pcmNbr Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList) 391pcmTimeSlotNumber Class 2 392pcmType Class 3 (BSC 12000) or Class 0 (BSC 3000) 392pcu 393pcuCellState 393pcuLapdEqptRefList Class 2 394pcusn 394pcuSNName 394penaltyTime Class 3 395perceived severity 396periodCCCHLoadIndication Class 3 396


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

23

periodicity 396pfcActivation Class 2 396pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3 397pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3 397pfcArp2ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3 397pfcArp2StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3 398pfcArp3ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3 398pfcArp3StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3 398pfcFlowControlActivation Class 2 399pfcMinNrtBandwidthPerTs Class 3 399pfcMinNumberOfJokersforTsGuaranteedBitRate Class 3 400pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold Class 3 400pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold Class 3 401pfcPreemptionRatioGold Class 3 401pfcPreemptionRatioSilver Class 3 401pfcRtDowngradeAllowed Class 3 402pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold Class 3 402pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold Class 3 402pfcT6 Class 3 403pfcT8 Class 3 403pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl Class 3 403pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl Class 3 404plmnPermitted Class 3 404pODType 404pointCode Class 1 404pointCode Class 1 405port Ethernet operational 405port Ethernet status 405port 0 X25 status 406port 1 X25 status 406portChosen Class 2 407portUsed 407positionInShelf 407powerBudgetInterCell Class 3 408powerClass 408powerControl 408powerControlIndicator Class 3 409powerDownlink (algorithm Used) class 2 409powerIncrStepSize Class 3 409powerIncrStepSizeUpLink Class 3 410powerIncrStepSizeDownLink Class 3 411powerRedStepSize Class 3 411powerRedStepSizeDownLink Class 3 412powerRedStepSizeUpLink Class 3 412


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

24

powerUplink (algorithm Used) Class 2 413preemptionAuthor Class 3 413preemptionConfiguration Class 3 413pRequestedCodec Class 3 414preSynchroTimingAdvance Class 3 414priority Class 2 414privateMmsOmuRef 415privilegedCell Class 3 415probable cause 416processor identity 418processorLoadSupConf Class 3 418pwciHrequave Class 3 419

R 420rACHLoadAveragingSlots Class 3 420radChanSelIntThreshold Class 3 420radioAllocator Class 2 421radioLinkTimeOut Class 3 422radioSiteMask Class 2 423radioSiteMaskOffset Class 2 424radioSiteName 425radResSupBusyTimer Class 3 426radResSupervision Class 3 426radResSupFreeTimer Class 3 426range 427reception time 427record reference 427redundantPcmNumber 428redundantPcmPresence Class 2 428refPeriod 428refPeriod 428relatedSoftwares 429relay 429remoteSsuState 430repetition rate 430report range 430report template 431report type 431reportObjLevel 431reportTypeMeas Class 2 432resetCircuitRepeat Class 1 432retransDuration Class 2 432retry on error 433rlf1 Class 2 433rlf2 Class 2 434


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

25

rlf3 Class 2 434rLCPolling Class 3 435rmpConfState 435rndAccTimAdvThreshold Class 3 436routingArea Class 2 436rowPosition 436runCallClear Class 3 437runHandOver Class 3 437runPwrControl Class 3 437rxLevAccessMin Class 3 437rxLevDLIH Class 3 438rxLevDLPBGT Class 3 438rxLevHreqave Class 3 439rxLevHreqaveBeg Class3 439rxLevHreqt Class 3 439rxLevMinCell Class 3 440rxLevNCellHreqaveBeg Class 3 440rxLevRxQualDistributionActivation Class 3 441rxLevULIH Class 3 441rxLevWtsList Class 3 441rxNCellHreqave Class 3 442rxQualAveBeg Class 3 442rxQualDLIH Class 3 443rxQualHreqave Class 3 443rxQualHreqt Class 3 443rxQualULIH Class 3 443rxQualThresholdDistribution Class 3 444rxQualWtsList Class 3 444

S 444sIkAssociatedTmuPortPosition 444sIkATerResource 445sacchPowerOffset Class 2 445sacchPowerOffsetSelection Class 2 445sapi 445scannerId 446scannerId 446sCCPRoutingIndicator 446securedLoopActivation Class 2 447selfAdaptActivation Class 3 447selfTuningObs Class 3 448sequenceNumber 448serial number 448serial number 449servingFactorOffset Class 3 449


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

26

session context saving mode 449sGSNRelease Class 3 450shelfNumber 450short message 450sicBoardsInt 451signallingLinkId 451signallingLinkResState 452signallingLinkSet 453signallingPoint 453signallingPointType 453signallingTerminalNumber Class 2 454sigPowerOverboost Class 3 454sigPReserved2 Class 3 454site 455siteGsmFctList Class 2 455siteName 456slc Class 2 457small to large zone HO priority Class 3 457smoke detector Class 2 458smsCB Class 3 458software 459softwareLabel 460source indicator 460specific problems 460speechMode Class 3 461speechMode Class 3 461speechOnHoppingTs Class 3 462speechVersionAsscomp Class 1 462speechVersionHoperf Class 1 462speechVersionHoreq Class 1 462speechVersionHorqd Class 1 463standard indicator AdjC Class 3 463standard indicator AdjC Class 3 463standardIndicator Class 2 464standbyStatus 467start date 467start time 468start time 468startAlarmFilter 468startAlarmThreshold 469startAlarmThreshold 470startCounterThreshold 470startTime 471startTime 471


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

27

stopTime 471stopTime 471subChanId 472subject 472suffix 472summary 473suspendResumeActivation Class 3 473supportingTransceiverEquipment 473sw8kRm 474sw8kRmId 474sWVersionBackUp 474sWVersionFallBack 475sWVersionNew 475sWVersionRunning Class 2 476synchronized Class 3 476synchronizing PCM 477syntheticFaultNumber 477systemInfoType2 Class 2 477system state 478

T 478t3101 Class 3 478t3103 Class 3 478t3107 Class 3 479t3109 Class 3 479t3111 Class 3 480t3122 Class 3 480t3168 Class 3 480t3172 Class 3 481t3192 Class 3 481target Bda 481tcu2gGroup 482teiBtsSiteManager Class 2 482teiLapdLink 483teiTransceiverEqpt Class 2 483teiTranscoder Class 2 484temporaryOffset Class 3 484terminal name 485terminal profile 485text 485text 486text 486tFH or RWM Class 2 486tGMMKeepAlive Class 3 486thresholdCCCHLoadIndication Class 3 487


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

28

thresholdInterference Class 2 487thresholdType 488timeBetweenHOConfiguration Class 3 489timerGcchNotif Class 3 489timerPeriodicUpdateMS Class 3 489timeSlotNumber 490timeSlotNumber Class 2 490timeSlotNumber 490tmu 491tmuId 491tnOffset class 2 492tNwExtUtbf Class 3 492traceConstraintList 492traceControl 493traceDayAccessed 493traceFileName 494traceInfoRequested 494traceReference 494traffic PCM allocation priority Class 2 494transceiver 495transceiver 495transceiver equipment class Class 2 496transceiver zone Ref Class 2 497transceiverEquipment 497transceiverEquipment 498transceiver equipment class 499transceiverZone 499transcoder2GEqptId 500transcoder3GEqptId 500transcoder 501transcoder 501transcoder 502transcoderAlarmList 502transcoderAlarmMask Class 3 502transcoderArchitecture 502transcoderBoard 503transcoderBoard 503transcoderBoardIntState 503transcoderId Class 2 504transcoderId Class 2 504transcoderIntPcmIntState 504transcoderMatrix 505transparentSiteAttrib2 Class 2 507transparentTeiAttrib2 Class 2 507


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

29

tResumeAck Class 3 507trm 508trmArchipelagoCalls 508trmId 508tSCBNumber 508tSCBUse 509tsConfiguration 509tSuspendAck Class 3 510tUsfExt Class 3 510txPowerMaxReduction Class 2 510type 511type 511type 512type 512type 512type of data to be purged 513type of display 513

U 513ulBepPeriod Class 2 513ulGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3 513ulGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3 514ulMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3 514ulMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3 514ulMCS5UpperThreshold Class 3 515ulMCS6UpperThreshold Class 3 515ulMCS7UpperThreshold Class 3 515ulMCS8UpperThreshold Class 3 515UMTS access min level Class 3 516UMTS reselection ARFCN Class 3 516UMTS reselection offset Class 3 516UMTS search min level Class 3 517unequippedCircuit Class 1 517unit 517unknownNCellWarning Class 3 518unmasked users alarms Class 2 518upAckTime Class 3 (packetAckTime) 519upgradeStatus 519uplinkMappingChannelNumber Class 2 520uplinkMappingFreq Class 2 520uplinkMappingMeasurementMode Class 2 520uplinkMappingProcessingMode Class 3 521uplinkPowerControl Class 3 521uplinkPwrCtrlDuringUTDOA Class 3 521uplinkReply Class 3 521


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

30

uplinkReplyTimer Class 3 522uRxLevDLP Class 3 522uRxLevULP Class 3 523uRxQualDLP Class 3 523uRxQualULP Class 3 523usageState 524usageState 524use default list 525user name 525user profile 525username 525username 526usfGranularity Class 3 526

V 526version Class 2 526voiceBroadcastService Class 3 527voiceGroupCallService Class 3 527vSWR meter Class 2 527

W 528workstation name 528wPSManagement Class 3 528wPSQueueStepRotation Class 3 528

X 529X25 port 0 operational 529X25 port 1 operational 529xSCBConfiguration Class 0 530xSCBNumber 530xSCBUse 530xtp 531

Z 532zI bss 532zI bss 532zone frequency hopping Class 2 533zone frequency threshold Class 2 533zone Tx power max reduction Class 2 534

Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution 535A.1 New V16 parameters 535A.2 New V15 parameters 536A.3 New V14 parameters 539

Appendix B Parameters per feature 543B.1 AMR based on traffic 543B.2 AMR Optimizations 543B.3 BSC/TCU 3000 543


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

31

B.4 BSC 3000 cell group management/load balancing 544B.5 BSC 3000 switching increase capacity 544B.6 BSC overload management 544B.7 Dualband cell management 544B.8 EDGE dynamic allocation 544B.9 EDGE traffic management 545B.10 EDGE link adaptation 545B.11 GSM-R V12 545B.12 GSM-R V15 546B.13 GPRS (SV407 - V12) 546B.14 GPRS (TF1134 - NMO I) 548B.15 GPRS (TF1121 - V12) 548B.16 GPRS TBF establishment improvement: one phase access 548B.17 GPRS / EDGE Suspend and Resume 549B.18 PCUSN - more than 12 Agprs PCMs per BSC 549B.19 Network Synchronization 549B.20 BTS Synchronization 549B.21 Automatic Cell Tiering 549B.22 Handover for traffic reasons 550B.23 Handover decision (adjacent cell priority and load) 550B.24 General protection against pingpong handover 550B.25 Intracell handover enhancements 550B.26 AR 264 550B.27 Mixed hybrid and cavity combiner BTSs 550B.28 Call drop analysis 550B.29 Extended CCCH 551B.30 CPU/BIFP load sharing 551B.31 Distribution on Radio measurements 551B.32 Extended UL TBF 551B.33 Broadcast of PSI 13 551B.34 L1M evolutions for advanced features support 551B.35 Fast power control at TCH assignment 552B.36 Data Backhaul Evolution 552B.37 Disabling TBF Keep Alive 552B.38 PCM error correction 552B.39 Unequipped circuit and circuit group block 552B.40 Uplink mapping 552B.41 WPS public access bandwidth protection 552B.42 WPS queuing management 552B.43 BSC/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement 553B.44 Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS 553B.45 BSS Packet Flow Context 553B.46 BSC 3000 support of BTS background downloading 554B.47 Optimized Agprs cell allocation 554


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

32

B.48 EDGE Dynamic Agprs 554B.49 Switch Interference Matrix 554B.50 Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure 554B.51 PM1270 - TDMA based counters 554B.52 Tx power offset for signalling channels 554B.53 Tx power overboost for signaling channels 554B.54 U-TDOA support on the BSS 555B.56 Smart Power Management 555

Appendix C PCUSN components 557


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

33.

New in this releaseThe following section detail what is new in Nortel GSM BSS ParameterReference for the V16.0 release.

Features• PM1270 - TDMA based counters (15405)

• Interference Matrix Processing and Mediation (16411)

• MS location E911 (20365)

• Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure (22810)

• Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS (22859)

• BSS Packet Flow Context (22860)

• EGPRS Uplink Incremental Redundancy (24498)

• Edge one phase access (24620)

• BSC 3000 Support of BTS SW BCKGRND DWNLDG (25316)

• PCUSN : MSA32 (single slot) board introduction (E1 & T1) (26742)

• Optimized Agprs cell allocation (26828, 26953)

• EDGE Dynamic Agprs minimum of joker TS (26954)

• GPRS/EDGE TDMA configuration improvements (27731)

• BTS/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement for IN and TCU (29718)

• MSS7480 platform ROHS compliance (29915)

• Tx power offset for signaling channels (30293)

• Repeated Downlink FACCH (30296)

• PCUSN MSA32 E1 board introduction (30377)

• Differentiation of the BTS 18000 RMs with power transmit level of 40Watts (30713)

• BTS18000 4-way Tx coupler (H4) introduction (32300)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

34 New in this release

• BTS18000 HPRM3T differentiation (33657)

• Frequency independent high speed enhancements (34756)

PM1270 - TDMA based counters (15405)This feature provides observation counters on a TDMAbasis. The tunednetwork analysis enables the operator to detect local QoS anomalies andadjust network parameters.

See impact of this feature in the following location: updated themonitoredObjectClass parameter.

Interference Matrix Processing and Mediation (16411)This feature provides an interference matrix, which allows an operatorto evaluate cell overlaps. With this information, an operator can detectwhich neighboring cells causes interferences and optimize inter-cellsfunctionality.

The network calculates automatically the interference matrix and allowsthe operator to improve the network’s view and the frequency planning.

See impact of this feature in the following location: added the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts and interferenceMatrixRunningOnBscparameters.

MS location E911 (20365)This feature introduces a standard BSS based solution for MS location.Each operator is now able to choose its configuration, in accordance withthe network architecture.

See impact of this feature in the following location:

• modified the lcsType and pcmType parameters

• eotdAgpsTimer has been renamed agpsTimer

• added semantic controls to the following parameters:bssSccpConnEst, bssSccpInactRx, bssSccpInactTx, bssSccpRelease,bssSccpSubSysTest, pcmType, lcsType, signallingLinkId, lsaPcmList

Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure (22810)This feature improves the BTS behavior upon an Abis link failure.When the TRXs of a BTS detect an Abis PCM failure, the BTS turns off thepower amplifier. The broadcasting on BCCH and SACCH is stopped. Assoon as the TRXs of the BTS detect the Abis PCMre--activation, the BTSturns on the power amplifiers.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

Features 35

See impact of this feature in the following location: added the newchannelReleaseOnAbisFailure parameter.

Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS (22859)This feature is an extension of the GPRS/EDGE standard. When NACC isactivated, the network is able to assist the MS for cell re-selection duringongoing TBF.

See impact of this feature in the following location: added thenACCActivation and packetSiStatus parameters.

BSS Packet Flow Context (22860)PFC provides QoS classification of flows in the BSS. This sharp QoSdescription is common to GSM and UMTS.


• added the following new parameters:

— packetFlowContext

— pfcActivation

— pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection

— pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection





— pfcFlowControlActivation

— pfcMinNrtBandwidthPerTs

— pfcMinNumberOfJokersforTsGuaranteedBitRate

— pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold

— pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold

— pfcPreemptionRatioGold

— pfcPreemptionRatioSilver

— pfcRtDowngradeAllowed

— pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold

— pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold

— pfcT6

— pfcT8


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


— pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl

— pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl

• removed the following parameters:

— admissionCtrlBronze

— admissionCtrlGold

— admissionCtrlSilver

— dwQoSCriterion

— minTargetThroughput

— minThroughputBronze

— minThroughputGold

— minThroughputSilver

— peakThroughputLimitation

— preemptionRatioGold

— preemptionRatioSilver

— targetThroughputStep

— upQoSCriterion

— voicePreemptionBronze

— voicePreemptionGold

— voicePreemptionSilver

EGPRS Uplink Incremental Redundancy (24498)Incremental redundancy (IR) defines the retransmission process of datablocks that were not successfully decoded after the first transmission,combining them until they are properly decoded.

See impact of this feature in the following location: added theeGPRSIrUlActivation parameter.

Edge one phase access (24620)This feature reduces the uplink TBF establishment time, and consequentlyincreases the data throughput from an end-user point of view.

See impact of this feature in the following location: modified theonePhaseAccess parameter.

BSC 3000 Support of BTS SW BCKGRND DWNLDG (25316)This feature allows operators to download new software to a BTS whilethis BTS carries GSM/GPRS calls on a live network.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

Features 37

See impact of this feature in the following location: added thebckDLLayer3WindowSize parameter.

PCUSN : MSA32 (single slot) board introduction (E1 & T1) (26742)An evolution of the data configuration is needed because of the increase ofthe BSC 3000 Agprs connectivity.

See impacts of this feature in the following locations: modified thebscPcuPcmRefList, gprsPcuCrossConnectList and bscRefListparameters.

Optimized Agprs cell allocation (26828, 26953)This feature provides a better control on cell distribution on Agprs PCM,and maximized performances.

See impact of this feature in the following location: Added theprivilegedCell parameter.

EDGE Dynamic Agprs minimum of joker TS (26954)This feature allows to reserve Joker bandwidth on the Agprs for a givenTDMA.

See impact of this feature in the following location: added theminNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain parameter.

GPRS/EDGE TDMA configuration improvements (27731)This feature aims at a better monitoring and better diagnoses (Edge andGPRS).

See impact of this feature in the following location: modified the followingdegradedCause parameter of the transceiver object.

BTS/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement for IN and TCU (29718)This feature adds information on specific objects (trm, lsa) in order toenhance the customer visibility on IN and TCU nodes.


• added the trmArchipelagoCalls and aterLapd parameters

• modified the following parameters: coderPoolList, coderPoolConfiguration, CTU cable, numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts

• removed the lapdLinkCallPLoad parameter

MSS7480 platform ROHS compliance (29915)This feature describes the impacts of the introduction of the increasedAgprs connectivity between each BSC3000 and PCUSN.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


See impact of this feature in the following location: updated thebscPcuPcmRefList, gprsPcuCrossConnectList and bscRefListparameters.

Tx power offset for signaling channels (30293)This feature improves the downlink robustness of signalling channels(FACCH and SACCH). New parameters define dedicated power controltargets for uplink and downlink AMR CODEC.

See impact of this feature in the following location: added the followingnew parameters: facchPowerOffset, sacchPowerOffsetSelection, sacchPowerOffset, hrPowerControlTargetModeDl and frPowerControlTargetModeDl

Repeated Downlink FACCH (30296)This feature secures the handover procedure in poor radio conditions byretransmitting the FACCH frames in DL after 40 ms, that is, without waitingfor the mobile acknowledgement.

See impact of this feature in the following location: added theenableRepeatedFacchFr parameter.

PCUSN MSA32 E1 board introduction (30377)An evolution of the data configuration is needed because of the increase ofthe BSC 3000 Agprs connectivity.

See impact of this feature in the following location: modified thebscPcuPcmRefList, gprsPcuCrossConnectList and bscRefListparameters.

Differentiation of the BTS 18000 RMs with power transmit level of 40Watts (30713)

This feature allows operators to remotely identify Radio Module types forservice purposes (BTS output power configuration). Three types of RM areavailable: Radio Module (RM), Medium Power Radio Module (MPRM) andHigh Power Radio Module (HPRM).

See impacts of this feature in the following locations: modified thefollowing parameters: hardware configuration, bts equipment name.

BTS18000 4-way Tx coupler (H4) introduction (32300)This feature provides configurations for the 4-way Tx coupler (the H4module).

See impact of this feature in the following location: updated the btsequipment name parameter.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

Other changes 39

BTS18000 HPRM3T differentiation (33657)This feature introduces 60W Radio Modules with three TRX per modules,in the 850 MHz and the 900 MHz bands.

See impact of this feature in the following location: added the valueHigh Power Radio Module with 3 TRX per module to the description ofhardware configuration parameter.

Frequency independent high speed enhancements (34756)This features describes the high speed enhancements to all frequencies ofNortel GSM Access portfolio (900, 1800, 850 and 1900 MHz) for GSM-R.

See impact of this feature in the following location: added thehighSpeedUplinkDistortionRemoval parameter.

Other changesSee the following sections for information about changes that are notfeature-related:

• Removed information on BSC 12000 due to EOL (End Of Life) (v16.01)

• Replaces all occurrences toBSC 2G with BSC 12000HC (v16.01)

• Updated availabilityStatus parameter(v16.01)

• Updated operationalState parameter (v16.01)

• Updated pcmCircuitId parameter (v16.01)

• Updated timeSlotNumber parameter updated (v16.01)

• Removed hoCombination parameter and updated Section A.2 NewV14 parameters (v16.01)

• Removed allocBitmap and dLPwrValue parameters (v16.01)

• Added tcu2gGroup and pcuCellstate parameters (v16.01)

• Removed extUplinkTbActivation parameter (v16.01)

• Removed lapdLinkResources parameter (v16.01)

• Updated monitoredObjectClass parameter (v16.01)

• Updated parameters (v16.02)

— bsTxPwrMax

— mobileCountryCode

— early classmark sending



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


— signallingLinkSet

— dtxMode

— nUsfExt

• Added Attention precaution to show parameter range evolution foramrReserved1 (v16.04)

• Added sigPowerOverboost parameter (v16.04)

• Added uplinkPwrCtrlDuringUTDOA parameter (v16.04)


— siteName

— cRC

— pcmType

— bscName

— cellName

— radioSiteName

— pcuSNName

• Updated parameter availabilityStatus with value range "unknown"(v16.07)

• Added detail about semantic checks to description about parametergsmToUmtsReselection (v16.08)

• Removed Class 2 identifier that was in the parameter description aboutbscRefList (v16.08)

• Modified teiTranscoder class 2 parameter checks to differentiatebetween 2g and 3g (v16.08).

• Added information on external alarms for the BTS 6000 in externalalarm configuration class 2 parameter (16.09).

• Added note about configuration information in the microCellCaptureTimer and microCellStability parameters (16.09).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

41.

IntroductionThe Nortel GSM BSS Parameter Reference is a guide that describes allGSM BSS network element parameters that the user can access usingthe OMC-R.

ATTENTIONFor a BSC 3000, there are no class 1 parameters; all these parameters are nowclass 0. For a BSC 12000HC, the class 1 parameters have not changed.

PrerequisitesUsers must be familiar with networking principles.

They must also be familiar with the following manuals:

< 00 > : Nortel GSM BSS Documentation roadmap

< 01 > : Nortel GSM BSS Overview

< 06 > : Nortel GSM OMC-R Fundamentals

< 07 > : Nortel GSM BSS Fundamentals — Operating Principles

< 16 > : Nortel GSM TCU 2G Fundamentals

< 22 > : Nortel GSM BSC 12000HC Fundamentals

< 32 > : Nortel GSM OMC-R Routine Maintenance and Troubleshooting

< 34 > : Nortel GSM BSS Configuration — Operating Procedures

< 125 > : Nortel GSM BSS Performance Management — ObservationCounters Dictionary

< 128 > : Nortel GSM OMC-R Commands Reference — Objects and Faultmenus


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

42 Introduction

< 129 > : Nortel GSM OMC-R Commands Reference — Configuration,Performance, and Maintenance menus

< 130 > : Nortel GSM OMC-R Commands Reference — Security,Administration, SMS—CB, and Help menus

<133>: Nortel GSM BSS Performance Management — ObservationCounters Fundamentals

Navigation• Chapter 1 “Introduction ” (page 43) contains general information on

BSS operating parameters.

• Chapter 2 “Parameters listed in alphabetical order” (page 53) describesall the operating parameters listed in alphabetical order, and explainstheir use.

• Appendix A “Objects and parameters evolution” (page 535) lists newconfiguration parameters and objects by release.

• Appendix B “Parameters per feature” (page 543) presents BSSparameters per feature.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

43.

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Network configuration objects and their parametersThis dictionary summarizes all the GSM BSS parameters used to define allthe objects managed on the OMC-R. An object model is used to describeeach managed network element. Each object is defined in terms of itsparameters (also called attributes), and its relationships with other objects.A containment tree is used to depict the relationships among theseobjects (see Figure 1 "Object main tree structure" (page 43) to Figure 4"Network subtree objects" (page 45)). For more information on objects andparameters, refer to NTP < 07 >, for parameters listed per object, referto NTP < 128 >.

ATTENTIONFor a BSC 3000, there are no more class 1 parameters; all these parametersare now class 0. For a BSC 12000HC, the class 1 parameters have notchanged.

Figure 1Object main tree structure


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

44 Chapter 1 Introduction

Figure 2omc subtree objects

Figure 3md subtree objects


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

1.1 Network configuration objects and their parameters 45

Figure 4Network subtree objects


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Figure 5bsc 2G subtree objects

Figure 6bsc 3000 subtree objects


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

1.1 Network configuration objects and their parameters 47

Figure 7bsc 3000 subtree objects

Figure 8btsSiteManager subtree objects


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Users can create, modify, and delete objects using commands and actionsdisplayed in the menus of the OMC-R Browser window (see Figure 9"Menus in the OMC-R browser window" (page 48)). Parameters are widelyused in all commands and actions.

For more information on commands, refer to NTPs < 128 > to < 130 >.

Figure 9Menus in the OMC-R browser window

For CT2000 and datafill purposes, the following remarks must be takeninto consideration:

• If not indicated, the parameters are considered mandatory in all cases.For example, if a parameter is marked as Not Mandatory at the OMC-Rlevel, the user does not need to employ it in CT2000, there will not beany value in the command files to create the associated object.

• A parameter is dependant of an OMC feature only when indicated.For any parameter associated with an OMC feature, if the feature is


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

1.2 Different types of configuration parameters 49

active at OMC-R then the parameter is mandatory at object creationotherwise it is not. Example: a parameter marked as "cell Tiering"dependant will only be used when the cellTiering feature is active atthe OMC-R level.

• A parameter is considered product-dependant only when indicated andto be used only when the product is used in the network. For example,a parameter marked "BSC 3000" dependant is mandatory when theobject to create/modify belongs to the "BSC 3000" architecture.

• CT2000 is an offline, multi-release CM OAM tool. The CT2000 V3phased with BSS V15 can also configure sub-BSS releases V14.2 andV14.3. Throughout this document, the user will be able to distinguishwhether a parameter present in CT2000 DRF interface needs to befilled or not, depending upon the actual network configuration.

1.2 Different types of configuration parametersThere are two types of configuration parameters: customer andmanufacturer parameters.

• Customer parameters:

— addressing parameters, which are relative to objects (for example:bsc number)

— design parameters, which are relative to contract characteristics(for example: configRef, SiteName)

— optimization parameters, which are relative to network tuning (forexample: cellReselectHysteresis)

— operating parameters, which are relative to network operation (forexample: cellBarred)

• Manufacturer parameters:

— system parameters, which can seriously affect system operation,and which must be under the control of the manufacturer (forexample: runPwrControl)

— product parameters, which are incompatible with the current systemrelease (for example: sWVersionbackup)

New configuration parameters are summarized in Appendix A “Objects andparameters evolution” (page 535).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


1.3 Description of dictionary entriesEach parameter is described separately and arranged in alphabeticalorder.

Dictionary entries fall into two parts:

• the header line

• the main body, composed of several fields

1.3.1 Header lineThe header line contains some or all of the following information (seefollowing figure):

• the name of the OMC-R parameter

• the class of the parameter (if any)

• the BSS version from which it applies

Figure 10Header line


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

1.3 Description of dictionary entries 51

1.3.2 Main body of entriesThe main body contains up to nine fields:

• Description: parameter definition

• Value range: displayed in square brackets and the unit if anyExample: [2 to 300] seconds

• Object: object name(s) in which the parameter is defined

• Default value: value which allows to deactivate the function

• Type: parameter type. The five accepted values are the following:

type meaning is handled by theConfigurationManagement application

is handled by anyother applications(4)

DD Dynamic data(1)

X X (5)

DI Internal data (2) X

DP Permanent data(3)

X X (6)

DS Static data X

Id Identifier X X (7)

(1) : Dynamic parameters (DD) are not stored in databases. Theyare managed by the BSC applications, and they can be consulted onoperator request.(2) : Internal parameters (DI) are stored in the OMC-R operationdatabase (BDE) and are not sent to Network Elements. They supplyadditional information on how an object is configured at a given time.They can be consulted on operator request and some of them can alsobe modified.(3) : Permanent parameters (DP) are stored in the applicationdatabase (BDA) and in the operation database (BDE). Most of themare mandatory and they are defined with the object that uses them.They are managed by the operator.(4) : Fault Management, Performance Management, CommandFunctions, etc.(5) : parameter displayed in command output(6) : parameter entered by users(7) : parameter which is either entered by users, or displayed incommand output

• Condition: It indicates the necessary conditions in which theparameter can be used.

• Checks: Semantic checks performed by the OMC-R are indicated withthe Create [C], Set [M], Delete [D], or specific action [A] commands.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• Feature: Field introduced from V12. It indicates the reference of theFeature that impacts the parameter description.

• Restrictions: Applicable restrictions are indicated with the Create [C],Set [M], Delete [D], or specific action [A] commands.

• Remark: optional field containing comments.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

53.

Chapter 2 Parameters listed inalphabetical order

For a BSC 3000, there are no more class 1 parameters; all theseparameters are now class 0. For a BSC 12000HC, the class 1 parametershave not changed.

AabisSpy Class 3

Description : Whether measurement reports from the BTS and themobiles are forwarded to the BSC in order to spy on theAbis Interface.

The number of measurement reports on SICD and SICD8vis limited only for BSC 2G.

Value range : [in progress / not in progress]

Object : bts

Default value : not in progress

Type: DP

absoluteRFChannelNo Class 2

Description : Radio frequency used in the network frequency band by aradio time slot that does not obey frequency hopping laws.

Setting this attribute forbids the radio time slot to obeyfrequency hopping laws.

The frequency of the radio time slot that carries a cellBCCH in a TDMA frame (channelType = "mainBCCH","mainBCCHCombined", or "bcchSdcch4CBCH") isnot managed by users. When the parent bts object is


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

54 Chapter 2 Parameters listed in alphabetical order

unlocked, the system automatically assigns the cellbCCHFrequency to the concerned channel object andupdates it whenever it is changed.

Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[955 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (GSM-R),[975 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (E-GSM),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),[955 / 1023] / [0 / 55] (GSM-R).

Object : channel

Condition : To define if the TDMA does not hop

Type : DP

• [C/M] :The attribute is undefined when theradio time slot is authorized to hop or itschannelType is "mainBCCH", "mainBCCHCombined", or "bcchSdcch4CBCH".

• [C/M] :The attribute is defined when the radiotime slot is not authorized to hop andits channelType is "tCHFull", "sDCCH","sdcch8CBCH", or "cCH".

• [C/M] :When defined, the frequency is one ofthose allotted to the parent bts object(cellAllocation list).

• [M] :Concentric cell: When defined, thefrequency is not used by the channel objectsrelated to the transceiver objects allotted tothe other cell zone.

Checks :

• [C/M]:If the frequency hopping is not used, theabsoluteRFChannelNo attribute indicatesa radio frequency number which is locatedbetween [0 to 124] or [955 to 1023] whenthe standardIndicator attribute is equal to’Rgsm.’

access time end

Description : Time of the day after which the user is not allowed to log in.It is after access time start.

Value range : [<time> (18:00)]

Object : user profile

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M] :access time end is after access time start.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 55

access time start

Description : Time of the day after which the user is allowed to log in.

Value range : [<time> (09:00)]

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M] :access time start is before access timeend.

accessClassCongestion Class 3

Description : List of access classes that are not authorized in a cellduring TCH congestion phase (class 10 not included).

Value range : [0 to 9] User classes[11 to 15] Operator classes

Object : bts

Type : DP

Release : V9

accessibilityState

Description : MSC accessibility state

[reachable / congested / unReachable]

• reachable.................The remote signaling point iswithin reach.

• congested.................80% of the BSC pool ofbuffers handling outgoingMSC messages is full.

Value range :

• unReachable......The remote signaling point isout of reach.

Object : signallingLinkSet

Type : DD

acknowledged by

Description : To select alarms acknowledged by a given user. Enter theuser’s name as defined in the user’s profile.

Do not fill in if this criterion is not to be selected.

Value range : [case sensitive]

Object : Alarm logs - Filter

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


acknowledgment time

Description : To select messages acknowledged at that time.

Value range : [<date>,<time>]

Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130>.



Type : DP

activationObject

Description : Identifier or name of the traced bsc object on the OMC-R.

Value range : [bscId range]

Object : callPathTrace

Type : DP

• [C]:The bsc object is created.Checks :

• [C]:The callPathTrace object is not created for thebsc object. The Call path tracing function isunique in a given BSS.

Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified.

activationObject

Description : Identifier or name of the traced bsc object on the OMC-R.

Value range : [bscId range]

Object : traceControl

Type : DP

• [C]:The bsc object is created.Checks :

• [C]:The traceControl object is not created for thebsc object. The Call tracing function is uniquein a given BSS.


active (passive) chain disk state

Description : Chain disk state

Value range : [Working, Degraded, Partially degraded, Not significant]

Object : bsc


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 57

Type : DD

Release : V10

Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

active (passive) chain Dmux state

Description : State of passive equipment of chain controlled by ECIboard via alarm loops.

Value range : [working, fault]

Object : bsc

Type : DD

Release : V10


active (passive) chain ECI board state

Description : Chain ECI board state


Object : bsc

Type : DD

Release : V10


active (passive) chain REM link state

Description : Used BSC/OMC-R link state

Value range : [Working / Degraded / Partially degraded / Not significant]

Object : bsc

Type : DD

Release : V11


active (passive) chain Sic board state

Description : Chain SIC board state

Value range : [Number, card type (CCS7, SICD, SICX), internal state(working, fault)]

Object : bsc

Type : DD


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Release : V10


active (passive) chain sic channels state

Description : Chain SIC channel state (LAPD and SS7 channel state)

Value range : [num card / type Card (Lapd sic, ss7 sic, X25 sic) / sicboard port number / state Card (working/fault)]

Object : bsc

Type : DD

Release : V10


active (passive) chain sls board state

Description : SLS board state


Object : bsc

Type : DD

Release : V10


active (passive) chain state

Description : Chain state

Value range : [nominal state, deteriorated state]

Object : bsc

Type : DD

Release : V10


active (passive) chain switching capacity

Description : Chain switching capacity


Object : bsc

Type : DD

Release : V10



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 59

active (passive) chain tcu accessibility

Description : Chain TCU state


Object : bsc

Type : DD

Release : V10


active (passive) chain ute board state

Description : DDTI, BSCB, TSCB, and ALA board state


Object : bsc

Type : DD

Release : V10


active rem link

Description : BSC/OMC-R link used.

Value range : [rem link 0, rem link 1]

Object : bsc

Type : DD

Release : V10


activeChain

Description : Identifier of the BSC active chain.

Value range : [chainA / chainB]

Object : bsc

Type : DD



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Description: Allows a return to the initial receiver processingfor either peculiar cell configurations or both ofthem.In a first step, the parameter is a simple switch,but more than one bit should be allocated tohandle later extensions (automatic recognitionof configurations requiring the initial receiverprocessing).

Value range: 0/1 (0 : disabled, 1: enabled)

Object: transceiver

Default value: disabled

Type: DP

Release: V17

Note: This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

It is visible only in GPRS.

additional supervised PCM 0 Class 2

Description : Configuration of a new alarm controlled by a BTS in Dropand Insert configuration. The alarm is sent when a level 1transmission network link failure is detected by the BTS,and is caused by an odd PCM port connected with aphysical PCM link on the Abis interface between the BSCand one of the following BTSs:

• BTS 18000

• S12000

• S8000 BTS with BCF

• S8000 BTS with CBCF


• S2000 H/L BTS

• e-cell

Value range : [yes (the odd PCM link is supervised by the BTS) / no (theodd PCM link is not supervised by the BTS)]

If PCM 0 belongs to the bscSitePCMList parameter thevalues YES or NO are equivalent (recommendation: NO)

Object : btsSiteManager

Feature : GSM-R V12


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 61

Type : DP

Release : V12



• BTS 18000

• S12000




• S2000 H/L BTS

• e-cell




Feature : GSM-R V12

Type : DP

Release : V12



• BTS 18000

• S12000



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.




• S2000 H/L BTS

• e-cell




Feature : GSM-R V12

Type : DP

Release : V12



• BTS 18000

• S12000




• S2000 H/L BTS

• e-cell




Feature : GSM-R V12

Type : DP

Release : V12


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 63



• BTS 18000

• S12000




• S2000 H/L BTS

• e-cell




Feature : GSM-R V12

Type : DP

Release : V12



• BTS 18000

• S12000





411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• S2000 H/L BTS

• e-cell




Feature : GSM-R V12

Type : DP

Release : V12

additional unmasked users alarms Class 2

Description : Configuration of the new user (unprotected) external alarmloops controlled by the BTS (added to the already existingunprotected external alarms, see parameter "unmaskedusers alarms"). These additional alarms are detected bythe RECAL board of the main cabinet. When an alarm isunmasked, it means the relevant equipment is monitoredby the BTS.

There are 24 additional user (unprotected) alarms on theS8002 BTS, 14 alarms on the S8000 Outdoor BTS, and 20alarms on the S8000 Indoor BTS.

A user alarm is used when an external item of equipment isinserted in the BTS (a microwave terminal for instance) anddoes not require a new DLU.

Value range : [All alarms maskedAlarm 1 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 2 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 3 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 4 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 5 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 6 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 7 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 8 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 9 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 10 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 11 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 12 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 13 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 14 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 15 unmasked


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 65

Alarms 1 to 16 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 17 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 18 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 19 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 20 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 21 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 22 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 23 unmaskedAlarms 1 to 24 unmasked]


Feature : GSM-R V12

Type : DP

Release : V12

addresses

Description : Definition of the OMC-R user(s) to whom the message isaddressed.

Select the all option to send the message to all OMC-Rusers.

Select the users option to send the message to selectedOMC-R users. Enter their names as defined in their profiles[case sensitive], separated by the "&" character.

Object : user message - Answer / New message

Type : DP

adjacent cell umbrella ref Class 3

Description : Identifier of the adjacentCelHandOver object that describesthe neighbor cell towards which a directed retry will betriggered in BSC mode.

Value range : [0 to 31]

Object : bts

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The preferential umbrella cell must refer to anexisting adjacentCellHandOver object instance.

• [C/M]:When the function "directed retry" is madeby interrogation of the BTS, the preferentialumbrella cell must not be indicated.

Release : V9


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


adjacentCellHandOver

Description : Identifier of an adjacentCellHandOver object that defines aneighbor cell of a serving cell for handover managementpurposes. A bts object may reference up to thirty-twoobjects of this type.


Object : adjacentCellHandOver

Type : Id

• [C]:The associated bts object is created and theadjacentCellHandOver object is not created forthat object.

• [C]:The number of adjacentCellHandOverobjects created for a bts object is limited tomaxAdjCHOARMPerBts (static configurationdata).

• [C/M]:The (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency,networkColourCode) combination is unique inthe set including a serving cell and its neighborcells.

• [C/D]:If the related BSC application database is built,the parent bsc object is unlocked.

• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.

• [M/D]:The adjacentCellHandOver object is created.

• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis not built, it has been reset by an Off linereset BDA command.

• [D]:No mdScanner object refers to theadjacentCellHandOver object (no observationis running on that object).

Checks :

• [D]:At least one adjacentCellHandOver objectshould be created for the bts object.

Release : V8

adjacentCellHandOverId

Description : Identifier of an adjacentCellHandOver object that definesre-selection management parameters for a serving cell.A bts object may reference up to sixty-four objects of thistype.




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 67

Type : DP

Release : V14

adjacentCellReselection

Description : Identifier of an adjacentCellReselection object that definesre-selection management parameters for a serving cell.A bts object may reference up to thirty-two objects of thistype.


Object : adjacentCellReselection

Type : Id

• [C]:The bts object is created and theadjacentCellReselection object is notcreated for that object.

• [C]:The number of adjacentCellReselectionobjects created for a bts object is limited tomaxAdjCHOARMPerBts (static configurationdata).


• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked.

• [M/D]:The adjacentCellReselection object is created.

Checks :


Release : V8

adjacentCellReselectionId

Description : Identifier of an adjacentCellReselection object that definesre-selection management parameters for a serving cell.A bts object may reference up to sixty-four objects of thistype.



Type : DP

Release : V14


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


administrativeState

Description : Activation state of an alarm criteria.

An alarm criteria is created in unlocked state.

The OMC-R Fault Management function ignores theinactive criteria when processing notifications.

Value range : [locked (inactive) / unlocked (active)]

Object : alarm criteria

Type : DP

administrativeState

Description : ISO state

Value range : [locked / unlocked]

Object : atmRm

Feature : BSC/TCU e3: AR 1209

Type : DP

Release : V13

administrativeState



A bsc object is created in locked state.

Object : bsc

Type : DP

• [M]:If mobileCountryCode and mobileNetworkCode are defined for the bsc object, they matchthose of all dependent bts objects.

• [M]:The lapdLinkOMLRef attributes of alldependent transcoder objects refer to lapdLinkobjects using the same lapdTerminalNumberin the BSC.

The following check is only performed when the bsc objectis unlocked:

Checks :

• The dependent software object is created and itssWVersionRunning attribute defines a softwareversion downloaded to the BSC disk.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 69

administrativeState



A bscMdInterface object is created in unlocked state.

When the object is locked, the BSC involved in theBSS/OMC-R link described by this object cannotcommunicate with the OMC-R.

Object : bscMdInterface

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:The concerned bsc object is unlocked.

administrativeState


A bts object is created in locked state.

When the object is unlocked, the described cell will beworking if the carrier TDMA frame (or BCCH frame)is successfully configured in the BTS and at least<minNbOfTDMA> TDMA frames (including the carrierframe) are operating.

Value range : [locked / unlocked / shuttingDown (soft release)]

Object : bts

Type : DP


• [M]:It is not possible to change from"shuttingD own" to "unlocked" orfrom "locked" to "shuttingDown".

• [M]:It is not possible to change to"shuttingDown" if the applicationdatabase of the related BSC is notbuilt.

The following checks are only performed when the btsobject is unlocked:

Checks :


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• The associated handOverControl and powerControlobjects are created for the bts object.

• The mobileCountryCode and mobileNetworkCodeattributes match those of the parent bsc object whenthey are defined for that object.

• The frequencies in the cellAllocation list comply withthe standardIndicator attribute value.

• The minNbOfTDMA attribute value is less than orequal to the number of transceiver objects created forthe bts object.

• Cavity cell: The number of dependent transceiverobjects equals the number of frequencies in thecellAllocation list.

• Eight channel objects are created for each dependenttransceiver object if the cell works in normal mode,four channel objects are created for each dependenttransceiver object if the cell works in extended mode.

The following apply:

• Only one of them has a channelType equalto "mainBCCH", "mainBCCHCombined", or"bcchSdcch4CBCH".

• If the smsCB attribute of the bts object is "used", oneof them has a channelType equal to "sdcc8CBCH" or"bcchSdcch4CBCH".

• Concentric cell:

— Two transceiverZone objects are created for thebts object.

— Each dependent transceiver object refers to atransceiverZone object (transceiver zone Ref isdefined).

— All channel objects describing the cell BCCH orcommon channels (channelType = "cCH") dependon transceiver objects allotted to the outer zone.

— If frequency hopping is allowed in a zone (zonefrequency hopping), it is allowed in the cell(btsIshopping).

— The frequencies used by the transceiver objects ina zone are separate from the frequencies used bythe transceiver objects in the other zone.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 71

Releasing a bts object by shutting down sustains the callssupported by the described cell. The system actions areas follows:

• Radio resources remain allocated until the calls end.

• Once a TDMA frame is released, a CLEAR CONFIGREQUEST message is sent to the partneredTRX/DRX.

• When all calls are terminated, the cell is released(administrativeState = "locked" and operationalState= "disabled") and the concerned TRX/DRXs andTDMA frames are unreachable (availabilityStatus ="{dependency}".

Notes : • It is recommended to bar direct access to the cellbefore initiating a soft release (cellBarred = "barred"),to prevent off-call mobiles from listening to the cellduring the soft release phase, so they can immediatelyre-select another cell for receiving or sending calls.

• It is recommended also to forbid incoming handovers inthe cell (incomingHandOver = "disabled"), to removethe cell from the list of eligible cells and, thus, avoid itsselection if the BTS receives such a request.

• In order to speed up the soft release process, theForce HandOvers command can be used first toredirect the traffic currently handled by the serving celltowards its neighbor cells.

• If a hard lock request is sent during the soft releasephase, all the calls supported by the cell areimmediately released by the BSC.

• If the administrativeState of the object is unlocked andthe availabilityStatus is unknown, the object status isundetermined. You must request the status of the bscobject on the OMC-R, to update the network view.

administrativeState



A btsSiteManager object is created in locked state.


Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.Checks :

The following checks are only performed when thebtsSiteManager object is unlocked:

• The scheduled time slot (pcmTimeSlotNumber) ismasked in the btsSiteManager object radioSiteMask.

• The radioSiteMask of all btsSiteManager objectssharing a same PCM link in the BSS are dissociatedand their scheduled time slots are different and maskedin their radioSiteMask.

• The bscSitePcmList list includes at least two items ifthe btsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresenceattribute is "true".

• All pcmCircuit objects referenced in the list(pcmCircuitBsc components) are created for theparent bsc object and assigned to the Abis interface.

• One of them identifies a PCM link with a pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager reference in the range [0 to 3] for clocksynchronization.

• The greatest bts object identifier must be lower thanthe maxNbOfCells value of the parent btsSiteManagerobject.

• The configRef attribute defines a DLU file downloadedto the BSC disk.

• The dependent software object is created and itssWVersionRunning attribute defines a softwareversion downloaded to the BSC disk.

• If the administrativeState of the object is unlocked andthe availabilityStatus is unknown, the object status isundetermined. You must request the status of the bscobject on the OMC-R, to update the network view.

administrativeState

Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the collection of dataand the generation of the associated messages.


A callPathTrace object is created in locked state. Unlockthe object to start collecting data in the related BSC.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 73

In that case, data collecting is stopped in the related BSC.However, current messages are stored by the BSC andnotified to the OMC-R agent.


Type : DP

Notes : • If trace data collecting is stopped by locking the object,the BSC continues to send the current trace messagesto the OMC-R agent, but no notifications are issued.

• If trace data collecting is stopped by locking theobject or on reaching the end-of-session criterion, itis automatically restarted whenever the callPathTraceobject is unlocked. For instance, if the end-of-sessioncriterion defines a period of time that elapsed, datacollecting will restart for the entire period.

administrativeState



Object : cc


Type : DP

Release : V13

administrativeState



Object : cem


Type : DP

Release : V13

administrativeState



Object : controlNode



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

Release : V13

administrativeState

Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the transmission of theassociated messages to the OMC-R manager.

The administrativeState of an efd object is set by the userat object creation time and can be changed with the Modifycommand.


Object : efd

Type : DP

administrativeState



Object : g3BscEqp


Type : DP

Release : V13

administrativeState



Object : hardware transcoder 3G


Type : DP

Release : V13

administrativeState



Object : iem


Type : DP

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 75

administrativeState



Object : interfaceNode


Type : DP

Release : V13

administrativeState

Description : Activation state of a repeated job

A job object is created in unlocked state.

When a job is set inactive, it is not run.

Value range : [locked (inactive) / unlocked (active)]

Object : job

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:The job is not running.

administrativeState

Description : ISO state. It is set by the OMC-R agent.

Value range : [locked (= restored log) / unlocked (= current log)]

An unlocked log object describes a current log on theOMC-R agent disks. A locked log object describes a logrestored on the disks.

Object : log - Display

Type : DP

Note : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.

administrativeState



Object : lsaRc


Type : DP

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


administrativeState

Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the generation ofprocessed alarms when out-of-range conditions are met.

The administrativeState of an mdWarning object is set bythe user at object creation time and can be changed withthe Modify command.

A change of state is effective when the OMC-R is restarted.Whatever the state of the object, the related notificationsare always forwarded to the OMC-R manager.


Object : mdWarning

Type : DP

administrativeState



Object : mms


Type : DP

Release : V13

administrativeState



Object : omu


Type : DP

Release : V13

administrativeState



A pcmCircuit object is created in locked state.

Object : pcmCircuit


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 77

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.

administrativeState



A pcu object is created in locked state.

Object : pcu

Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12)

Type : DP


Release : V12

administrativeState



A signallingLink object is created in locked state.

Object : signallingLink

Type : DP


administrativeState



Object : sw8kRm


Type : DP

Release : V13

administrativeState



Object : tmu



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

Release : V13

administrativeState

Description : ISO state. Locking the object blocks the collection of dataand the generation of the associated messages.


A traceControl object is created in locked state. Unlock theobject to start collecting trace data in the related BSC.


Type : DP


• If traced calls are not terminated when the object islocked, all trace information related to those calls will belost, unless partial record generation was requested.In that case, only data that are not yet recorded will belost.

• Trace data collecting is automatically restarted in theBSC whenever the traceControl object is unlocked.

administrativeState



A transceiverEquipment object is created in locked state.

Object : transceiverEquipment

Type : DP


• [M]:It is not possible to change from "shuttingDown" to "unlocked" or from "locked" to"shuttingDown".

• [M]:It is not possible to change to "shuttingDow n"if the application database of the related BSCis not built.

Checks :

The following checks are only performed when thetransceiverEquipment object is unlocked:


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 79

• The lapdLinkOMLRef and lapdLink RSLRef attributesof the transceiverEquipment object refer to lapdLinkobjects using the same lapdTerminalNumber in theparent BSC.

• The related software object is created and itssWVersionRunning attribute defines a softwareversion downloaded to the BSC disk.

Releasing a transceiverEquipment object by shutting downsustains the calls supported by the described TRX/DRXand the partnered TDMA frame. The system actions whichmay be carried out are the following:

• To carry out a soft release. This action does notautomatically cause a handover. By carrying out thisaction, the operator must wait for the end of the comsbefore the TRX/DRX changes to "blocked".

• To carry out a forced handover. A forced handover onthe bts object will cause the DRX/TRX to change to"blocked" more quickly.

• If the TDMA frame affected by this operation has priorityover other frames in the BSS, the BSC re-configuresthat frame on a different TRX/DRX and immediatelytransfers the current calls handled by the TRX/DRXbeing released.

• When all calls are transferred or terminated, theTRX/DRX is released (administrativeState ="locked" and operationalState = "disabled"), and thepartnered TDMA frame is unreachable if it has not beenreconfigured (availabilityStatus = "{dependency}".

Note : If a hard lock request is sent during the soft release phase,all the calls handled by the TRX/DRX are immediatelyreleased by the BSC.

If the administrativeState of the object is unlocked andthe availabilityStatus is unknown, the object status isundetermined. You must request the status of the bscobject on the OMC-R, to update the network view.

administrativeState



A transcoder object is created in locked state.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : transcoder

Type : DP


The following checks are only performed when thetranscoder object is unlocked:

• All transcoder objects created for the same parentbsc object refer to lapdLink objects that use the samelapdTerminalNumber in the BSC.

• <maxTranscdBPerTransed> dependenttranscoderBoard objects are created for thetranscoder object.

administrativeState



A transcoderBoard object is created in locked state.

Object : transcoderBoard

Type : DP


The following check is only performed when thetranscoderBoard object is unlocked:

The related software object is created and itssWVersionRunning attribute defines a software versiondownloaded to the BSC disk.

administrativeState



Object : trm


Type : DP

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 81

administrativeState



An xtp object is created in locked state.

Object : xtp

Type : DP


• [M]:It is not possible to change from "shuttingDown" to "unlocked" or from "locked" to"shuttingDown".

• [M]:It is not possible to change to "shuttingDown"if the application database of the related BSCis not built.

Checks :

The BSC will refuse to unlock a terrestrial traffic circuit thatcould break the OMC channel connection down.

Releasing an xtp object by shutting down sustains the callsupported by the described terrestrial traffic circuit. Thesystem actions are as follows:

• Any further attempt of the MSC to allocate the terrestrialcircuit is refused.

• When the call is completed, the terrestrial circuitis released (administrativeState = "locked" andoperationalState = "disabled").

Notes : • All terrestrial circuits supported by a given PCM link canbe softly released at the same time. If the PCM linksupports a signaling link, it remains operating.

• If a hard lock request is sent during the soft releasephase, the call supported by the terrestrial circuit isimmediately released by the BSC.

agprsFilterCoefficient Class 3

Description : The load of each cell considered in dynamic AGPRSalgorithm is filtered with a forgetting factor given byagprsFilterCoefficient.

Value range : [0 to 100] %

Object : bts

Default value : 0 (deactivates the feature in the cell at the PCU level).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

Release : V14

agprsHysteresis Class 3

Description : Not used.


Object : bts

Default value : 0

Note : For a BSC version later than V15, agprsHysteresis is notavailable at the OMC-R.

Type : DP

Release : V14

agprsThreshold Class 3

Description : Not used.

Value range : [not used]

Object : bts

Default value : 0

Note : For a BSC version later than V15, agprsThreshold is notavailable at the OMC-R.

Type : DP

Release : V14

agprsTsSharingProtection Class 2

Description : Protection Timer in case of BSC overload.

Value range : [0 to 255] seconds

Object : pcu

Default value : 0.

Note : Values from 0 to 9 are assimilated by PCU like 10.

Note : For a BSC version later than V15, agprsTsSharingProtection is not available at the OMC-R, and PCU automaticallyset it to 10.

Type : DP

Release : V14


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 83

agpsTimer Class 3

Description : Duration of an A-GPS location.


Object : bsc

Default value : 0 second

Type : DP

Release : V15

Note : This parameter is optional.

aLAIntState

Description : The internal state of the BSC ALA board.

Value range : [working / fault]

• working .... The board is correctly configured.

• fault ... The board configuration was unsuccessful.

Object : bsc and hardware BSC 12000HC

Type : DD


alarm criteria

Description : Active alarm configuration.

Value range : [day configuration / night configuration / specificconfiguration / reference configuration]

The active configuration is the alarm criteria configurationcurrently used by the OMC-R Fault Management functionfor fault processing.

The names given to the alarm operating configurations(day / night / specific) only serve to identify them. Anyconfiguration may be activated at any time by users, butonly one can be active at a time.

Object : omc


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

Notes : • When the OMC-R is started up or the active server isswitched over, the OMC-R activates the configurationthe name of which corresponds to the time of the daythat start-up or switchover occurs. The following apply:

— The daytime configuration is activated when theevent occurs between 9:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m.(static configuration data).

— The nighttime configuration is activated when theevent occurs between 6:00 p.m. and 9:00 a.m.(static configuration data).

• The active configuration can be forced by users atany other time. If a problem occurs while loading theselected configuration, the OMC-R uses the referenceconfiguration and sends a warning message to the user.

alarm criteria

Description : Identifier of an alarm criterion on the OMC-R.

Value range : [0 to 99 999] (manufacturer configuration)

Users can lock / unlock alarmcriteria which IDs are lower than100 000.

Users can create / modify / delete criteria, which IDs aregreater than or equal to 100 000.


Type : Id

• [C]:The alarm criteria identifier is in the range [100001 to 2 147 483 646].

• [C]:The alarm criteria does not exist in the operatorconfigurations.

Checks :

• [M/D]:The alarm criteria exists in the operatorconfigurations.

alarm number

Description : To select alarms with a given number.


Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 85

alarm severity

Description : To select alarms according to the severity.


Value range : [critical / major / minor]


Type : DP

alarm state

Description : To select alarms according to the acknowledgement state.


Value range : [acknowledged / unacknowledged]


Type : DP

alarmDuration

Description : Alarm hold duration when a counter is involved.

Value range : [0 to 345600] second


Condition : To define if a counter is associated with the criterion.

Type : DP

alarmListConverter

Description : State of the TCU converters

Value range : [working / failed]

Object : transcoder

Type : DD


alarmListFan

Description : State of the TCU fans


Type : DD



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


alarmListFanBoard

Description : State of the TCU fan boards


Object : transcoder

Type : DD


alarmListVCOTension

Description : State of the TCU VCO voltage.


Object : transcoder

Type : DP


alarmPriority

Description : Alarm processing priority.

Value range : [CLEARED / critical / indeterminate / major / minor /warning]

There are six defined priority levels which provide anindication of how it is perceived that the capability ofthe managed object has been affected. The followingdefinitions are used:

• CLEARED: ......The cleared severity levelindicates the clearing of oneor more previously reportedalarms. This alarm clearsall alarms for this managedobject that have the sametype, probable cause, andspecific problems.

• critical: .........The critical severity levelindicates that a serviceaffecting condition hasoccurred and an immediatecorrective action is required.

• indeterminate: ....The indeterminate severitylevel indicates that theseverity level of the serviceaffecting condition cannot bedetermined.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 87

• major: ..........The major severity levelindicates that a serviceaffecting condition hasdeveloped and a deferredcorrective action is required.

• minor: ..........The minor severity levelindicates the existence of anon-service affecting faultcondition and that a correctiveaction should be taken inorder to prevent a moreserious fault.

• warning: .........The warning severity levelindicates the detection of apotential or impending serviceaffecting fault, before anysignificant effects have beenfelt. An action should betaken to further diagnose andcorrect the problem in orderto prevent it from becoming amore serious service affectingfault.

Object : mdWarning

Type : DP

algoId class 2

Description : Definition of the speech algorithms used in a TCB.

This parameter is a component of the algorithm Usedattribute. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.

Value range : [full rate / enhanced full rate]


Default value : full rate

Type : DP

Release : V8

algorithm Used Class 2

Description : Speech processing algorithm parameters used in the SPUprocessors of a TCB.

Value range : algoId = [full rate / full rate & enhanced full rate],powerDownLink = [-15 to +15] dB,powerUpLink = [-15 to +15] dB.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• algoId ..........speech algorithms used

• powerDownLink ...power gain on the downlink

• powerUpLink .....power gain on the uplink


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The algoId component contains "full rate".

• [C/M]:The algoId component also contains "enhancedfull rate" if the parent transcoder object versionattribute value is "TCB_2".

Release : V8

allocationState

Description : TDMA frame allocation state

Value range : [available / not available / not significant]

• available .................The SACCH FILLINGmessages containing theSYS INFO 5 and 6 have beenacknowledged by the BTS.

• not available ....The SACCH FILLINGmessages containing theSYS INFO 5 and 6 have notbeen acknowledged by theBTS.

• not significant ....The SACCH FILLINGmessages containing theSYS INFO 5 and 6 have notbeen sent to the BTS by theBSC.

Object : transceiver

Type : DD

allocPriorityTable Class 3

Description : Table of conversion of the 18 external priorities (14 areGSM external priorities) to 13 internal priorities. (SeeDefault value below.)

Value range : [0 to 7] (BSS V14 and V12) "0" defines the highest priority,[0 to 12] (BSS V15) "0" defines the highest priority.

Object : bts

Feature : WPS queuing management (22463)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 89

Default value : BSS V15: 0 8 9 10 11 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0BSS V12 or V14: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Type : DP

allocPriorityThreshold Class 3

Description : Number of free TCHs needed for processing a TCHallocation request with an internal priority higher than 1.

These channels are reserved to allocation requests with amaximum internal priority (priority 0).

The TCH allocation is performed according to thisalgorithm:

Number of freeTCH = 0

1 ≤ Number of freeTCH ≤

allocPriorityThreshold

Number of free TCH> allocPriorityThreshold

TCH request ofpriority 0

- queueing ifdefined or- reject

TCH allocated TCH allocated

TCH request ofpriority >0

- queueing ifdefined or- reject

- queueing if definedor- reject

TCH allocated

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : bts

Default value : 0

Type : DP

allocPriorityTimers Class 3

Description : Table of timers defining the maximum queuing time of TCHallocation requests (public and WPS requests), accordingto the internal priority.

Value range : [List of 8 elements for BSS V12 and V14]: [0-255] seconds[List of 13 elements for BSS V15]: [0-255] seconds

Object : bts


Default value : For BSS V15: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 28 28 28 28 28For BSS V12 and V14: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


allocWaitThreshold Class 3

Description : Table of thresholds defining the maximum number of TCHallocation requests queued (public and WPS), according totheir internal priority.

Value range : [List of 8 elements for BSS V12 and V14]: [0-63][List of 13 elements for BSS V15]: [0-63]

Object : bts


Default value : For BSC V15: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 5For BSS V12 and V14: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Type : DP

allOtherCasesPriority Class 3

Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of TCH allocation requests with cause "othercases".

This priority is used in primo-allocations or when anSDDCH cannot be allocated for overload reasons.


Object : bts

Default value : 17

Type : DP

amrAdaptationSet Class 3

Description : This attribute defines the lines of parameter used for theadaptation mechanism.

This attribute is modified by the Manager.

Value changes are notified to the Manager.

This attribute can only be modified if the ’bts’ objectinstance in unlocked.

Value range : Int [0 to 3]

Object : bts

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V14


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 91

Note : This parameter is available for all BSCs 3000 andapplicable to versions earlier than V15.1.1.

Note : For a V15.1.1 BSC, amrAdaptationSet is replacedby the following parameters: amrDlFrAdaptationSet,amrDlHrAdaptationSet, amrUlFrAdaptationSet, andamrUlHrAdaptationSet. Refer to these entries in thisdictionary. amrAdaptationSet is however present at theOMC-R.

amrDirectAllocIntRxLevDL Class 3

Description : Downlink RxLev threshold for direct AMR TCH allocationin the inner zone.



This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance in unlocked.

Value range : Int [-110 to -47]

Object : handOverControl

Default value : -80 to -79 dB

Type : DP

Checks : • 057CO01- amrDirectAllocIntRxLevDL >=concentAlgoIntRxLev whereconcentAlgoIntRxLev is intRxLev inthe ConcentAlgoData sequence ofconcentAlgoData attribute.

Release : V14

Note : This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

amrDirectAllocIntRxLevUL Class 3

Description : Uplink RxLev threshold for direct AMR TCH allocation inthe inner zone.







Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Release : V14


amrDirectAllocRxLevDL Class 3

Description : Downlink RxLev threshold for direct AMR TCH allocation.







Type : DP

Release : V14


amrDirectAllocRxLevUL Class 3

Description : This attribute defines the downlink RxLev threshold fordirect AMR TCH allocation.







Type : DP

Release : V14


amrDlFrAdaptationSet class 3

Description : This attribute defines the lines of parameter used for thedownlink AMR full rate adaptation mechanism.

Object : bts


Type : DP

Feature : AMR Optimizations


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 93

Default value : 0

Release : V15

Note : This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

amrDlHrAdaptationSet class 3

Description : This attribute defines the lines of parameter used for thedownlink AMR half rate adaptation mechanism.

Object : bts


Type : DP


Default value : 0

Release : V15


amrFRIntercellCodecMode Class 3

Description : Target codec mode to trigger an intercell quality handoverfrom a RR channel.




Value range : [12.2 / 10.2 / 6.7 / 5.9 / 4.75]


Default value : 4.75

Type : DP

Release : V14


amrFRIntracellCodecMode Class 3

Description : Target codec mode to trigger an intracell quality handoverFR to FR.





411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Value range : [12.2 / 10.2 / 6.7 / 5.9 / 4.75]



Type : DP

Release : V14


amrHRIntercellCodecMode Class 3

Description : Target codec mode to trigger an intercell quality handoverfrom an HR channel.




Value range : [7.4 / 6.7 / 5.9 / 4.75]



Type : DP

Release : V14


amrHRToFRIntraCodecMode Class 3

Description : Target codec mode to trigger an intracell quality handoverfrom AMR HR to FR.




Value range : [7.4 / 6.7 / 5.9 / 4.75]


Default value : 6.7

Type : DP

Release : V14



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 95

amriRxLevDLH Class 3

Description : This attribute is the downlink RxLev threshold in case ofAMR FR intracell handover.


Value range : [-110 to -47]



Type : DP

Release : V14


amriRxLevULH Class 3

Description : This attribute is the uplink RxLev threshold in case of AMRFR intracell handover.




Default value : - 75 to - 74 dB

Type : DP

Release : V14


amrReserved1

Description : See information contained in the Attention paragraphbelow.



Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V16

Note 1: This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


ATTENTIONParameter range evolution for amrReserved 1 is as follows:

• 0: RATSCCH procedure enabled (default value)

• 1: RATSCCH procedure disabled - initial Full Rate ACS is optimistic

• 2: RATSCCH procedure disabled - initial Full Rate ACS is pessimistic

amrReserved2 Class 3

Description : AMR L1m deactivation for:

AMR FR intracell handover and AMR quality inter-cellhandover and AMR power control mechanism.

This parameter is available at the OMC-R level, managedby all NRPs, except the AMR activation NRP and thisparameter is not managed by the CT2000 and the SDO.


Deactivations for this parameter are:

Value 0 (default): AMR L1m algorithms are used.

Value 1: AMR FR intracell handover and AMR quality intercell handover are deactivated, but the AMR power controlis activated.

Value 2: AMR FR intracell handover and AMR quality intercell handover are activated, and the AMR power control isdeactivated.

Value 3: AMR FR intracell handover, AMr quality inter cellhandover and the AMR power control are deactivated.


Type : DP

Release : V14


amrUlFrAdaptationSet class 3

Description : This attribute defines the lines of parameter used for theuplink AMR full rate adaptation mechanism.

Object : bts


Type : DP


Default value : 0


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 97

Release : V15


amrUlHrAdaptationSet class 3

Description : This attribute defines the lines of parameter used for theuplink AMR half rate adaptation mechanism.

Object : bts


Type : DP


Default value : 0

Release : V15

Note : This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1

answerPagingPriority Class 3

Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of TCH allocation requests with cause "reply topaging".

This priority is used in signaling mode on TCH only.


Object : bts

Default value : 17

Type : DP

architecture

Description : Architecture of the OMC-R agent in terms of servers. It isprovided by the OMC-R agent.

The standard configuration is "one active with one passive"and the basic configuration is "one active without passive".

Value range : [dual servers but passive not runningdual servers runningsingle server running]

Object : md - Display

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:This attribute is not managed by users.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


assignRequestPriority Class 3

Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of TCH allocation requests with cause "immediateassignment".

This priority is used when radio resource allocationqueueing is not requested by the MSC or not authorizedin the BSS (refer to the bscQueueingOption entry in theDictionary).


Object : bts

Default value : 17

Type : DP

associatedInterface Class 0

Description : Interface on which a LAPD link is used.

Value range : [Abis / Ater / Agprs]

A LAPD link used on the Abis interface carries BTSsignaling.

A LAPD link used on the Ater interface carries TCUsignaling.

A LAPD link used on the Agprs interface carries PCUsignaling.

Object : lapdLink


Type : DP

Checks : • [C]:The value is whether "Abis" or "Agprs" ifthe lapdConcentration attribute value is"disabled".

• [C]:The value is whether "Abis" or "Ater" ifthe lapdConcentration attribute value is"enabled".

• [C]:The "Agprs" value is only allowed for PCUlapdLink interface from V12 BSCs.

Restrictions : • [M] :This attribute cannot be modified.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 99

associatedLog

Description : Identifier of the log object that describes the associatedrecords on the OMC-R agent disks.

For an mdScanner object, this attribute is displayed providedmdLog = "logged".

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : callPathTrace, mdScanner, traceControl - Display

Type : DI

Restrictions : • [C/M]:This attribute is not managed by users.

associatedTMUPosition

Description : Gives the number of the TMU hosting the active associatedcore process (hardware slot position).

Value range : [Shelf Number (0 or 1) and Slot Number (from 1 to 15) ofthe TMU]

Object : btsSiteManager, signallingLinkSet, transcoder and pcu

Feature : BSC 3000 cell group management/load balancing - stage 1(139111).

Default value : None

Type : DD

Release : V13


aterLapd

Description : ATER LAPD distribution and status.

Value range : List of ATER LAPD descriptions [pcmAterId, tsAterId,lapdIsPresent, lapdIsOpened], with:pcmAterId: 0 to 65535tsAterId: 0 to 65535lapdIsPresent: yes / nolapdIsOpened: yes / no

Object : lsaRc

Feature : BSC/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement

Type : DD

Release : V16


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


atmRm

Description : The ATM RM (ATM Resource Module), which provides aSONET OC-3c (Optical Carrier level 3c) interface to allowdirect connection between the Interface Node and theControl Node.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : atmRm

Type : DP

Release : V13

atmRmId

Description : Identifier of the ’atmRm’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : atmRm

Type : DP

Release : V13

attenuation Class 2

Description : Attenuation due to coupling system losses. This valuedepends on the BTS configuration.

Value range : [0 to 14] dB


Default value : Depends on the equipment.

Type : DP

Release : V9

Note : If the attenuation parameter is set [0 to 14], then theDLU attenuation is replaced by the OMC attenuationparameter.

auditBdaStatus

Description : Synthetic result of a BDA audit

Value range : [no difference / some differences (see list below) / manydifferences (see partial list below)]

The information is stored in sessions logs.

• no difference ......Object instances in BDA andBDE are identical.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 101

• some differences ...Less than ten object instancesare different in BDA and BDE(they are listed in the sessionlogs).

• many differences ..More than ten objectinstances are different inBDA and BDE (the first tenare listed in the session logs).

Object : bsc

Type : DI

auditState

Description : Whether an audit is in-progress in the BSC. Access toa BSC are blocked whenever an audit of its applicationdatabase is in-progress (Audit BDA command).

This attribute is unknown to the BSC and cannot be directlymodified by users.

When an audit is in-progress in a BSC, all configurationcommands involving the BSS are forbidden.

Value range : [inProgress / notInProgress]

Object : bsc

Type : DI

authorised user

Description : List of the users authorized to copy, display and run thecommand file. Enter their names as defined in their profilesand use the "&" character to separate them.

Object : commandFile

Type : DP

availabilityStatus


Refer to the operationalState entries in the Dictionary fora description of possible state parameter combinationsfor these objects: administrativeState, availabilityStatus,operationalState.

Value range : [{} / {disabled} / {failed} ]

Object : bsc, bscMdInterface, lapdLink, pcmCircuit, signallingLink,transcoder

transcoderBoard.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DD

Note : The availabilityStatus parameter is only available forlapdLink OML and lapdLink RSL objects on BSC 12000HC.

availabilityStatus


Refer to the operationalState entries in the Dictionary fora description of possible state parameter combinationsfor these objects: administrativeState, availabilityStatus,operationalState.

Value range : [{} / {disabled} / {failed} / {unknown}]

Object : btsSiteManager, transceiver, transceiverEquipment,

Type : DD

Note : If the administrativeState of the object is unlocked andthe availabilityStatus is unknown, the object status isundetermined. You must request the status of the bscobject on the OMC-R, to update the network view.

availabilityStatus


The "enabled" state for a bts object is a transitorystate that follows a soft release request. Refer to theadministrativeState entry related to the bts object in theDictionary.

Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed} /{unknown}]

Object : bts

Type : DD

Note : If the administrativeState of the object is unlocked andthe availabilityStatus is unknown, the object status isundetermined. You must request the status of the bscobject on the OMC-R, to update the network view.

availabilityStatus


Value range : {notInstalled}/{}/{failed}/{dependency}/{}]

Object : atmRM, cc, cem, controlNode, iem, interfaceNode, lsaRc,mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu, trm

Type : DD


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A 103

availabilityStatus


The "logFull" state applies to a log object that describesan observation or trace log, and indicates that the savingmessage directory on the OMC-R agent disks is full. Referto the capacityAlarmThreshold entry in the Dictionary.

Value range : [{} / {logFull}]

Object : log

Type : DD

availabilityStatus


Value range : [{} (the associated observation is running) / {offDuty} (theassociated observation has ended)]

Object : mdScanner

Type : DD

availabilityStatus


Refer to the operationalState entry in the Dictionary fora description of possible state parameter combinations:administrativeState, availabilityStatus, operationalState.

Value range : [{} / {dependency} / {failed}]

Object : pcu


Type : DD

Release : V12

availabilityStatus


Refer to the operationalState entry in the Dictionary fora description of possible state parameter combinations:availabilityStatus and operationalState.


Object : pcusn


Type : DD

Release : V12


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


availabilityStatus


Refer to the operationalState entry in the Dictionary fora description of possible state parameter combinations:administrativeState, availabilityStatus, operationalState,and usageState.

A state change notification is issued after the soft release.


Object : xtp

Type : DD

available synchronization sources

Description : Available synchronization sources gives all thesynchronization signals detected by the BTS, regardlessof the BTS current synchronization mode and of thesynchronization mode selected at the OMC.

This parameter is used in response of the "Display DataInformation" (normal) action.

Value range : [Abis synchronization only / Abis + external synchronizationsource coming from a master BTS / Abis + GPS connectiondetected]

Object : bts

Feature : BTS synchronization

averagingPeriod Class 2

Description : Number of SACCH multi-frames over which theinterference levels are averaged. This averaging will beperformed immediately before the transmission of theRESOURCE INDICATION message.

This attribute, together with the "thresholdInterference"attribute, allows users to manage interferences in radiocells. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.

Value range : [0 to 255] SACCH frame (1 unit = 480 ms on TCH, 470 mson SDCCH)


Default value : 20

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 105

Bbackup manager addresses

Description : Backup addresses of the OMC-R manager that receives themessages. They are provided by the manager.

Object : efd - Display

Type DI


backupServer

Description : Name of the backup OMC-R agent server if any. It isprovided by the OMC-R agent.

In a mono-server configuration with redundancy, thisattribute is not filled in.


Type : DP

baseColourCode Class 3

Description : Base station Color Code assigned to a neighbor cell. The(BCC, NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC.



Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:Each defined (baseColourCode,bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode)combination is unique in the set including aserving cell and its neighbor cells.

baseColourCode Class 2

Description : Base station Color Code assigned to a serving cell. It isbroadcast on the cell SCH and is used to distinguish cellsthat share the same BCCH frequency.

The (BCC, NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC.

The information is broadcasted on the cell SCH.

Several BCCs may be assigned to a same BTS. Hence,different codes can be allotted to cells that may haveoverlapping areas (adjacent cells).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


The Base Station Identity Code (BSIC) is a 6-bit code: bits6-5-4 = NCC (PLMN color code), bits 3-2-1 = BCC (Basestation color code). At cell level, the NCC bits can be used toincrease BCC color possibilities when the NCC is not needed.


Object : bts

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:Each defined (baseColourCode, bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode) combination isunique in the set including a serving cell and itsneighbor cells.

• [M]:Modification of bCCHFrequency, baseColourCode and networkColourCode is forbidden whileinterference matrix is running.

batteryRemoteControllerPresence Class 2

Description : Whether BRC (Battery Remote Controller) board is presentor not.

Value range : [0, 1]

• 0: Not present

• 1: present


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V15

bCCHFrequency Class 3

Description : Radio frequency allocated to a neighbor cell BCCH in thenetwork frequency band.

The information is broadcast on the serving cell SACCH.

Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[955 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (GSM-R),[975 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (E-GSM),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),[955 / 974] for GSM-R,[975 / 1023] / [0] for GSM-R (EGSM BCCH),[1 / 55] for GSM-R (PGSM BCCH).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 107

Note : The standardIndicator for GSM-R values is Rgsm.


Type : DP


• [M]:The bCCHFrequency value must be setaccording to the standardIndicator attribute.

• [C/M]: For an adjacentCellHandOverNortel objectinstance, the bCCHFrequency can take one ofthe following values:[1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network),[0 to 124] or [975 to 1023] (E-GSM),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),

[0 to 124] or [955 to 1023] (GSM-R).

• [C]:Cannot create a new instance of adjacentCellUTRAN if the number ofdifferent bCCHFrequency parameters inadjacentCellHandOver object is equal to 32.The purpose of this check is to forbid UTRANneighbour cell creation if 32 different BCCHfrequencies are already declared for GSMneighbour cells.

• [C]:Cannot set the bCCHFrequency parameteron an adjacentCellHandOver object toa 32nd different value in the subset ofadjacentCellHandOver instances belonging tothe same upper bts if at least one instance ofadjacentCellUTRAN is created. The purposeof this check is to forbid existence 32 differentBCCH frequencies on the GSM neighbourcells under the same GSM cell if at least oneUTRAN neighbour cell is declared.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [M]:Modification of bCCHFrequency, baseColourCode and networkColourCode is forbidden whileinterference matrix is running.

• [C]:Customer should not validate IM activationon a cell with 32 instances of adjacentCell(existing IM control) or with 31 instancesof adjacentCell with 31 different values ofbCCFFrequeny parameter if at least oneinstance of adjacentCellUTRAN is created. Thepurpose of this check is to warn customer onIM activation if at least one UTRAN neighbourcell is declared and the cell already has realneighboring cells with 31 different BCCH.


Description : Radio frequency used for selection and re-selectionmanagement.

The information is broadcast on the serving cell BCCH.

Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[955 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (GSM-R),[975 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (E-GSM network),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),[955 / 974] for GSM-R,[975 / 1023] / [0] for GSM-R (EGSM BCCH),[1 / 55] for GSM-R (PGSM BCCH).



Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:The bCCHFrequency value must be setaccording to the standardIndicator attribute.

Checks : • [C/M]:For an adjacentCellReselection object instance,the bCCHFrequency can take one of thefollowing values:[1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network),[0 to 124] or [975 to 1023] (E-GSM),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),[0 to 124] or [955 to 1023] for GSM-R.

Note : An adjacentCellReselection object can use the same BCCHas the serving cell to which it is associated. This allowsa mobile to immediately recover the cell on which it was


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 109

"camping" after being switched off, then switched back on,and is especially useful in the selection process.


Description : Radio frequency allocated to a cell BCCH (BroadcastControl CHannel) in the network frequency band.

The information is broadcast on the cell SACCH.

The BCCH frequency is automatically assigned to theradio time slot carrying the cell BCCH when the cell isbrought into service (absoluteRFChannelNo attribute ofthe channel object describing the carrier TDMA frame TS0).It is broadcast to the radio time slot whenever modified.

The BCCH is used by the BTS for broadcasting cell relatedsystem information to MS, such as frequency band andlist of frequency channels used, authorized servicesand access conditions, list of neighbor cells, and radioparameters (maximum transmission strength, minimumreception strength, etc.).

Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[955 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (GSM-R),[975 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (E-GSM network),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),[955 / 974] for GSM-R, if at least one of the cell allocationERFCN is in the [955 / 974] range, the BCCH must be alsoincluded within this range.[975 / 1023] / [0] (GSM-R (EGSM BCCH)),[1 / 55] (GSM-R (PGSM BCCH)).


Object : bts

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:The BCCH frequency is included in thecellAllocation list.

• [M]:Each defined (baseColourCode,bCCHFrequency, networkColourCode)combination is unique in the set including aserving cell and its neighbor cells.

• [M]:For a dualband cell, the bCCHFrequencyattribute must be in the primary band offrequencies.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


bckgDLLayer3WindowSize Class 3

Description : Anticipation window size to be used in the context of BTSbackground downloading. It is used by SPR for BTS Abisdownloading.

Value range : [1..8]

Object : bsc

Default value : 1

Feature : BSC 3000 support of BTS background downloading

Type : DP

Release : V16

Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC 3000only.

bdaNewBscState

Description : Current bsc state related to the new BDA

Value range : [ready for on-line reset / running on-line reset / waiting foron-line build / waiting for software change / waiting for Bdachange / running software change / running Bda change /waiting for end of probative phase / { }]

Object : bsc

Type : DI

Remark : This attribute is modified by the OMC-R agent whenprocessing "end of probative phase", "Activate New BDA","On line reset BDA", or "On-line reset cancel" actions orreceiving an unsolicited message sent by the BSC.

This attribute is NULL { } as long as the BSC has not beenconnected to the OMC-R agent.

Note : For a V10 BSC, this attribute is always NULL { }.

The different states are obtained according to the following:

• "ready for on-line reset": This state is reached after thefollowing occurrences:

— BSC complete restart

— "end of probative phase" or BDA "new" activation orreset on-line cancel succeeded


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 111

— partial or complete spontaneous BSC restart

— BSC operating command aborted

• "running on-line reset": BSC reset on-line is beingexecuted

• "waiting for on-line build": BSC reset on-line hassucceeded

• "waiting for software change": "BDA version" reseton-line has succeeded

• "waiting for Bda change": "BDA edition" reset on linehas succeeded

• "running software change": BSC Type 5 EFT activationis being executed

• "running Bda change": BSC BDA "new" activation isbeing executed

• "waiting for end of probative phase": BSC Type 5 EFTactivation has succeeded

Release : V11

bdaSelected

Description : Current BSC Application Database (BDA)

Value range : [running / new]

Object : bsc

Type : DI

Remark : This attribute is modified by the MD-R when processing"On line reset BDA" actions or receiving a BSCspontaneous event.

This attribute is set "running" at the bsc object instancecreation

For a V10 BSC, this attribute is never modified and itsvalue is "running".

Note : The different states are obtained according to the following:

• "new": BSC upgrades with prototype BDA change

• "running": BSC upgrades without prototype BDAchange

Release : V11


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


bdaState

Description : Whether the BSC application database (BDA) is built.No transactions with a BSC can be implemented prior tobuilding its application database.

When a bsc object is created or following a user Off linereset BDA command, the value of this attribute is "notbuilt".

This attribute is unknown to the BSC and cannot be directlymodified by users. It is updated by the system after a userBuild BDA command.

Value range : [built / not built / inconsistency]

Object : bsc

Type : DI

bdaVersionBuild

Description : Version number of the BSC application database forrebuilding purposes.

When the BSC is initialized or following a user Off linereset BDA command, the value of this attribute is "0" (BDAnot built). The BSC then sends a "build database request"message, indicating that its database is defective andneeds rebuilding.

By issuing a Build BDA command, the user informs theOMC-R that the BSC database must be regenerated.


Object : bsc - Build BDA

Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:If the command follows a BSC architecturechange, the new architecture complies with theinformation in the last "build database request"message received from the BSC.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 113

bdaVersionNumber

Description : Current version number of the BSC application database."0" means that the BDA is not built.

Once the user has built or rebuilt the BDA, this attribute isassigned the bdaVersionBuild value sent with the userbuild command.

If the BDA is being regenerated following an On line resetBDA command, this attribute gives the user the versionnumber of the BDA currently used by the BSC.


Object : bsc

Type : DD

beacBatteryRemoteControllerPresence Class 2

Description : Whether the optional equipment Battery Remote Controller(BRC) is present or absent in S8000 outdoor or S8002.

Value range : [Present, Absent]


Type : DP

Release : V15

beginning date

Description : To select call monitoring data recorded on that date andthereafter.

Do not fill in if information produced from the start isdisplayed.

Value range : [mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss]

Object : Call monitoring - Display SDO

Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:beginning date is on or before end date.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


beginSearchTime

Description : Absolute time to start searching for the observation reportsto cumulate.

Observation data accumulating starts with the informationcontained in the last observation message collectedin the requested period of time. Refer to the partneredendSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.


Value range : [<date> , <time>]

Object : Display custom report

Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:beginSearchTime is after endSearchTime.

• [A]:The defined period is less than or equal to sixhours.

beginSearchTime

Description : Absolute time to start searching for the observation reportto edit default is the current date and time).

The report displays the information contained in the lastobservation message generated in the requested period oftime. Refer to the partnered endSearchTime entry in theDictionary.



Object : Display raw report

Type : DP


Note : If no permanent observation has been received within thespecified period, a message is displayed.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 115

beginSearchTime

Description : Absolute time to start searching for the availablepermanent observations to list (default is the current dateand time).

The first listed report is the last observation reportgenerated in the requested period of time. Refer to thepartnered endSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.


Object : List available permanent observations

Type : DP


beginSearchTime

Description : Absolute time to start searching for the available temporaryobservations to list (default is the current date and time).

The first listed report is the last observation reportgenerated in the requested period of time. Refer to thepartnered endSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.



Object : List available temporary observations

Type : DP


beginSearchTime

Description : Absolute time to end searching for the observationmessages to list (default is twelve days beforebeginSearchTime).

The last listed message is the first observation messagegenerated in the requested period of time. Refer to thepartnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : List observation messages

Type : DP


bEPPeriod Class 3

Description : When EDGE is activated in the cell, the field is present andindicates the BEP filter averaging period to the MS.

Value range : 0 to 15

Object : bts

Feature : EDGE traffic management (20231)

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V15

Note : Values 11 to 15 are reserved in tge 3GPP specification andshall not be used. 10 is the recommended value.

biZonePowerOffset Class 3

Description : Power offset between the inner TRXs and the outerTRXs of the adjacentCellHandOver object of a dualband,dualcoupling, or concentric cell.

Offset added in calculation formula to draw up thelist of eligible cells for handover towards a dualband,dualcoupling, or concentric cell inner zone to take intoaccount the difference of propagation models between thetwo bands of the cells and the difference of transmissionpower between TRXs of the two zones due to either BTSconfiguration or coupling.

Value range : [-63 to 63] dB


Default value : If main band = 850MHz 3dBIf main band = 1900MHz -3 dB

Feature : Dualband cell management (TF875 - V12)

Type : DP

Release : V12

Note : This parameter is only available for S8000 or e-cell BTSDRX transceiver architecture.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 117

biZonePowerOffset Class 3

Description : Power offset between inner and outer TRXs of thehandOverControl object of a dualband, dualcoupling, orconcentric cell.




Default value : If main band = 850MHz 3 dBIf main band = 1900MHz -3 dB

Type : DP

Note : This parameter is only available for S8000 or e-cell BTSDRX transceiver architecture.

• zoneTxPwrMaxReduction (inner zone)

Release : V12

bsc2GEqpt

Description : Identification and dynamic data describing the hardwareconfiguration of BSC 12000HC, as well as an externalalarm and actions on equipments related to it.


Object : bsc2GEqpt

Type : DP

Release : V13

bsc2GEqptId

Description : Identifier of the ’bsc2GEqpt’ object class. This identifieris allocated by the MD-R at object creation. The onlyvalue allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 12000HC.


Object : bsc2GEqpt

Type DP

Release : V13

bsc3GEqpt

Description : Identification and dynamic data describing the hardwareconfiguration of a BSC 3000 (global point of view).



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : bsc3GEqpt

Type : DP

Release : V13

bsc3GEqptId

Description : Identifier of the ’bsc3GEqpt’ object class. This identifieris allocated by the MD-R at object creation. The onlyvalue allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.


Object : bsc3GEqpt

Type : DP

Release : V13

bsc

Description : Identifier of a bsc object on the OMC-R.

The bsc reference is part of all BSS configuration objectidentifiers.

In all MMI commands, a bsc object can be referenced byname (bscName).

When a bsc object is created and the referencedbscMdInterface object is unlocked, the system attempts toestablish the BSS/OMC-R link connection.


Object : bsc

Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The number of BSCs managed by an OMC-Ris limited to maxBscPerNetwork (staticconfiguration data).

• [C]:The referenced bscMdInterface object(bscMdInterfaceRef) is created.

• [D]:The BSC application database has been resetby an Off line reset BDA command (bdaState= "not built").

• [D]:No mdScanner, traceControl, or callPathTraceobject refers to the bsc object (no observationor trace function is active in the BSC).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 119

bsc

Description : Identifier or name of a bsc object on the OMC-R.

It defines the parent bsc object.


Object : adjacentCellHandover, adjacentCellReselection, bts,btsSiteManager, channel, frequencyHoppingSystem,handOverControl, lapdLink, multiple site, pcmCircuit,powerControl, signallingLink, signallingLinkSet, signallingPoint, software, transceiver, transceiverEquipment,transceiverZone, transcoder, transcoderBoard, xtp

Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The bsc object is created.

bsc equipment name

Description : To select messages issued by a given type of BSC or TCUprocessor.


Value range : [ddti / ala / eci / sicx / sicd / swm / cpue / O.M.N.communication / cabling and PCM cross connect / css7 /cpu486Se / sup / LAPD channel / signalling link / sls / tdti/ tuc / internal PCM--TCU/ tcb / swe / swc / sw16 / tscb /msw / sic lapd (8 channels) / 2nd generation of TCB board/ bscb / CPUE pentium 120 / mmu / mmu ide / cpum133 /cpue133 / sup2 / sls2 / pcu element/]

Object : Alarm and notification logs - Filter


Type : DP

Remark : "css7" identifies the BSC CCS7 boards; "signalling link"identifies the SS7 signalling links defined in the BSS andcontrolled by the CCS7 boards.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


bscList

Description : List of the BSCs simultaneously monitored for further dataprocessing by the SDO machine. Fill in the list with BSCreference numbers or names, up to maxBscPerNetwork.

Do the following to create the list:

• To add a BSC, fill in the bscNumber field with thereference number of the BSC on the OMC-R and clickAdd.

• To remove one or more BSCs, select the lines thatdisplay their reference numbers and click Remove.

When the list is complete, click the option matching thedesired command, as follows:

• Start: ...........starts collecting call monitoringdata in the selected BSCs.

• Stop: ............stops collecting call monitoringdata in the selected BSCs.

• Transfer: .........transfers the BSC selecteddata files to the OMC-R.

• Processing: .......copies and processes theselected data files in the SDOmachine. A set of resultantASCII data files is produced, itis identified as the Level 1 set.


Object : Call monitoring - Commands (SDO)

Type DP

Checks : • [A]:The number of BSCs in the list is limited tomaxBscPerNetwork (static configurationdata).

• [A]:Each BSC occurs once in the list.

Notes : • The user must make sure that the BSCs in the list arecreated on the OMC-R since no checks are performedby the system.

• Processing: The call monitoring data files aremeant to exist in the "/MD/ftam/bsc" directory on theOMC-R agent disks. For each BSC in the list, allfiles saved in that directory whose name begins with"SDO_CM_BSCnnn" will be processed: "nnn" is the


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 121

BSC reference number on the OMC-R (if bsc = 5, thennnn is read "005"). See NTP < 07 >.

• The bscList needs not be defined when selecting theQuery command which displays the activity state of theCall monitoring function in all the BSCs connected tothe OMC-R.

bsc model

Description : To select messages issued by a given model of BSC.

Value range : [bsc 12000 / bsc 3000]



Type : DP

Note : bsc30000 is the value that must be used for this parameterin case of a BSC 3000.

bscNumber

Description : Identifier [1 to 255] or name of a BSC to add to thebscList.

Fill in this field and click Add to add the BSC to the list.Refer to the bscList entry in the Dictionary.

Object : Call monitoring - Commands (SDO)

Type DP

bscAlarmMask Class 3

Description : Configuration of the eight external alarm loops managedby the BSC ALA board. The alarm loop number "32+n" ismonitored (not monitored) when the nth bit is set to 1 (0).

Value range : 8 bit register numbered 0 to 7

bscAlarmMask = x x x x x x x x| |alarm 39 alarm 32

Object : bsc

Default value : 11111111

Type : DP



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


bscArchitecture Class 0

Description:

Architecture of the BSC

This attribute, together with the bsc object bscType attribute andthe related software object sWVersionRunning attribute, definesthe dimensioning constraints.

Value range:

[bsc6000 / bsc12000 / bsc30000]

• bsc30000 is the value that must be used for this parameterin case of a BSC 3000.

Object : bsc

Type : DP

bscCapacityReduction Class 3

Description : This attribute allows to reduce the traffic on the BSC inorder to protect the MSC against high traffic load.

This attribute can only be modified if the ’bsc’ objectinstance is unlocked


Object : bsc, signallingPoint

Type : DP

Release : V14

bscChainId

Description : BSC processing chain(s) to reset.

The consequences are as follows:

• activeChain: ......The active chain is resetand becomes passive, andthe passive chain becomesactive. Class 1 DPs are notre-configured.

• passiveChain: .....The passive chain is reset if itcan be reached.

• bothChain: .......Both chains are reset and theBSC is restarted. Class 1 DPsare re-configured.

Value range : [activeChain / passiveChain / bothChain]


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 123

Object : bsc - Kill chain

Type Id

bscCounterList

Description : Identifier of the bscCounterList object defined with regardsto the bsc object.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : bscCounterList

Type : Id

Release : V11

bscDateTime

Description : Current BSC reference date and time.

This attribute is set by a user Synchronize bsc clockcommand, which broadcasts the current OMC-R agent dateand time to the concerned BSC.

It is also updated by the OMC-R agent in the followingconditions:

• A user Set command on the md object is run, whichchanges its externalTime attribute.

• The BSS/OMC-R link is established.

• The BSS/OMC-R link is reestablished after abreakdown.

• The statutory time is modified.

The OMC-R agent sends an alarm notification to theOMC-R manager when the time difference with a BSCdrifts too much.


Object : bsc

Type : DD

bscGprsActivation Class 3

Description : Flag used to activate the GPRS at BSC level.

Value range : [disabled / enabled]

Object : bsc


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



Default value : disabled

Type : DP

Release : V12

bscHighSwitchingCapacity Class 3

Description : This parameter on the BSC enables the DS512 feature.


Object : bsc

Feature : BSC 3000 switching increase capacity (24436)


Type : DP

Release : V15

bscHopReconfUse Class 1

Description : Whether frequency hopping reconfiguration is authorized inBTSs that use cavity coupling.

When frequency reconfiguration is authorized, it allows toautomatically reconfigure the hopping sequence whenevera frequency is lost or recovered in the BTS.

Value range : [true / false]

Object : bsc

Default value : True

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:It can be "true" provided the btsHopReconfRestart of one of the related bts objects is also"true".

Release : V8

bscIPFirstAdr Class 2

Description:

Indicates the first BSC IP address used for a ’bscMdInterface’object instance.

IP address corresponds to the subscriber number on thenetwork used.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 125


Value range:

[7 to 15] String


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The IP address must not already be used in afirst address for another bscMDInterface objectinstance.

• [C/M]:The IP address must not already be used in asecond address for another bscMDInterface objectinstance.

Release : V13

Note : For a BSC 12000HC, this parameter is available but it is notused.

bscIPSecondAdr Class 2

Description:

Indicates the second BSC IP address used for a’bscMdInterface’ object instance.

IP address corresponds to the subscriber number on the networkused.



Value range:

[7 to 15] String


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The IP address must not already be used in afirst address for another bscMDInterface objectinstance.

• [C/M]:The IP address must not already be used in asecond address for another bscMDInterface objectinstance.

Release : V13

Note : For a BSC 12000HC, this parameter is available but it is notused.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


bscList

Description : This attribute indicates for which BSC(s) the units ofsoftware has been downloaded. This attribute is allocatedby the MD-R at object creation. This attribute cannot bemodified by the Manager. This attribute is updated bythe MD-R when a "sWDownload" command is performedsuccessfully.



Object : executableSoftware

Type : DP

Release : V13

bscLog

Description : bscLog modelizes the management of the BSC internal logfiles.

Value range : [bscVers13 +Inf]

Object : bscLog

Type : DP

Release : V13

bscLogId

Description : Identifier of the ’bscLog’ object class.

This identifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation.

This attribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevantfor BSC 3000.

Value range : [bscVers13 +Inf]

Object : bscLog

Type : DP

Release : V13

bscMdInterface

Description : Identifier of a bscMdInterface object defined with regard to themd object.




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 127

Type : Id

Checks : • [D]:No bsc object refers to the bscMdInterfaceobject.

bscMdInterfaceRef

Description : Identifier of the bscMdInterface object that describes theBSS/OMC-R link involving the BSC.


Object : bsc

Type : DP

Checks : • [C]:No bsc object refers to the bscMdInterfaceobject.


bscMdInterfaceVersionNumber

Description : Release number of the BSC/OMC-R interface. It is provided bythe BSC when the BSS/OMC-R link is physically established.

If the release number does not match the software versionrunning in the BSC (sWVersionRunning attribute of the relatedsoftware object), the BSC issues a start-of-fault message.

Value range:

[11 to 99]

Object : bsc - Display

Type : DI

Restrictions: • [C/M]:

This attribute is not managed by users.

bscMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3

Description : Enables or disables dynamic barring of access class at thebsc level.

Value range : [enabled / disabled]

Object : bsc


Type : DP

Release : V9


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


bscName

Description :

Reference name of a bsc object on the OMC-R.

It begins with a letter and is case sensitive.

Valuerange :

[30 characters max.]

Object : bsc

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The name of a BSC is unique to the OMC-R.

Release : V13

Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with aletter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX,BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters areprohibited.

The valid symbols are:

- letter characters: A, B, C..., Z, a, b, c..., z

- digit symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

- minus sign: -

- undescore: _

- space

bscPcuPcmRefList Class 2

Description : List of BSC-PCU PcmCircuit.

Value range:

BSC 12000HC: [1 to 12] values in the range [0..167]BSC 3000 V15: [1 to 24] values in the range [0..167]BSC 3000 V16, E1 PCM: [1 to 32] values in the range [0..167]BSC 3000 V16, T1 PCM: [1 to 36] values in the range [0..167]

Object : pcu

Feature : 18749 (PCUSN - more than 12 Agprs PCMs per BSC),(step 1: up to one full PCUSN shelf per BSC).

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:All the referred pcmCircuit object instances of thisattribute must exist.

• [C/M]:The referred pcmCircuit object instances must beof pcmAgprs type (pcmType attribute).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 129

• [C/M]:The referred pcmCircuit object instances mustnot be already referred to another pcu objectinstance on the same BSC.

Release : V12

bscQueueingOption Class 1

Description : Whether radio resource allocation requests are queued inthe BSC when no resources are available.

If no resource is available when an allocation requestis received and queueing is not allowed, the allocationrequest is refused immediately.

Value range : [allowed (MSC driven) / forced (O&M driven) / not allowed]

• allowed ..........Resource allocation requestqueueing depends on the typeof operation and indicativeitems provided with themessages received from theMSC.

• forced ...........Resource allocation requestqueueing depends on the typeof operation only.

• not allowed .......Resource allocation requestqueueing is forbidden.

Object : signallingPoint

Default value : forced

Type : DP

Note : Allocation requests for immediate assignments andinter-bss, intra-bss, and inter-bts handovers are neverqueued. Only TCH resource requests (assignmentsrequest and intraCell handover) are queued dependingon the priority of the demand and the number of requestpresent in the queue.

bscRefList

Description : List of the bsc objects managed by a pcuSN object.

Value range : V15: [0 to 12] values in the range [1 to 255]V16, E1/T1 PCM: [0 to 18] values in the range [1 to 255]The BSS system does not take into account the valuerange [17 to 18] for an E1 configuration.

Object : pcusn

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



Release : V12

bscReset

Description : Requests a control node reset.


Object : bsc3GEqpt

Type : DP

Release : V13

bscSitePcmList Class 2

Description:

List of the PCM links allotted to a site on the Abis interface,up to maxPcmCPerBtsSM. Each link is identified by a(pcmCircuitBsc, pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager) pair that definesit on BSC end and BTS end.

The Abis interface connects a BTS to a BSC through PCM linksthat are identified by the boards to which they are connected onboth ends of the interface, that is DDTI boards on BSC end andDTI boards on BTS end.

The following rule is applied:

• A PCM link connected to DDTI board no.i in the BSC has apcmCircuitBsc reference equal to "2i" or "2i+1" with regardto the BSC (each board manages two links at a time). Referto Nortel GSM BSC Reference Manual.

• The same PCM link connected to DTI board no.j in the BTShas a pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager reference equal to "j" withregard to the BTS (each board manages one single link).Refer to Nortel GSM BTS Reference Manuals.

The number of pairs in the list sets the number of links allotted tothe radio site.

Value range:

list (1..6) of (pcmCircuitBsc, pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager)pairs.

Refer to pcmCircuitBsc and pcmCircuitBtsSiteManagerentries for more information on their value ranges.


Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 131

Checks : • [C]:The number of PCM links allotted to a siteis limited to maxPcmCPerBtsSM (staticconfiguration data).

• [C/M]:The list contains at least one pair, two if thebtsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresenceattribute is "true".

• [C/M]:Each pair is unique in the list.

• [C/M]:Each pcmCircuitBsc reference matches apcmCircuit object created for the parent bscobject and assigned to the Abis interface(pcmType = "pcmAbis").

• [M]:If a pcmCircuitBsc reference is changed,the current link is not used by any dependenttransceiverEquipment object.

bscTimeSlot

Description : PCM link (pcmCircuitId) and timeslot (timeSlotNumber)used by the radio timeslot on the Abis interface. The PCMlink is identified on BSC end [0 to 47].

The information is displayed provided that theparent transceiver object is working. Refer to theoperationalState entry for this object in the Dictionary.

Value range : pcmCircuitId [0 to 47]timeSlotNumber [1 to 31 (E1 PCM) or 24 (T1 PCM)]

Object : channel

Type : DD

bscType Class 0

Description : Type of the BSC. It defines the BSC configuration in termsof equipment boards.

See the table listing BSC configuration types in NTP < 07>.

Value range : [type1 / type2 / type3 / type4 / type5]

Object : bsc

Default value : type5

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:number of SICD(8V) ports available in theBSC: See NTP < 07 >.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [M]:number of PCM links connected to the BSC:See NTP < 07 >.

• [M]:number of sites managed by the BSC: SeebtsSiteManager entry in the Dictionary.

• [M]:The lapdTerminalNumber attributes of thedependent lapdLink objects comply with thenumber of SICD(8V) ports available in theBSC.


bscUsedAdr

Description : BSC address actually used. This attribute is managed bythe MD-R. Value changes are not notified to the Manager.

Value range : [X25 / IP]


Type : DP

Release : V13

bsCvMax Class 3

Description : Number of packets left to transmit divided by the number ofUL TS allocated to the MS.


Object : bts


Default value : 1

Type : DP

Remark : bsCvMax is broadcasted in the system information.

Release : V12

bscX25PrefAdr Class 2

Description : X.25 priority address used by the BSC.It corresponds to the subscriber’s number in the X.25network.

Value range : [15 decimal figures max.]


Default value : $BSC{bscId}_X25P

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 133

Checks : • [C/M]:The X25 address must not already be usedin a preferential address for another bscobject instance.

• [C/M]:The X25 address must not already be usedin a secondary address for another bscobject instance.

Note : For a BSC 3000, this parameter is available and visible onthe OMC-R MMI, but it is not used.

bscX25SecAdr Class 2

Description : X.25 address used by the BSC as backup. It is identical tothe priority address when there is no redundancy.It corresponds to the subscriber’s number in the X.25network.



Default value : $BSC{bscId}_X25S

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The X25 address must not already be usedin a secondary address for another bscobject instance.

• [C/M]:The X25 address must not already be usedin a preferential address for another bscobject instance.

Note : For a BSC 3000, this parameter is available and visible onthe OMC-R MMI, but it is not used.

bscX25UsedAdr

Description : X.25 outgoing address currently used by the BSC.

This dynamic attribute allows the user to know the addressselected by the system when the connection is establishedby bringing the link into service.



Type : DD



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


bsPowerControl Class 3

Description : Whether BTS transmission power control is allowed at celllevel.


Object : powerControl


Type : DP

bssMapT1 Class 1

Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure.

It is started on transmission of BLOCK or UNBLOCK by theBSC and canceled on receipt of BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGEor UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC.


Object : bsc

Default value : 5

Type : DP

bssMapT4 Class 1


It is started on transmission of RESET and canceled onreceipt of RESET ACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC. Onelapse, the BSC sends RESET.


Object : bsc

Default value : 60

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 135

bssMapT7 Class 1


It is started on transmission of HANDOVER REQUIREDand canceled on receipt of HANDOVER COMMAND,RESET, RESET CIRCUIT, CLEAR COMMAND orHANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT.


Object : bsc

Default value : 7

Type : DP

bssMapT8 Class 1

Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure. It is greater than t3103 for all BTSobject instances attached to the BSC.

It is started on transmission of HANDOVER COMMAND andcanceled on receipt of CLEAR COMMAND sent by the MSCor HANDOVER FAILURE sent by MS.


Object : bsc

Default value : 15

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:bssMapT8 > t3103 for all BTS objectsdependent on the BSC object.

bssMapT12 Class 1

Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure. This timer is used with a Phase IMSC only.

It is started on transmission of RESET CIRCUIT bythe BSC and canceled on receipt of RESET CIRCUITACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC.


Object : bsc

Default value : 5

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


bssMapT13 Class 1


It is started on receipt of RESET sent by the MSC. Onelapse, the BSC sends RESET ACKNOWLEDGE to theMSC.


Object : bsc

Default value : 32

Type : DP

bssMapT19 Class 1

Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the BSSMAPmanagement procedure. This timer is used with a PhaseII MSC only.

It is started on transmission of RESET CIRCUIT bythe BSC and canceled on receipt of RESET CIRCUITACKNOWLEDGE sent by the MSC.


Object : bsc

Default value : 32

Type : DP

Release : V8

bssMapT20 Class 1


It is started on transmission of CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCKor CIRCUIT GROUP UNBLOCK by the BSC and canceledon receipt of CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGEor CIRCUIT GROUP UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE sent bythe MSC.


Object : bsc

Default value : 32

Type : DP

Release : V8


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 137

bssMapTchoke Class 1

Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the handovermanagement procedure.

It is started by the BSC when the last neighbor cell in thelist is rejected. On timer elapse, the BSC asks the MSC toprovide a new list of eligible cells.


Object : bsc

Default value : 4

Type : DP

bssSccpConnEst Class 1

Description : A interface timer triggered by the BSC in the handovermanagement procedure.

It is set on transmission of CONNECTION REQUESTand canceled on receipt of CONNECTION CONFIRM orCONNECTION REFUSED.

Value range : [5 to 360, by steps of 5] seconds

Object :signallingPoint (BSC 12000HC and BSC 3000 V14)

signallingLinkSet (BSC 3000 from V15)

Default value : 5

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:bssSccpConnEst parameters musthave the same values for both A and LbsignallingLinkSet instances.

bssSccpInactRx Class 1

Description : A interface timer T(iar) triggered by the BSC in the SCCPinactivity detection procedure.

It is set either on transmission or receipt of CONNECTIONCONFIRM or on receipt of any other message during theconnection and canceled on receipt of any message.

Value range : [2 to 30] minutes


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object :signallingPoint (BSC 12000HC and BSC 3000 V14)


Default value : 11

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:bssSccpInactRx parameters musthave the same values for both A and LbsignallingLinkSet instances.

bssSccpInactTx Class 1

Description : A interface timer T(ias) triggered by the BSC in the SCCPinactivity detection procedure.

It is set either on transmission or receipt of CONNECTIONCONFIRM or on transmission of any other messageduring the connection and canceled on transmission of anymessage.


Object : signallingPoint (BSC 12000HC and BSC 3000 V14)


Default value : 5

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:bssSccpInactTx parameters musthave the same values for both A and LbsignallingLinkSet instances.

bssSccpRelease Class 1

Description : A interface timer T(rel) triggered by the BSC in the SCCPmanagement procedure.

It is set on transmission of RELEASE and canceled onreceipt of RELEASED COMPLETE or RELEASED.




Default value : 10


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 139

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:bssSccpRelease parameters musthave the same values for both A and LbsignallingLinkSet instances.

bssSccpSubSysTest Class 1

Description : A interface timer T(state info) triggered by the BSC in theSCCP management procedure.

It is set on transmission of SST and canceled on receipt ofSSA.

Value range : [5 to 60, by steps of 5] seconds



Default value : 30

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:bssSccpSubSysTest parameters musthave the same values for both A and LbsignallingLinkSet instances.

bsTxPwrMax Class 3

Description : Maximum theoretical level of BTS transmission power ina cell.

The BSC relays the information to the mobiles in the AbisCELL MODIFY REQUEST message.

• For concentric cells, dualband cells and dualcouplingcells:The value of PwrReqSentToPowerAmplifier is equal tothe value of bsTxPwrMax added to the value of DLUattenuation (depending on the coupling equipment type,that is for instance D, H2D, H4D, etc.) or Attenuationon the btsSiteManager (if Attenuation has a value), andreduced of the value of “Zone Tx power max reduction”of the transceiverZone.

For PA: the value of PwrReqSentToPowerAmplifiermust be between 31dB and 44dBm. This value range isvalid for Radio Module (RM).

For HePA: the value of PwrReqSentToPowerAmplifiermust be between 34dB and 47dBm. This value range is


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


valid for High Power Radio Module (HPRM).

For MePA: the value of PwrReqSentToPowerAmplifierbetween 33dB and 46dB. This value range is valid forMedium Power Radio Module (MPRM).

• For mono zone cells:

The value of PwrReqSentToPowerAmplifier is equal tothe value of bsTxPwrMax added to the value of DLUattenuation (depending on the coupling equipment type,that is for instance D, H2D, H4D, etc.) or Attenuation onthe btsSiteManager (if Attenuation has a value).


Note : The recommended value is 43 dB.


Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:For a normal cell, the use of the block edgechannels must induce a cell power limitationto 40 dB for PCS networks, and 42 dB forGSM 850 networks.

• [M]:For a concentric cell, the use of the blockedge channels in the large zone and inthe small zone must induce a cell powerlimitation to 40 dB for PCS networks and 42dB for GSM 850 networks (’bsTxPwrMax -zoneTxPwrMaxReduc’)

• [M]:For a dualband cell and, the use of theblock edge channels in the large zoneand in the small zone must induce acell power limitation to 40 dB for PCS- GSM850 networks and 42 dB forGSM850 - PCS networks (’bsTxPwrMax -zoneTxPwrMaxReduc’)

• [M]:For a dualcoupling cell, the use of theblock edge channels in the large zoneand in the small zone must induce acell power limitation to 40 dBm for PCSnetworks and 42 dBm for GSM850 networks(’bsTxPwrMax - zoneTxPwrMaxReduc -bizonePowerOffset’)

Note : Some bsTxPowerMax values are not compatible with theeffective power output by the BTS.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 141

Remark : For a GSM 1900 network (standardIndicator of bts objectset to ’pcs1900’), the MD-R checks the following:

bsTxPwrMax < 32 (dB)

when an edge frequency is defined for the cell (i.e. if thevalue is included in the cellAllocation attribute values).

The use of edge frequencies leads to a cell powerreduction. The list of edge frequencies is described in theMD-R configuration file, MD/base/config/boundEdge.cfg.This file is can be configured off-line. To update thedatabase according to the list of edge frequencies, use theshell /MD/install/shell/cm_configBde.sh.

bts

Description : Identifier of a bts object defined with regard to abtsSiteManager object.

All channel, transceiver, and transceiverEquipment objectsin a BSS are identified with regard to a bts object thatdefines the covering cell.

In all MMI commands, a bts object can be referred to bythe sequence "siteName.cellName" where siteName andcellName identify the covering site and the cell respectivelyby name.


Object : bts

Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The number of cells managed by an OMC-Ris limited to maxBtsPerNetwork (staticconfiguration data).

• [C]:The maximum number of cells controlled by aBSC is as follows:

BSC 12000HC

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5

120 120 160 160 160


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [C]:The number of cells attached to a radio site islimited to maxNbOfCells (attribute of the parentbtsSiteManager object).

• [C]:The software object related to the parentbtsSiteManager object is created.

• [C]:The mobileCountryCode and mobileNetworkCode attributes match those of the parent bscobject if they are defined for that object (cellCGIs must comply).

• [C/M]:The adjacent cell umbrella Ref attribute isdefined if the cell is a microcell (cellType) anddirected retry handovers are processed in BSCmode (directedRetryModeUsed).

• [C]:If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and theparent btsSiteManager object is locked.

• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked, theparent btsSiteManager object is locked, and thebts object is locked.

• [D]:If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line resetBDA command.

• [D]:No adjacentCellHandOver object refers to thebts object (the described cell is not used as aneighbor cell of another serving cell).

• [D]:No mdScanner object describing a temporaryobservation refers to the bts object (noobservation is running on the described cell).

• [D]:No traceControl or callPathTrace object refersto the bts object (no tracing is running on thedescribed cell).

Note : All cells covered by a given radio site must be created innumerical ascending order and deleted in the reverse order.

bts

Description : Identifier or name of a bts object.It defines the associated bts object.


Object : adjacentCellHandOver, adjacentCellReselection,channel, frequencyHoppingSystem, handOverControl,powerControl, software, transceiver,

transceiverEquipment, transceiverZone.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 143

Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The bts object is created.

bts equipment name

Description : To select messages issued by a given type of BTSequipment.


Value range : [[BTS main power / converterB/ converter C/converterA/CSW1 / CSW2 / CSW1M/ TX / SYN /SYNO /ALAT / ALATO / DCC / DTI / RX splitter / TX splitter/ antenna / column system RX / converter D / columnsystem TX / door contact / door contact (S4000/S2000E)/ fan system / RX fan / TX fan / cabinet fan / fans rack/ MWT system / exchanger system / rectifier system(S4000/S2000E) / rectifier system 1 (S4000/S2000E)/ rectifiers groups / distribution system / fuses system /breakers / battery system / temperature system / smokedetector / CSWM/SYNC/ALCO/DSC/PCMI / GTW /PCM0 / PCM1 / rectifier 48V / converter F / converterBCF / battery disconnected switch /cooler system /LNA/ VSWR / user system / distribution box / battery cabinet/ main breaker / diu / external alarm / external alarm(S4000/S2000E) /VGA/ DLNA/MNU/DCU/RX/ DBF /AMNU / DCU4 / DRX / FPRX / Lightning Protection / BCFCabinet door / BCF Cabinet fan / SBCF / PA / AC powersupply / DC power supply / transmit antenna / cabinethigh temperature alarm/ cabinet low temperature alarm/ EXTERNAL CONTACT ACCESS / drxmain receptionchain / drx diversity reception chain / splitter output / highpower module / splitter / low power RF module / rf supplymodule / CMCF / PCM / CPCMI / RECAL / rx splitterM / rxsplitter D / combiner h4 lna / combiner h4 vswr / txFilter /combiner rx filter lna / combiner d vswr / rxMainConnector/ rxDivConnector / dacsCooler / compact dacs cooler/ compact distribution / PMNU / RDRX / PMOD / BTSSynchronisation / PSU / Heatsink / Preventive lightningprotection / Battery / External Environment / SLTI / SALCO/ not protected alarm / internal temperature / externaltemperature / Remote Tunable Cavity Combiner / Cavity/battery monitored / blower tray / S12000 rectifier / smokedetector (S4000/S2000E) / S12000 smoke detector /S12000 lightning protection / S12000 battery disconnected/ S12000 cooler / Edge High PA / Edge DRX / Edge PA /CMCF phase 1 /CMCFphase2 /CMCFphase 3 /DRXND3/ICM/ IFM/ABM / RM/ RM_PA / RM_TRX / HPRM / HPRMPA / HPRM TRX / MPRM / MPRM_TRX / MPRM_PA /TRX MAIN RECEPTION CHAIN / TRX DIV RECEPTION


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


CHAIN / DDM / DDM MAIN LNA / DDM DIV LNA / DDM1 VSWR / DDM 2 VSWR / DDM_H2 / DDM_H2 MAINLNA / DDM_H2 DIV LNA / DDM_H2 1 VSWR / DDM_H2 2VSWR / TX FILTER / TX FILTER VSWR / TX FILTER H2 /TX FILTER H2 VSWR / SICS / ECU / TRX / H4]


Type : DP

bts list

Description : List of the cells involved in broadcasting the shortmessage. Enter the (bsc, btsSiteManager, bts ) referenceof each bts object.

Object : short message - Start broadcast

Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:Each bts object in the list is created.

• [A]:Each bts object in the list is assigned aCBCH, that is there is one channel objectin the set of transceiver objects dependenton the bts object whose channelType is"bcchSdcch4CBCH" or "sdcch8CBCH".

• [A]:No more than five short messages are beingbroadcast in the cells at that time.

btsSMSynchroMode Class 2

Description : Type of site synchronization.


Value range : [normal / master / slave / gpsBurstSync, gpsTimeSync /masterGpsBurstSync / masterGpsTimeSync]

Type : DP

Feature : Network Synchronization

Default value : normal (synchronized on Abis link)

Checks : • [C/M]:slave, gpsBurstSync or gpsTime Sync valuesare allowed only if btsModel is S8000 CBCF,S12000, or BTS 18000.

• C/M]:master, masterGpsBurstSync or masterGpsTimeSync values are allowed only if btsModel isS8000 CBCF or S12000.

Release : V15

Note : This parameter is optional. It is only available for BSC 3000V.15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 145

bts time between HO configuration Class 3

Description : Whether the HOPingpongTimeRejection timer can be usedat bts level when processing handovers.

Refer to bts object btstimeBetweenHOConfiguration andadjacentCellHandOver object hoPingpongTimeRejectionattributes in this Dictionary of Parameters.

Value range : [0 / 1]

Object : bts

Feature : General protection against ping-pong handovers (TF821- V12)

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V9

btsDescription

Description : BTS configuration description (BTS type, configuration,coupling system, etc.) corresponding to the transcriptionof configRef attribute.

Value range : [chain of characters]


Type : DI

Release : V10

Note : It designates the maximum configuration of the configReffile loaded on one of the BTSs. But it does not necessarilycorresponds to the configuration of the btsSiteManagerobject concerned.

btsHopReconfRestart Class 2

Description : Whether hopping frequency reconfiguration is authorized onTX restart in a cell.


Object : bts

Default value : true

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:If the attribute value is "true", the bscHopReconfUse attribute of the parent bsc object is also"true".

Release : V8


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


btsIsHopping Class 2

Description : Whether frequency hopping is allowed in a cell.

Value range : [hopping / noHopping / hoppingWithCarrierFilling (V8) /noHoppingWithCarrierFilling (V8)]

Object : bts

Default value : Hopping

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:If frequency hopping is allowed, theGSM "fhMgt" function is defined in thesiteGsmFctList attribute of the parentbtsSiteManager object.

• [M]:If it is disabled, no channel object dependent onthe bts object is authorized to obey frequencyhopping laws.

Note : The "xxxWithCarrierFilling" configuration means that the BTScovering the cell must use a TX for BCCH filling purposes.The following apply:

• The BSC sends the information to the BTS in the AbisCELL CONFIGURATION REQUEST message.

• If the BTS does not have a redundant TRX/DRX, one ofthe operating TRX/DRXs is assigned to that purpose andthe partnered TDMA frame is unreachable (refer to theoperationalState entry for the transceiver object in theDictionary).

• When this TRX/DRX is malfunctioning, the BTSre-configures the other TRX/DRXs. Users are thenwarned by the system, by means of a notification.

The "noHoppingWithCarrierFilling" configuration can be usedin all BTSs, regardless of the coupling mode. The followingapply:

• Hybrid coupling: All cell TX configurations provide BCCHfilling.

• Cavity coupling: Only the TX that transmits the cell BCCHfrequency is configured to provide BCCH filling.

The "hoppingWithCarrierFilling" configuration can only beused in BTSs that use cavity coupling. The following apply:


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 147

• Hybrid coupling: The BTS refuses the configuration.

• Cavity coupling: All cell TX configurations provideself-frequency filling.

btsMSAccessClassBarringFunction Class 3

Description : Enable or disable dynamic barring of access class at thebts level.


Object : bts


Type : DP

Release : V9

btsReserved3 Class 3

Description : Mean number of logical channels belonging to the largefrequency reuse pattern and used at the same time for datacommunications.

Value range : [-16 to +16]

Object : bts

Feature : Automatic Cell Tiering (TF995-V12)

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V12

btsReserved4 Class 3

Description : Attribute reserved for future use.

Value range : [-32768 to 32767]

Object : bts

Type : DP

Release : V12

btsSensitivity Class 3

Description : Target power needed for BTS decoding. This parameterhas an influence on the power control efficiency.


Object : bts


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Default value : 0


Type : DP

Release : V12

Note : The power control function used is the Open Loop Control.

btsSensitivityInnerZone Class 3

Description : Minimum power needed for BTS decoding in the inner zoneof a dual-band cell.


Object : bts


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V12

btsSiteManager

Description : Identifier of a btsSiteManager object defined with regard toa bsc object.

All bts, channel, transceiver, and transceiverEquipmentobjects in a BSS are identified with regard to abtsSiteManager object that defines the covering radio site.

In all MMI commands, a btsSiteManager object can bereferred to by name (siteName).

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The maximum number of radio sites controlledby a BSC depends on its type and architecture(numbers in ordinary brackets apply to a BSCthat does not concentrate BTS LAPD signaling).

BSC 12000HC

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5

28(7)

60(15)

92(23)

124(31)

147(39)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 149

• [C]:The software object related to the parent bscobject is created.

• [C]:The referenced lapdLink object (lapdLinkOMLRef)is created for the parent bsc object and assignedto the Abis interface.

• [C]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the referenced pcmCircuit objects(bscSitePcmList) are created for the parentbsc object and assigned to the Abis interface(pcmType = "pcmAbis").

• [C/M]:The bscSitePcmList list contains at leasttwo pairs if the btsSiteManager objectredundantPcmPresence attribute is "true".

• [C]:If one of the pcmCircuit objects in the listdescribes a PCM link that is shared with anothersite in the BSS, the radioSiteMask of the twobtsSiteManager objects are dissociated.

• [C]:If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked.

• [D]:If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and thebtsSiteManager object is locked.

• [D]:If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.

btsSiteManager

Description : Identifier or name of a btsSiteManager object. It defines theparent btsSiteManager object.

It defines the parent btsSiteManager object.

By definition, a radio site (btsSiteManager object) is relatedto a BSC, a radio cell (bts object) is related to a radiosite, a TRX/DRX (transceiverEquipment object), a TDMAframe (transceiver object) and its radio time slots (channelobjects) are related to a radio cell.

In all MMI commands, the objects dependent on abtsSiteManager object can be identified at BSC or sitelevel, whichever is the most convenient to users.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : adjacentCellHandOver, adjacentCellReselection, bts,channel, frequencyHoppingSystem, handOverControl, powerControl, software, transceiver, transceiverEquipment,transceiverZone.

Type : Id

Note : The maximum number of sites supported by a BSC 3000is 500. The system accepts values between 0 and 499(inclusive).

btsSiteManager model

Description : To select messages issued by a given model of BTS.


Value range : [s2000 inDoor / s2000E inDoor / s2000E outDoor / s4000inDoor / s4000C inDoor / s4000 outDoor / s4000 smart /s8000 inDoor / s8000 outDoor / s2000 Low Power O1 /s2000 Low Power O2 / s2000 Low Power S11 / s2000 HighPower O1 / s2000 High Power O2 / s2000 High PowerS11 / s8000 inDoor CBCF / s8000 outDoor CBCF / s2000Low Power Enhanced Packaging O1 / s2000 Low PowerEnhanced Packaging O2 / s2000 Low Power EnhancedPackaging 2O4 / s2000 High Power Enhanced PackagingO1 / s2000 High Power Enhanced Packaging O2 / s2000High Power Enhanced Packaging 2O4 / s2000 High PowerEnhanced Packaging S11 / e-CELL / s8002 outdoor CBCFO2 / s12000 inDoor / s12000 outDoor / BTS18000 inDoor/ BTS18000 outDoor]


Type : DP

btsSiteManagerList Class 2

Description : List of btsSiteManager objects attached to a multiple siteobject


Object : multiple site

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:Each btsSiteManager object is unique in thelist and created for the parent bsc object.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B 151

• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and thereferenced btsSiteManager objects arelocked.

Note : The order in which the btsSiteManager objects are entered inthe list must match the BTS chaining order, beginning withthe BTS closest to the BSC.

btsThresholdHopReconf Class 2

Description : Minimum number of frequencies working in a cell to allowfrequency hopping reconfiguration.

If this attribute defines the nominal number of cellfrequencies, the reconfiguration process is deactivated. Referto the btsHopReconfRestart entry in the Dictionary.


Object : bts

Default value : 1

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:This number is less than or equal to the numberof transceiver objects created for the bts object.

Release : V8

btsWithCavity Class 2

Description : Whether the bts object instance uses a transceiverequipment with cavity.


Object : bts

Default value : false

Feature : Mixed hybrid and cavity combiner BTSs (PR1179 - V12)

Type : DP

Release : V12


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


buildState

Description : Whether BSC application database building is in-progress.Commands on all objects related to the bsc concernedobject are refused while the BDA is being built.

When the bsc object is created, the value of this attribute isenforced to "notInProgress". It is unknown to the BSC andcannot be directly modified by users.

It is changed to "inProgress" by the system after auser Build BDA command on the bsc object as long asdatabase building is in-progress. It is then changed back to"notInProgress" when the operation is complete.

Value range : [inProgress / notInProgress]

Object : bsc

Type : DI

CcallClearing Class 3

Description : Maximum distance between MS and BTS before a call iscleared.

It is greater than msRangeMax.

This distance defines the cell maximum coverage area.

Value range : [2 to 135] km (non-extended mode),[2 to 120] km (extended mode).

Object : bts

Default value : 35 in non-extended mode, 90 in extended mode

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:callClearing > msRangeMax (attribute of thehandOverControl object associated with the btsobject).

• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 35 km if theextended cell attribute of the bts object is"false".

• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 120 km if theextended cell attribute of the bts object is"true".

• 7 km for urban

• 35 km for rural


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 153

callDropActivation class 3

Description : Activation of cell call drop data retrieval of cell call drops atOMC-R.

Object : bts

Value range : [Disabled (0) / traffic drops (1) / signaling drops (2) / traffic +signaling drops (3)]

Type : DP

Feature : Call drop analysis

Default value : 0

Checks : • [C/M]:callDropActivation parameter cannot beset to a value different from 0 in more than80 cells per BSC. Call drop analysis featurecannot be activated on more than 80 cells ata time

• [C/M]:Call drop analysis feature cannot be activatedon the cell if interference matrix is still runningon this cell. This semantic checks forbidsactivation of interference matrix and call dropanalysis features at the same time on a cell.

Release : V15

Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

callPathObservationArea Class 2

Description : List of up to thirty-one same-type objects observed.Enter each object reference according to the type (bts,transceiverEquipment, xtp).

Value range : [list of objects belonging to the same class]


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:All observed objects belong to the same class.

• [M]:The callPathTrace object is locked.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


callPathTrace

Description : Identifier of a callPathTrace object defined with regard to themd object.

This object describes the Call path tracing function of a BSS(follow-up of calls using one or more common resources in theBSS).

A callPathTrace object is created in locked state. Unlock theobject to start collecting trace data.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The callPathTrace object is not created for themd object.

• [C/M/D]:The application database of the related BSCis not being built.

• [C/M/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the BSS/OMC-R link is establishedand no audit is running in the BSC.

• [D]:The callPathTrace object is created.

Release : V8

callPathTraceType Class 2

Description : Type of information stored by the BSC.

The information stored with respect to the type is detailed inNTP < 07 >.

If the request cannot be fulfilled, the BSC attempts to storeanother type of information, using the following rule: radio>>> hand over >>> radio.

Value range : [basic / hand over / radio]


Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:The callPathTrace object is locked.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 155

callReestablishment Class 3

Description : Whether call re-establishment in a cell is allowed when theradio link is broken off for propagation reasons.

The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regularintervals on the cell BCCH.

On receipt of a CHANNEL REQUIRED message withcause "call re-establishment", the BSC attempts to allocatea TCH in one of the cells where call re-establishment isallowed. Then, if no TCH is available the BSC attempts toallocate a SDCCH.

Value range : [allowed / not allowed]

Object : bts

Default value : not allowed

Type : DP

callReestablishmentPriority Class 3

Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of TCH allocation requests with cause "callreestablishment".



Object : bts

Default value : 17

Type : DP

capacityAlarmThreshold

Description : Filling threshold of the message saving partition onthe OMC-R agent disks, beyond which a notification istriggered.

The size of the saving partitions is indicated in the systemcommissioning files.

This attribute is significant when the object describes acurrent log; it has no meaning when the object describes arestored log.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


When the threshold is reached, the OMC-R agent initiatesthe following actions:

• A notification is sent to the OMC-R manager.

• For a current alarm log, old messages are deletedto make room in the partition. If all saved messagesare of today’s date, further notifications are not savedand the operationalState of the log object is forced to"disabled".

• For a current observation or trace log, theoperationalState of the log object is forced to"disabled" and its availabilityStatus is forced to"logFull".

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]. "2147483646" defines a 100%threshold (the partition is full).


Type : DP


capacityTimeRejection Class 3

Description : Minimum time between one intracell HO and the nextcapacity intracell HO.

This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance is unlocked.

Value range : Int [0 to 120] seconds


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V1 4


cause

Description : To select messages according to one or more causesassociated with a fault number. Refer to Nortel GSM BSSand OMC Maintenance Manuals.

This parameter is a component of the specific problemsfilter. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 157


Type : DP

cCCHGprsAtBtsLevel Class 3

Description : Used to activate the CCCH management at BTS level.


Object : bts


Type : DP

Release : V14

cc

Description : The Communication application module Controller, whichis the ATM switch implementing the ATM network used asthe Control Node backplane. This board also provides ATMon OC-3 (Optical Carrier level 3) connectivity towards theInterface Node.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : cc

Type : DP

Release : V13

ccId

Description : Identifier of the ’cc’ object class. This identifier is allocatedby the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf andslot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : cc

Type : DP

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


cellAllocation Class 2

Description : List of no more than 64 frequencies allotted to a cell in thenetwork frequency band.

By definition, all cells covered by a given radio site use thesame frequency band defined by the type of the network(standardIndicator). All cells declared as neighbor cells of aserving cell use the same frequency band as the serving cell.

Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (PCS 1900 network),[0 to 124 / 955 to 1023] (GSM-R network),[0 to 124 / 975 to 1023] (extended GSM network),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),[99 / 1023] / [0 / 55] (GSM-R network).


Object : bts

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:Each frequency occurs once in the list andcomplies with the type of the network (refer tothe standardIndicator entry in the Dictionary).

• [C/M] :GSM 900 / GSM-R / Extended GSM networks:The number of frequencies in the list is limitedto 64.

• [C/M] :GSM 1800/1900/850 network: The numberof frequencies in the list depends on the gapbetween the lowest and the greatest definedfrequencies.

Maximum gap betweenfrequencies

Number of frequencies

between 257 and 512 [2 to 18]




• [C/M]:The cell BCCH frequency (bCCHFrequency)is part of the list.

• [C/M]:For dualband networks, the number offrequencies must be inferior or equal to 64 byfrequency band.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 159

• [M]:The frequencies allotted to the radio time slots(channel objects) of the set of TDMA framesrelated to the cell are part of the list.

• [C/M]:An element of the list of cellAllocationparameter can take one of the followingvalues:[1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network)[512 to 810] (GSM 1900),[0 to 124] or [955 to 1023] (GSM-R network),[0 to 124 or [975 to 1023] (E-GSM network)[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network).

cellBarQualify Class 3

Description : Cell selection priority used in the C2 algorithm in Phase II.


Value range : [true (low priority) / false (normal priority)]

Object : bts

Default value : False

Type : DP

Release : V8

cellBarred Class 3

Description : Whether direct cell access are barred to mobiles.


During a call, it is transmitted on a signaling link.

If the attribute value is changed to "barred", all in-progresscalls can continue but the BSC will direct further mobilecalls to another cell.

Value range : [barred / not barred]

Object : bts

Default value : not barred


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

Remark : Even when cell access are barred to MSs, the cellmay be indirectly accessible if incoming handovers areallowed (incomingHandOver attribute of the associatedhandOverControl object).

cellDeletionCount Class 3

Description : Number of consecutive "Measurement Result" messageswhich, if not received from a given neighbor cell, will causeall previously stored information related to that cell to bedeleted.

From V12, this number corresponds to the number ofmissing measurement reports after which this neighborcell is no more eligible. The measurements related tothis neighbor cell are not deleted as far as less than 10consecutive measurements are missing.


Object : bts

Default value : 5 in rural environment, 2 in microcell environment

Type : DP

Note : Any entered value superior than 10 is taken into accountas 10 value.

cellDtxDownLink Class 3

Description : Whether the use of discontinuous transmission inBTS-to-MS direction is allowed in a cell.


Object : bts

Default value : enabled

Type : DP

Remark : The dtxMode attribute allows users to control the use ofdiscontinuous transmission on the uplink. Refer to thisentry in the Dictionary.

cellIdentity Class 3

Description : Cell Identity code (CI) that identifying in a location area, aneighbor cell of the current cell.




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 161

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:A CGI is unique in the set including a servingcell and its neighbor cells.


Description : Cell Identity code (CI) identifying in a location area, aneighbor cell of the current cell.



Type : DP



Description : Cell Identity code (CI) identifying a serving cell in a locationarea.

A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique in a location area.

It identifies a cell in the PLMN and includes fourfields: cellIdentity (CI), locationAreaCode (LAC),mobileCountryCode (MCC), and mobileNetworkCode(MNC).


Object : bts

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:A CGI is unique in the set including a serving celland its neighbor cells.

cellName

Description : Reference name of a bts object on the coverage site. It iscase sensitive.

Value range : [30 characters max.]

Object : bts

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Checks : • [C/M]:The name of a cell is unique to the coveringradio site.

Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginning with aletter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameter names (TRX,BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All other symbols/characters areprohibited.



- digit symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

- minus sign: -

- undescore: _

- space

cellPagingState

Description : Processing mode of the paging requests in the cell.

Value range : [allowed / not allowed / not significant]

This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSC.

• allowed ..........The operationalState of thetransceiver object describingthe TDMA frame no.0 carryingthe BCCH is "working" andSYS INFO 1, 2, 3, 4 havebeen acknowledged by theBTS.

• not allowed .......The operationalState of thetransceiver object describingthe TDMA frame no.0 carryingthe BCCH is "working" andSYS INFO 1, 2, 3, 4 have notbeen acknowledged by theBTS.If no message has beenacknowledged by the BTS,the notification 1256 "Nonresponse to SYS INFO 1, 2, 3,4 or 2bis" is issued.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 163

• not significant ....The operationalState of thetransceiver object describingthe TDMA frame no.0 carryingthe BCCH is not "working".

Object : bts

Type : DD

cellReselectHysteresis Class 3

Description : Hysteresis to re-select towards a cell:

• when the MS is in GSM - IDLE mode and re-selects acell with a different LA (Location Area)

• when the MS is in GMM stand by state and re-selects acell with a different LA (Location Area) or a different RA(Routing Area)

• when the MS is in GMM ready state and re-selects adifferent cell

A mobile can select a cell in another location area providedthe re-selection parameter value of that cell overstepsthe re-selection parameter values of all the cells in thesame location area as the current camping cell by at leastcellReselectHysteresis dB.

The information is broadcast on the cell BCCH.

The re-selection criterion (C1) formula is: C1 = (A - Max(B,0)) where A and B are as follows:

A = average level of the received signal - rxLevAccessMin

B = msTxPwrMaxCCH - Maximum RF output power of theMS

The re-selection criterion (C2) formula is given with thecellReselectOffset entry.

Value range : [0 to 14, by steps of 2] dB

Object : bts

Default value : 6 dB

Type : DP

Note : The greater the value of cellReselectHysteresis, thelater a new cell in another location area is selected. Thisprevents from switching back and forth two location areas.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


cellReselectOffset Class 3

Description : Encouragement to re-select a cell (C2 criterion) for phase2 MS.

The re-selection criterion (C2) formula is:

C2 = C1 + cellReselectOffset - temporaryOffsetx H (penaltyTime - T)

• C1 is defined with the cellReselectHysteresis entry.

• T is a timer that is started when the cell is placed by theMS on the list of most suitable cells to receive the calls,and is stopped when the cell is no longer on the list.

• H(penaltyTime - T) equals 0 when penaltyTime < Tand penaltyTime ≥ T.

In the case when penaltyTime = 640, re-selection criterionformula becomes:

C2 = C1 - cellReselectOffset


Object : bts

Feature : AR 264

Default value : 4

Type : DP

Release : V8

Note : The value given to this attribute allows to more or lessencourage the mobiles to re-select the cell.

cellReselInd Class 3

Description : Whether cell re-selection criterion (C2) use is authorized.


Object : bts

Default value : True

Type : DP

Release : V8


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 165

cellThreshold Class 2

Description : Needed number of transceiver object instances that mustbe in enabled state so that the cell is working.

The value of this attribute must be less than or equal to thenumber of TDMA frames created for this cell

This attribute can be modified only if the bts object instanceis locked.

This attribute can be modified only if the bsc objectinstance is unlocked.

Value range : [f1 to 16]

Object : bts

Default value : 1

Type : DP

cellType Class 3

Description : Type of the adjacent cell.

Value range : [normalType / umbrellaType / microType]


Default value : normalType

Type : DP

cellType Class 3

Description : Type of the serving cell.

Value range : [normalType / umbrellaType / microType]

Object : bts

Default value : normalType

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The adjacent cell umbrella Ref attribute isdefined if the cell is a microcell (cellType) anddirected retry handovers are processed in BSCmode (directedRetryModeUsed).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


cemId

Description : Identifier of the ’cem’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000and TCU 3000.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : cem

Type : DP

Release : V13

chain

Description : Identifier of a BSC processing chain.

It identifies the chain whose software markers aredisplayed.

Value range : [A / B]

Object : software-bsc - Display markers

Type : DD

chain

Description : To select messages originating from a BSC processingchain.




Type : DP

chain

Description : Managed object class representing the Display chaininformation.

Value range : [chain A / chain B]

Object : Display chain information - bsc

Type : Id

Note : The action that leads to this response parameter is onlyavailable for BSC 12000HC.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 167

chainId


It identifies the chain whose characteristics are displayed.


Object : bsc - Display chain information

Type : Id


chainId


The consequences of the command are as follows:

• If the chain is active at the time the BSC receives theorder, it is reset and the operations are switched overto the passive chain.

• If the chain is passive when the BSC receives the order,it is reset if it can be reached.

To determine which chain is currently active in a BSC, runa Display all command on the concerned bsc object: theactiveChain attribute identifies the active chain.


Object : bsc - Suicide chain

Type : Id


chainId

Description : Identifier of the ’chain’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation. The valueallocated by the MD-R is located between 0 and 1. Thisattribute cannot be modified. This attribute is relevant forBSC 12000HC.


Object : chain

Type : DP



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


channel

Description : Identifier of a channel object (radio time slot).

In all MMI commands, a channel object can be referred toby the sequence "siteName.cellName.transceiver.channel",where siteName and cellName respectively identify thecovering site and cell by name.


Object : channel

Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The number of channel objects dependent on atransceiver object is limited to eight.

• [C/M]:If the channel object does not obey frequencyhopping laws, the absoluteRFChannelNo isdefined unless it carries the parent cell BCCH,and fhsRef and maio are undefined.

• [C/M]:If the channel object obeys frequency hoppinglaws, the absoluteRFChannelNo is undefined,and fhsRef and maio are defined.

• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSC isbuilt, the parent bsc object is unlocked and theparent bts object is locked.

• [D]:If the application database of the related BSC isnot built, it has been reset by an Off line resetBDA command.

channel state

Description : Type and resource state of the logical channels multiplexedon the radio time slot.

Value range :

Type: [BCCH / RACH / PCH AGCH/ SDCCH/4 / SDCCH/8 / TCH(full rate) / CCH],

Resource state: [not created / disabled /working / free / busy / blocking/ working, blocked / blocking,removing / disabled, blocked/ free, blocked / removing /available / working not CBCH /disabled not CBCH / workingCBCH / disabled CBCH]

• available ........The channel is allocated, notblocked, and free.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 169

• busy ............The channel is allocated, notblocked, and busy.

• disabled .........The channel is not configured.

• working, blocked ..The channel is allocated andblocked.

• disabled, blocked..The channel is not allocatedand blocked.

Object : channel - Display channel state

Type : DD

Notes : • The types of logical channels that can be multiplexed ona radio time slot depend on its channelType. Refer tothis entry in the Dictionary.

• The resource state of SDCCH no.2 is "disabled" if aCBCH is defined.

• A radio channel is blocked or released by means of auser Modify channel state command.

• A radio channel is allocated when the TDMA frame isconfigured (in the Abis way) and its radio time slots aremapped onto an Abis interface PCM link.

channelReleaseOnAbisFailure

Description : Channel Release on Abis Failure feature is enabled ordisabled.

The Channel release policy feature is allowed on the BTSS8000 CBCF and BTS S12000.

The feature is allowed for BTS model which contains thestring:

• “8000”

• ”12000”

except for BTS model:

• ”BSS_btsModelS8000inDoor (CBCF)

• ”BSS_btsModelS8000outDoor (CBCF)


Object : bts

Feature : Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

Note : • The recommended value is disabled.

• This parameter is mandatory.

• [C/M]: A spare of the “TRX container” (IEITDMATranspAttr2 = 0x52) is used on bts objectto activate the feature.

Spare 5 attribute ofTDMACONFIGCONTAINERofTDMACONFIG message

8 7 6 5 4 3 1

IEI = TD_S PARE5_IEI

0 1 0 0 1 1 0

High part of spare5

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Low part of spare5 0 0 0 0 0 0/1 n/a

Default value = 0x0000

Bit 2 (from1 to 8) of the lowpart of spare 5 parameter cantake the values:

0: Channel release policy after the ABIS failure is notactivated

1: Channel release policy after the ABIS failure isactivated.

channelType Class 2

Description : Type of logical channel supported by a radio TS.

Value range : [tCHFull / sDCCH / mainBCCH / mainBCCHCombined /bcchsdcch4CBCH / sdcch8CBCH / cCH (V12) / pDTCH(V12)].

An SDCCH is only allocated to a mobile during call setup.Once the call is established, the SDCCH is released and aTCH supports the call, serving traffic and signaling needs.

A CBCH (Cell Broadcast CHannel) configuration enables useof the Short Message Service -Cell Broadcast (SMS-CB) in acell when a radio time slot of a TDMA frame related to the cellsupports that type of channel. The CBCH can be combinedwith an SDCCH/8 or a BCCH+SDCCH/4. It takes the placeof SDCCH no.2 in all cases.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 171

If the time slot carries a cell BCCH, its type sets the cellBCCH configuration (combined or not combined).

Object : channel

Feature : Extended CCCH (TF184 - V12)GPRS (SV407 - V12)


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:If the type is "mainBCCH", "mainBCCHCombined", or "bcchSdcch4CBCH", the channel objectidentifier is [0] and the object is not authorized tohop.

• [C/M]:The type "cCH" can only be used if TS 0 carriesa BCCH logical channel ("main BCCH", "mainBCCH combined").

• [C/M]:The only allowed association of (BCCH + CCCH)timeslots are (0), (0, 2), (0, 2, 4), (0, 2, 4, 6).

• [C/M]:If the type is "sdcch8CBCH", the channel objectidentifier is in the range [0 to 3] if the coveringcell works in normal mode, and it equals 0 or 2 ifthe cell works in extended mode (extended cellattribute of the parent bts object).

• [C/M]:If the type is "sdcch8CBCH", the noOfBlksForAccessGrant attribute of the parent bts object hasa value greater than 0.

• [C/M]:If the type is "bcchSdcch4CBCH" or"sdcch8CBCH", use of the SMS-CB service isauthorized in the parent bts object (smsCB ="used").

• [C/M]:Concentric cell: If the parent transceiverobject belongs to the cell inner zone, the onlyauthorized types are "bcchSdcch4CBCH" and"sdcch8CBCH".

• [M]:The "pDTCH" channelType is only allowed fromV12 BSCs for GPRS.

A radio channel is identified by an 8-bit code built up by theOMC-R from the channel type and the number of the time slotthat supports it:

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 < TN >


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• TN bits (bits 3 to 1) indicate the radio time slot number[0-7].

• C bits (bits 8 to 4) describe the type of the channel:

00001 ACCH with a TCH/FR (SACCH/FACCH)

0001T ACCH with a TCH/HR

001TT ACCH in an SDCCH/4 configuration

01TTT ACCH in an SDCCH/8 configuration

10000 BCCH

10001 RACH (Uplink CCCH)

10010 PCH + AGCH (Downlink CCCH)

The T bits indicate the subchannel number [0 to 7]:

• There are four subchannels [0 to 3] in anSDCCH/4 configuration:

00100 SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.0

00101 SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannel no.1 (combined CBCH)



• There are eight subchannels [0 to 7] in anSDCCH/8 configuration:


01001 SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannel no.1 (CBCH)







The logical channels that can be multiplexed ona radio time slot depend on its channelType.They are described in the following table.

channelType Bits C5-C1

tCHFull BM + ACCH (SACCH/FACCH)

sDCCH SDCCH/8 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 7](SACCH/FACCH)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 173

channelType Bits C5-C1

mainBCCH BCCHRACH (Uplink)PCH + AGCH (Downlink)

mainBCCHCombined BCCHRACH (Uplink)PCH + AGCH (Downlink)SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 3]

bcchSdcch4CBCH BCCHCBCH (= SDCCH No2)RACH (Uplink)PCH + AGCH (Downlink)SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 3]

sdcch8CBCH CBCH (= SDCCH No2)SDCCH/4 + ACCH subchannels [0 to 3](SACCH/FACCH)

cCH BCCHRACH (Uplink)PCH + AGCH (Downlink)

Remark : Configuration of logical channels and broadcast of shortmessages are managed by two independent OMC-Rfunctions.

When a short message broadcast is started in a cell, thepresence of a channel object with a CBCH dependent onthe concerned bts object is checked. On the contrary, theSMS-CB function is not aware of changes made to thatattribute.

Consequently, withdrawing a CBCH from a cellconfiguration will implicitly stop any short messagebroadcast in the cell without the SMS-CB function knowing.

Note : The following counters have been multiplexed on TSs 0, 2,4, and 6 for the Extended CCCH feature: C1026, C1027,C1028, C1029, C1030, C1031, C1033, C1604, C1605.

Comments : No recommended value is specified since this parameterdepends on the strategy of the operator.

chanState

Description : Whether or not, the radio channel is blocked.


Object : channel - Set channel state

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Checks : • [A]:A BCCH or a CBCH, whether combined or not,cannot be blocked.

• [A]:The parent btsSiteManager and bts objects areunlocked.

Notes : • When a CBCH is defined for a cell, it always uses SDCCHno.2.

• Run a Display channel state command to check that thechannel has switched to the specified state. Refer to thechannel state entry in the Dictionary.

chosenChannelAsscomp Class 1

Description : Whether the "Chosen channel" element is used in theASSIGN COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance).




Type : DP

Release : V8

Note : If the MSC parameter MULTIPLE_VOCODER_SUPPORT(Table OFCVAR) is set to ON(see 411-2231-455 for more details), then the BSCparameter chosenChannelAsscomp needs to be set toTRUE.

chosenChannelCompL3Info Class 1

Description : Whether the "Chosen channel" element is used in theCOMPLETE LAYER 3 INFORMATION messages (Phase IIcompliance).




Type : DP

Release : V8

Note : If the MSC parameter MULTIPLE_VOCODER_SUPPORT(Table OFCVAR) is set to ON(see 411-2231-455 for more details), then the BSCparameter chosenChannelCompL3Info needs to be setto TRUE.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 175

chosenChannelHoPerf Class 1

Description : Whether the "Chosen channel" element is used inthe HANDOVER PERFORMED messages (Phase IIcompliance).




Type : DP

Release : V8


chosenChannelHoReq Class 1

Description : Whether the "Chosen channel" element is used in theHANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE messages(Phase II compliance).




Type : DP

Release : V8


cic Class 0

Description : Circuit Identity Code = numbers of the PCM link and timeslot used by a terrestrial circuit on the A interface, definedwith regard to the MSC (cic = 32xmscPcmNumber +mscPcmTsNumber).

The cic is coded into 16 bits, as follows:

xxxxxxxxxxxnnnnn = (32xmscPcmNumber) + mscPcmTsNumber


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Bits x identify the PCM link involved in the BSC/MSC linkwith regard to the MSC (mscPcmNumber), bits n identifythe time slot used on that PCM link with regard to the MSC(mscPcmTsNumber).


Object : xtp

Type : DP

Checks : • [C]:A cic is unique to the parent bsc object.

• [C]:The PCM TS used by the terrestrial circuiton the A interface is identical on MSC end(mscPcmTsNumber component) and BSC end(timeSlotNumber), and is not allotted to anotherxtp or signallingLink object dependent on theparent bsc object.

• [C]:If PCM link no.3 is used on the A interface(pcmCircuitId), the TS number is in the range[1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link and in therange [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Sincethe last four TSs on that link are not mapped onthe Ater interface, they cannot be used.Refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in theDictionary.


circuitGroupBlock Class 1

Description : Whether the CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCK and CIRCUITGROUP UNBLOCK messages are used (Phase IIcompliance).

If these messages are unused, the BLOCK and UNBLOCKmessages are used.

Value range : [false / true]


Feature : Unequipped circuit and circuit group block (UF1169.1 -V12)


Type : DP

Release : V8


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 177

circularFileId

Description : Identifier of a BSC circular file.

BSC circular files are automatically created by the system:the FAULT files are created with the BSC, the PERF(observations) and TRACE (trace data) files are createdwhen the BSC application database is built.

Value range : [majorFault / minorFault / observation (permanent andtemporary) / instrumentPanel]

Object : bscMdInterface - Circular file

Type : Id

Checks : • [A]:The circular file is created.

circularFileState

Description : State of a circular file. When a circular file is closed, thespontaneous messages stored are not forwarded to theOMC-R agent.

This attribute is set by the system following a user Closecircular file or Open circular file command.

When a circular file is closed, the messages are stored untilthe file is reopened. Some messages may be lost if thecapacity of the file is reached.

Value range : [closed / opened]

Object : bscMdInterface - Display circular file state

Type : DP

clear time

Description : To select alarms cleared at that time.




Object : Cleared alarm log - Filter

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


cleared by

Description : To select alarms ceased by a given user. Enter the user’sname as defined in the user’s profile.



Type : DP

clearing cause

Description : To select alarms according to the cause of ceasing.


Value range : [user command / object enabled / object deleted / clearevent received / automatic purge / cleared on low thresholdcrossing / circular file saturation]


Type : DP

cn

Description : The Control Node, which provides the GSM protocolprocessing (CallProcessing, SS7 and LAPD), as wellas BSS OA&M. A logical point of view and a sub-track(hardware) point of view are managed. The SIM modulesare also managed.



Type : DP

control Node Id

Description : Identifier of a ’controlNode’ object class. This identifieris allocated by the MD-R at object creation. The onlyvalue allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.



Type : DP

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 179

coderPoolConfiguration Class 2 for a BSC 12000HC V12, a BSC12000HC V15 and a BSC 3000 V15, and class 3 for a BSC 3000 V14

Description : This attribute indicates enumerated speech codingalgorithms supported by the TCU. Note that TCU2G doesnot support AMR.

Value range : List of [coderAlgo, minimumCall, powerULI, powerDLI],with:coderAlgo (BSC version: up to V15): fullRatecoder/ enhancedFullRateCoder / phase1DataCoder /amrFullHalfRateCodercoderAlgo (BSC version: from V16): fullRatecoder /enhancedFullRateCoder / ctmEnhancedFullRateCoder /amrFullHalfRateCoderminimumCall: 0 to 65535powerULI: -15 to +15powerDLI: -15 to +15

Object : transcoder

Type : DP

Release : V13

coderPoolList

Description : Current partitioning of the coder pool. This attribute isdynamically managed by the BSS. It is set to NULL atobject creation. Value changes are not notified to theManager. This attribute is relevant for TCU 3000.

Value range : for a V15 BSC, list of [coderAlgo, archipelagoes,maximumCall, currentCall] with :coderAlgo: fullRatecoder / enhancedFullRateCoder /phase1DataCoder / amrFullHalfRateCoderarchipelagoes: 0 to 65535maximumCall: 0 to 65535CurrentCall: 0 to 65535for a V16 BSC, list of [coderAlgo, archipelagoes,emptyArchipelago, maximumCall, currentCall,minimumCallsRespected] with:coderAlgo: fullRatecoder / enhancedFullRateCoder /ctmEnhancedFullRateCode / amrFullHalfRateCoderarchipelagoes: 0 to 65535emptyArchipelago: 0 to 65535maximumCall: 0 to 65535currentCall: 0 to 65535minimumCallsRespected: yes / no


Type : DD

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


codingScheme Class 2

Description : Channel coding scheme (CS) used for data in GPRS mode(UL and DL).

Value range : [cs1, cs2]



Default value : cs1

Type : DP

Release : V12

Note : cs1 is used for control blocks. Depending on thecodingScheme parameter, cs1 or cs2 is used for datablocks in UL and DL.

command classes

Description : List of no more than twenty-five authorized commandclasses that define a user’s command domain. MMIcommands grant access to OMC-R functions.

Each class defines a subset of commands (one ofthem provides access to all MMI commands). Thecomprehensive list of MMI commands, together with theirclass(es), can be displayed using the Display commandclasses command.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : DP

command line

Description : Command associated with the job. Follow the Line modesyntax.

If the job is meant to run a simple command, enter thesequence describing the command and its parameters.

If the job is meant to run a command file, enter thefollowing:

Run-commandFile: object=(commandFile=/<directory>/<filename>);

The command file must be created in the specifieddirectory.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 181

The Line mode syntax is detailed in NTP < 130 >.


Object : job

Type : DP

command number

Description : Serial number of the command to abort. It is assigned bythe system and is registered in session logs.

Every MMI command launched by the user is identifiedby a serial number assigned by the system. Open theuser session log consultation window and search for thatnumber.

Value range : [1 to infinity]

Object : commandFile - Abort

Type : DP

commandFile

Description : Identifier (name) of a command file in the saving directory.

Enter the file name only.

If the file exists in the selected directory, the user can eitheroverwrite its contents with the commands newly recordedor append the new commands to the existing file (see NTP< 130 >).

Value range : [case sensitive, 14 characters max.]

Object : commandFile - Create file

Type : Id

commandFile

Description : Saving name of the command file after being edited.

Enter the file name only.

If the file is a new one, preselect the saving directory inthe "Command file manager" window. If the file exists, it issaved in the same directory as the source file.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : Command file editing - Save

Type : Id

comment

Description : Text comment.


Object : report template

Type : DP

Release : V11

comment

Description : Additional information coming with the short message. Itis not broadcast.


Object : short message

Type : DP

comments

Description : Additional information (such as creation date).

Object : software - Display markers

Type : DD

computeSyntheticCounters

Description : Whether synthetic counters are included in the observationreport.

This parameter is significant only for permanent bsc andinstrument panel observation report display requests.


Object : Display xxx report

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 183

concentAlgoExtMsRange Class 3

Description : MS to BTS distance below which a handover is requestedfrom the large zone to the small zone if the level criteria isverified.

Value range : [1 to 34] km (non-extended mode),

[1 to 120] km (extended mode).


Default value : 1 km

Condition : To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric,dualband or dualcoupling cell

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:concentAlgoExtMsRange ≤concentAlgoIntMsRange

• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 34 km if the extendedcell attribute of the associated bts object is"false".

• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 120 km if theextended cell attribute of the bts object is "true".

Release : V9

concentAlgoExtRxLev Class 3

Description : The level of the MS signal strength from below which ahandover is requested from the large zone to the small zone.

Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ..., -49 to -48, more than -48]dB


Default value : - 95 to - 94

Condition : To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric,dualband or dualcoupling cell

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:concentAlgoExtRxLev >concentAlgoIntRxLev

Release : V9


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


concentAlgoIntMsRange Class 3

Description : MS to BTS distance from which a handover from the smallzone to the large zone will be requested.

The following inequality, that is not checked by the system,must be true (refer to these entries in the Dictionary).

concentAlgoIntMsRange ≤ msRangeMax

Value range : [1 to 34] km (non-extended mode)

[1 to 120] km (extended mode)


Default value : 34 km

Condition : To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric,dualband or dualcoupling cell.

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:concentAlgoIntMsRange ≤ concentAlgoExtMsRange

• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 34 km if the extendedcell attribute of the associated bts object is"false".

• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 120 km if theextended cell attribute of the bts object is "true".

Release : V9

concentAlgoIntRxLev Class 3

Description : Level of the MS signal strength below which a handover isrequested from the small zone to the large zone.

Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ..., -49 to -48, more than -48] dB


Default value : less than -110

Condition : To define if the associated bts object describes a concentric,dualband or dualcoupling cell.

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:concentAlgoIntRxLev <concentAlgoExtRxLev

Release : V9


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 185

concentric cell Class 2

Description : Whether the cell is monozone, concentric, dualband ordualcoupling:

A concentric, dualband, or dualcoupling cell describesa combination of two transmission zones, the outer (orlarge) zone and the inner (or small) zone. The inner zoneis entirely included in the outer zone.

A dualband cell is a particular type of concentric cell forwhich GSM 900 and GSM1800 or GSM850 and GSM1900TRXs/DRXs coexist and share the same BCCH.

A dualcoupling cell is a particular type of concentric cellfor which the TRXs/DRXs are combined with two types ofcombiners.

For concentric configurations (concentric, dualband ordualcoupling), a TDMA frame belongs to one zone or theother, but never to both, and the frequencies used in eachzone are separated.

Value range : [monozone / concentric / dualband / dualcoupling]

• monozone .......normal cell

• concentric.......two concentric transmissionzones

• dualband.........two concentric transmissionszones with GSM 900 andGSM 1800 TRXs/DRXs for theone or GSM 850 GSM 1900TRXs/DRXs for the other

• dualcoupling..two concentric transmissionzones with TRXs/DRXscombined with a one type ofcombiner for the one and withanother type of combiner forthe other

Object : bts


Default value : dualband

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Note : Dualband cells are only available for S8000 DRXtransceiver architecture.

Dualcoupling cells are only available for BTSs equippedwith non mixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.

Release : V9

condition

Description : Condition for calling the counting mechanism when acounter is involved.

The following fields can be combined in the logicalexpression:

Parameter Notification type Operators

administrativeState state change =

availabilityStatus state change =

bsc equipment name alarm =

bsc model alarm =

cause alarm < = >

btsSiteManagermodel

alarm =

bts equipment name alarm =

equipment processornumber

alarm < = >

faultNumber alarm < = >

operationalState state change =

perceived severity alarm =

postMortem alarm =

usageState state change =


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 187

The "postMortem" field can take two values, either "beforeBSC restart" or "after bsc restart". They have the followingmeaning:

• before BSC restart means that the notification issued bythe BSC was received by the OMC-R agent without theBSC having restarted (nominal conditions).

• after BSC restart means that the notification wasissued by the BSC and the BSC was restarted beforethe OMC-R agent received the notification. Thesenotifications do not trigger alarms.

The following logical operators can be used in the logicalexpression:

• & stands for the logical AND.

• | stands for the logical OR.

• ! stands for the logical NOT.

Value range : [logical expression]


Condition : To define if a Counter is associated with the criterion.

Type : DP

configRef Class 3

Description : Reference name of a DLU (Data Loading Unit)configuration file. Check BSS upgrade file.

Value range : [1 to VVV]


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The attribute value must be set according to astatic configuration file.

Note : If the attribute is nonzero, the user must check that theDLU configuration file exists on the concerned BSC disk,since no check is performed by the OMC-R.

The configRef is an ASCII-coded integer in base 32 thatallows to code the version of the DLU configuration file asseven characters (xxaYYYz).

The btsDescription parameter gives the transcription ofthe configRef parameter.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


configRefList

Description : This attribute identifies the list of available configRef for abtsSiteManager delivery. For another object class instance,this attribute is empty. This attribute is allocated by theMD-R at object creation. This attribute cannot be modifiedby the Manager.



Type : DP

Release : V13

configurationType

Description : Type of configuration the alarm criterion belongs to:

The manufacturer configuration is known as the referenceconfiguration. The operator configurations are known asthe daytime configuration, the nighttime configuration, andthe specific (or particular) configuration. Refer to the alarmcriteria entry in the Dictionary.

Value range : [manufacturer / operator]


Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified.

confusion Class 1

Description : Whether the CONFUSION messages are used (Phase IIcompliance).

Value range : [false]



Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The only accepted value is "false".

Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute,changing it has no meaning.

Release : V8


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 189

counter list

Description : Type of the counter list displayed.

Value range : [default / all]

• "default":the default counter list

• "all":the whole counter list


Type : DP

Release : V12

counter list filename

Description : Full pathname of the counter list file.


Type : DP

Release : V11

counterId

Description : Q3 name of a permanent BSS observation counter. SeeNTP < 07 >.

Value range : [50 characters max., case sensitive]

Object : mdWarning - detection function = "outOfRangeCounter"

Type : DP

counters

Description : List of the Q3 names of the counters eligible forobservation, which are in the counter list filename.


Type : DP

Release : V11

counters

Description : List of counters (Q3 names) chosen for observation.


Value range : [list of Q3 counter names]

Type : DP

Release : V11


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


cpueNumber Class 0

Description : Gives the number of the cellgroup to which the object willbe mapped. Allows to by-pass the BSC algorithm whichdistributes the sites into Cell Groups.

BSC CPUE 0 CPUE 1

BSC 12000 "HC", 12000types 3, 4, 5

BIFP0 BIFP 1

Value range :


Feature : CPU/BIFP load sharing (AR874 - V12)

Default value:

0

Type : DP

Checks : • [C]:The btsSiteManager object is limited according tothe cpueNumber attribute value.

• [C]:The transceiverEquipment object instancenumber is limited according to the cpueNumberattribute value.

Notes : to modify this parameter the bdaState must be "not built"

Release : V12

cpueOccurrence

Description : Gives the number of the cell-group to which the sitehas been mapped at site creation. This mapping is notmodifiable, except by deleting the site.

Value range : Depends on system release:

• before V15.1: [0 to 95]

• from V15.1: [0 to 53]


Type : DD


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 191

cRC Class 0

Description : Whether the CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) test on PCMlinks is used by the CTMx board controlling the PCM link,whether it is a pcmCircuit object dependent on a bsc object(Abis or Ater interface) for a BSC 3000 or dependent on atranscoder object (A interface) for a TCU 3000.

Value range : [used / not used]

Object : pcmCircuit

Default value : not used

Type : DP

cRC Class 2

Description : Whether the CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) test on PCMlinks is used by the DDTI board controlling the PCM link.

pcmCircuit object dependent on a bsc object (Abis or Aterinterface) for BSC 12000:

If a CRC frame checking method is used, the DDTI boardin the BSC and the DTI board in the BTS to which thePCM link is connected must be appropriately configured,as follows:

• DDTI board: CS17 or CS18 jumper is ON (see NTP <22 >).

• DTI board: CS17 jumper is ON (see Nortel GSM BTSReference Manuals).

• PCMI board: SW2 or SW3 jumper is ON (see NortelGSM BTS Reference Manuals)

pcmCircuit object dependent on a transcoder object (Ainterface) for TCU 2G:

If a CRC frame checking method is used, the DDTI boardin the TCU to which the PCM link is connected must beappropriately configured: CS17 and CS18 jumpers are ON(see NTP < 16 >).

In case of mismatch, the DDTI configuration takesprecedence over the CRC state and a fault message issent to the OMC-R.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : pcmCircuit


Type : DP

creator

Description : Report template creator name.



Type : DP

Release : V11

criteriaEventType

Description : Type of the notifications handled by the alarm criterion.

Selecting "alarmNotification" includes all Q3 alarmnotifications such as communicationAlarm, equipmentAlarm, environmentalAlarm, processingError-Alarm, andqualityOfServiceAlarm.

Selecting "stateChangeNotification" includes all Q3 statechange notifications.

Value range : [alarmNotification / stateChangeNotification]


Type : DP

cSS7LocalSubSystemNumber Class 0

Description : SS7 local subsystem number for the BSSMAP application.


Object : signallingPoint (BSC 3000 V14)or signallingLinkSet (BSC 3000 from V15)

Type : DP

Notes : • The recommended value is 254 (0x00FE).

• This parameter is only available for BSC 3000.

Release : V15


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

C 193

cSS7RemoteSubSystemNumber Class 0

Description : SS7 remote subsystem number for the BSSMAPapplication.


Object : signallingPoint (bsc 3000 V14) orsignallingLinkSet (bsc 3000 from V15)

Type : DP

Release : V15

Note : The recommended value is 254 (0x00FE).


CTU cable

Description : The CTU (cable transition unit) provides the physicalinterface to the customer’s spans in the BSC 3000 and theTCU 3000.


True value: No break in the copper connection from theCTU to the IEM module of the LSA.

False value: The cable is improperly installed from the CTUto the IEM module of the LSA or some break in the copperconnection from the CTU and the IEM module of the LSA.

Object : iem (up to V15), lsaRc (from V16)

Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1

Type : DD

Release : V13

current log size

Description : Current log size expressed in bytes.


Type : DP

Remark : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by users.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


current synchronization mode

Description : Current synchronized mode gives the currentsynchronization mode of the BTS according to thesynchronization mode received in the set external contactmessage (if received) but regardless of the synchronizationsignals available.

This parameter is used in response of the "Display DataInformation" (normal) action.

Value range : [normal Abis synchronization / slave BTS correctlysynchronized on master signal 1/ Abis synchronizationdue to master synchronization not available / slave BTSsynchronized on master SY but master GSM time hasbeen lost / Abis synchronization due to loss of masterSY / hold over mode / Abis synchronization due to GPSsynchronization unavailable or lack of accuracy / hold overmode due to a loss of GPS synchronization / hold overmode due to a GPS synchronization lack of accuracy /Network GPS Synchronized]

Object : bts

Feature : BTS synchronization

currentChannelHorqd Class 1

Description : Whether the "Current channel" element is used or notin the HANDOVER REQUIRED messages (Phase IIcompliance).




Type : DP

Release : V12

cypherModeReject Class 1

Description : Whether the CYPHER MODE REJECT messages are used(Phase II compliance).




Type : DP

Release : V8



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

D 195

DdARPPh1Priority class 2

Description : Specifies the priority of SAIC (Single Antenna InterferenceCancellation) mobiles on the TDMA.


Value range : [high priority, low priority]

Type : DP


Default value : high priority

Release : V15

Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC3000 V15 and later, and applicable since BSC 3000V15.1.1.

data mode 14.4 kbit/s Class 2

Description : Whether data 14.4 kbit/s transmission rate is allowed.




Type : DP

• [M] :Related software object release must be V11+release.

• [M] :The version attribute of the parent transcoderobject must be set at "TCB_2".

Checks :

• [M] :The parent bsc object is unlocked and thetranscoderBoard is unlocked.

Release : V11

data non transparent mode Class 3

Description : Set of transmission rates used for data non transparentmode transmission on the Radio interface (MS ↔ BTS)and Abis interface (BTS ↔ BSC).

Value range : [9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s)

Object : bts

Default value : 9.6

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [C/M] :The only allowed configurations are thefollowing:

Checks :

• "9.6"

• "9.6" and "14.4"

Release : V11

data non transparent mode Class 3

Description : Set of transmission rates used for data non transparentmode transmission on the Radio interface (MS ↔ BTS) andAbis interface (BTS ↔ BSC).

Value range : [9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s)


Default value : 9.6 kbit/s

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M] :The only allowed configurations are thefollowing:

• "9.6"

• "9.6" and "14.4"

Release : V9

data transparent mode Class 3

Description : Set of transmission rates used for data transparent modetransmission on the Radio interface (MS ↔ BTS) and Abisinterface (BTS ↔ BSC).

Value range : ["1.2/0.075" / 0.6 / 1.2 / 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s)

Object : bts

Type : DP


• 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 (6 values)

• 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 14.4 (7 values)

Release : V11


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

D 197

data transparent mode Class 3

Description : Set of transmission rates used for data transparent modetransmission on the Radio interface (MS ↔ BTS) and Abisinterface (BTS ↔ BSC).

Value range : ["1.2/0.075" / 0.6 / 1.2 / 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / 14.4] (kbit/s)


Default value :

Type : DP


• 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 (6 values)

• 1.2/0.075, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 14.4 (7 values)

Release : V9

data14-4OnNoHoppingTs Class 3

Description : Whether data 14.4 kbit/s transmission rate is allowed at btslevel on the non hopping TSs.


Object : bts


Type : DP

Release : V12

date

Description : Date on which the observation report was created.

Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.

Value range : [<date>]

Object : Display daily report

Type : DP

date

Description : Date on which data to archive were recorded.



Object : md - Archive


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

Note : Archiving fault, observation, or trace data is not possible forthe current day.

date

Description : Date on which data to restore were recorded.



Object : md - Restore

Type : DP

date

Description : Date on which data to archive were recorded.



Object : omc - Archive/Restore

Type : DP

Note : Archiving fault, observation, or trace data is not possible forthe current day.

date

Description : Date on which data to restore were recorded.



Object : omc - Restore

Type : DP

day intervention

Description : Type of action associated with an alarm criterion in thedaytime configuration.

Value range : [noAlarm / critical / major / minor]


Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

D 199

day to be purged

Description : Date on which the data to purge were recorded.



Object : omc - Data purge

Type : DP

Release : V10

dDTIIntState

Description : Internal state of the DDTI board controlling the PCM link.

[working / fault]

• working .........The board is correctlyconfigured.

Value range :

• fault ............The board configuration wasunsuccessful.

Object : pcmCircuit

Type : DD


degradedCause

Description : Gives the reasons of the degraded or enabled state.

Value range : [Not significant, GPRS]

Object : bts

Type : DD

Release : V15

degradedCause

Description : Gives the reasons of the degraded or enabled state.

Value range : [Lack of Abis resources / Site not supporting Edge/ Site insufficient number of DS0 / TRX insufficientEdge capability / Site not supporting CS3 CS4 / TRXinsufficient Packet capability / Site not supporting neitherCS3 CS4, neither Edge / Site not supporting CS3 CS4,with insufficient number of DS0 / TRX insufficient Edgecapability in a site not supporting CS3 CS4 / TRXinsufficient Edge and packet capability / Not significant]


Feature : GPRS


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DD

Release : V15

delayBetweenRetrans Class 2

Description : Number of occurrences of a paging sub-group thatseparates two transmissions of the same paging message.

The following inequality, that is not checked by the system,must be true (refer to these entries in the Dictionary):

retransDuration ≥ (delayBetweenRetrans + 1) xnbOfRepeat


Object : bts

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V8

delivery

Description : Name of executable software package to download to theBSC disk.

The name of the delivery identifies the type and version ofthe BSS software for which it is designed as follows:

• BSC 3000 software format = "BSxabcdefghi"

Field Meaning Value

BSx Name x = [1 .. 4]

ab Version [09 . .32]

cd SubversionNumber

[01 . .99]

ef Edition [01 . .99]

gh Patch Level [01 . .99]

i Revision Factor ’C’

• BSC 3000 software format = "B3Gabcdefghi"

• TCU 3000 software format = "TC3abcdefgh"


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

D 201

Field Meaning Value

ab Version [13 . .32]

cd SubversionNumber

[01 . .99]

ef Edition [01 . .99]

gh Patch Level [01 . .99]

i Debug Delivery ’D’

• TCB/BTS/TRX software format = "XXXabcdef"

BTS TRX TCB

xxx BCF/BC1/BC2/SBC/CBC/PIC/IBC/ICM

TRX/TR1/DRX/CDR/EDG/ERM

TCB/TC1/TC2

ab [00 .. 32] [00 .. 32] [00 . .32]

c ’A’ .. ’H’ ’A’ .. ’H’ ’A’ .. ’H’

d [01 . .08] [01 . .08] [01 . .08]

ef [01 .. 32] [01 .. 32] [01 .. 64]

Value range : XXXabcdefghi (g, h and i are optional)

Object : software - Download

Type : DP

• [A]:Corresponding executableSoftware objectmust exist. That means that the softwaredelivery must be previously installed fromCD-ROM or gigatape on MD disk.

• [A]:The software being downloaded must bepresent on MD disk and accessible.

• [A]:There should be no downloading in progress ofthe same type of software.

• [A]:The software must match the architecture ofBSC to which it is being downloaded.

Checks :

• [A]:The parent bsc object is unlocked.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


deltaUtc

Description : Gap between the current OMC-R agent time and the GMTreference. Enter a positive value [+m] when the OMC-Ragent is located east of the Greenwich meridian and anegative value [-m] when it is located west.

Value range : [-1440 to +1440] minute

The range of possible values allows to update the OMC-Rreference time within ± 24 hours.

Object : md

Type : DP

Remark : Setting this attribute does not change the time displayed inthe system "Session informations" window which refers tothe workstation internal clock.

Note : This parameter cannot be modified.

detectionFunction

Description : Associated function.

Value range : [excessiveAnomalyRate / outOfRangeCounter]

Object : mdWarning

Type : DP

directedRetry Class 3

Description : Minimum signal strength level received by the mobiles tobe granted access to the neighbor cell, used in processingdirected retry handovers in BTS mode.

Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ... , -49 to -48, more than -48]dB


Default value : >-48 dB

Type : DP

Release : V9

directedRetryModeUsed Class 3

Description : Specify how directed retry handovers are processed ina cell either directly by the BSC (microcells only) or byquerying the BTS first.

Value range : [bsc / bts]

Object : bts


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

D 203

Default value : bts

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The BSC mode is authorized if the cell is amicrocell (cellType) and the adjacent cellumbrella Ref attribute is defined.

Note : The micro cell should be entirely covered by the macro cellin order to use efficiently the bsc mode.

The use of the bts mode is recommended in a hot spotwhen these are several micro cells under the umbrella.The bts mode allows the use of micro cells to rescue theumbrella cell and also avoids a saturation of the umbrellacell.

The bts mode is also recommended for all other cases.

Release : V9

directedRetryPrio Class 3

Description : Defines the number priority for directed retry handovers.


Object : bts


Type : DP

Release : V12

directory

Description : Name of the directory created on the OMC-R agent disksfor storing a delivery containing a BSS software version.

The directory name identifies the type and version of theBSS software stored. Refer to the executableSoftwareentry in the Dictionary.

If the directory exists on the OMC-R agent disks, the useris warned.

Value range : [BSxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)]

Object : md - Create delivery dir

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


display Data Configuration

Description : A command applied on btsSiteManager to configure thedata display.

Value range : normal EDGE

Object : Select the object instance and choose the command.

display Data Information

Description : A command applied on btssiteManager to state requireddata display.

Value range : normal EDGE

Object : Select the object instance and choose the command.

distHreqt Class 3

Description : Number of distance measurements, used to computethe weighted average MS-to-BTS distance in handoveralgorithms.



Default value : 4

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:distHreqt is equal to the number of weights indistWtsList (refer to the next entry).

distributionActivation Class 3

Description : Activation of distributions for observation purpose.

Object : bts

Value range : [0/1: disabled / enabled]

Type : DP

Feature : Distribution on Radio measurements

Default value : 0

Checks : • [C/M]:Measurement distribution cannot be activatedif interference matrix is running on this cell.The purpose of this semantic check is toforbid activation of interference matrix anddistribution features at the same time on a cell.

Release : V15



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

D 205

distributionDuration Class 3

Description : Duration of the observation.

Object : bts

Value range : [0..92] (1 unit = 15 minutes)

Note : 0 is interpreted as 1

Type : DP

Checks: • [C/M]Measurement distributioncannot be activated ifinterference matrix isrunning on this cell. Thepurpose of this semanticcheck is to forbid activationof interference matrix anddistribution features at thesame time on a cell.

Feature : Distribution on Radiomeasurements

Default value : 0

Release : V15

Note : This parameter is mandatory.It is only available for BSC3000 V15 and later, andapplicable since BSC 3000V15.1.1.

distributionTime Class 3

Description : Starting time of theobservation period fordistributions (OMC-R servercurrent timer).

Object : bts

Value range : [00:00 to 23:59]

Type : DP

Feature : Distribution on Radiomeasurements

Default value : 00:00


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Checks: • [C/M]Measurement distributioncannot be activated ifinterference matrix isrunning on this cell. Thepurpose of this semanticcheck is to forbid activationof interference matrix anddistribution features at thesame time on a cell.

Note : This parameter ismandatory. It is onlyavailable for BSC 3000 V15and later, and applicablesince BSC 3000 V15.1.1.

Note : The distributionTimeparameter set by theoperator is relative to theOMC-R server current timer,and not to the local BTShour.

In case of feature activationon all cells of a BSC, thetime to compute all thecorresponding TGEs cantake up to 20 minutes. Toensure that the featureis not to be activated theday after, the operatormust leave a margin of 30minutes between activationtime and distributionTimeparameter.

Release : V15

distributionQualityThreshold Class 3

Description : RxQual threshold for RxLev distribution.

This parameter is used according to the followingprinciples:

• Uplink case: measurements are those given by theBTS. A measurement is taken into account in the uplink


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

D 207

RxLev distribution if the RxQual_UP is equal to orgreater than distributionQualityThreshold.

• Downlink case: measurements are those given bythe MS. A measurement is taken into account in thedownlink RxLev distribution if the RxQual_Dw is equalto or greater than distributionQualityThreshold.

• For RxQual distributions, all measurements are keptwhatever their RxQual values are.

Object : bts


Type : DP


Default value : 0

Release : V15


distWtsList Class 3

Description : List of no more than sixteen weights, used to computethe average MS-to-BTS distance from distHreqtmeasurements.

The L1M function balances distHreqt raw measurementswith the weights defined in the distWtsList list. Eachmeasurement is partnered with one weight in the list.Weight/measurement associations are set in the orderwhich the weights are recorded. The latest receivedmeasurement is always partnered with the first weight inthe list.

Super-average = [∑ (measurement i x weighti)] / 100, i = 1to distHreqt



Default value : 40 30 20 10

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The number of weights in the list is equal todistHreqt and their sum equals 100.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


diversity Class 2

Description : Whether reception diversity is allowed in a cell. Thisparameter is used to control the diversity activation and thechoice of the algorithm


Value range: disabled (0) / enabled (1)

Object : bts


Type : DP

dlGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3

Description : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS2 and thenext code in the two DL GMSK Only Link Adaptation tablesand the DL GMSK table.


Object : bts

Default value : 0 (disabled MCS2 in the Link Adaptation tables)

Feature : EDGE link adaptation (20219)

Type : DP

Release : V15

dlGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3

Description : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS3 and thenext code in the two DL GMSK Only Link Adaptation tablesand the DL GMSK table.


Object : bts


Default value : 0 (disabled MCS3 in the Link Adaption tables)

Type : DP

Release : V15

dlMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3

Description : The parameter sets the threshold between MCS2 and thenext code in the DL 8PSK Link Adaptation table.


Object : bts



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

D 209


Type : DP

Release : V15




Object : bts



Type : DP

Release : V15




Object : bts



Type : DP

Release : V15




Object : bts



Type : DP

Release : V15


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.





Object : bts



Type : DP

Release : V15




Object : bts



Type : DP

Release : V15

drxTimerMax Class 3

Description : Maximum value allowed for mobile stations to requestnon-DRX mode after packet transfer mode.

Value range : [0 (0s), 1 (1s), 2 (2s), 3 (4s), 4 (8s), 5 (16s), 6 (32s), 7(64s)]

The deactivation value for the sub-feature TF1220.3transfer non DRX mode is 0.

Object : bts

Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12, and TF1220 V12.4c)

Default value : 0 s

Type : DP

Release : V12


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

D 211

dtxMode Class 3

Description : MS control of the discontinuous transmission mechanism ina cell.

Discontinuous transmission is designed to lessen MSbattery consumption and diminish interference by breakingoff the transmission when no data or speech are beingtransmitted.

Value range : • For BSC 3000:[frmsMayUseDtx_hrmsShallNotUseDtx,frmsShallUseDtx_hrmsShallNotUseDtx,frmsShallNotUseDtx_hrmsShallNotUseDtx ,frmsMayUseDtx_hrmsMayUseDtx,frmsShallUseDtx_hrShallUseDtx,frmsShallNotUseDtx_hrShallUseDtx].

• For BSC 6000 and BSC 12000HC:[msMayUseDtxmsShallUseDtxmsShallNotUseDtx]

Object : bts

Default value : • For BSC 3000:frmsMayUseDtx_hrmsMayUseDtx

• For BSC 6000 and BSC 12000HC:msShallNotUseDtx

Type : DP

Remark : The cellDtxDownlink attribute allows users to control theuse of discontinuous transmission on the downlink. Referto this entry in the Dictionary.

duplex link state

Description : Active/passive chain link state.


Object : bsc and hardware BSC 12000HC

Type : DD

Release : V10



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


duration

Description : Time delay before running the next command.

The Sleep command can be inserted in a command file asmany times as necessary.


Object : commandFile - Sleep command

Type : DP

dwAckTime Class 3 (packetAckTime)

Description : Defines the DL TBF Keep-Alive timer.

Value range : [1 to 64] steps 500 ms for downlink transfer


Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12 and TF1220 - V12.4c)

Default value : 1

Type : DP

Release : V12

dynamicAgprsAllowed Class 2

Description : Enables or disables the Dynamic Agprs feature on thewhole PCU.

Depending on BSC architecture and release:

• dynamicAgprsAllowed is a gprsPcuLockExtendedConfsub-parameter (BSC 12000HC V12 or BSC 3000 V14)

• dynamicAgprsAllowed is a stand-alone parameter (BSCV15)

Value range : Depending on BSC architecture and release:

• [enabled / disabled] (BSC 12000HC V12 or BSC 3000V14)

• [yes / no] (BSC V15)

Object : pcu

Default value : disabled or no (according to BSC architecture and release)

Release : V14

Note : If EDGE is activated, enabling the dynamic Agprs feature isstrongly recommended.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

E 213

Eearly classmark sending Class 3

Description : Whether Early classmark sending procedure initiated by amultiband MS is allowed.

The information is broadcasted to the mobiles at regularintervals on the cell BCCH (SYS INFO 3).

Value range : [Not Allowed/Allowed]

Object : bts

Default value : Not Allowed

Type : DP

Note : The recommended value is “Allowed”.

Release : V10

edgeDataServiceType Class 2

Description : Type of EDGE packet data service which can be managedby one TDMA.

Value range : capability not requested / full capability requested


Default value : capability not requested

Type : DP

Release : V15

edgeFavor Class 3

Description : The parameter is used by PCU to configure the relativeoffer of an EDGE TDMA.

Value range : 1 to 5 (by step of 0,04)



Default value : 1

Type : DP

Release : V15

eDGEMixity Class 3

Description : Limitation of GPRS mobiles allocation on EDGE TDMA.


Object : bts

Feature : EDGE dynamic allocation (20230)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Default value : 100

Type : DP

Release : V15

efd

Description : Identifier of an efd object defined with regard to the mdobject.

Seven efd objects are automatically created for the mdobject, an "efdAlarm" type object, an "efdConfiguration"type object, an "efdObs" type object, an "efdSpecificNotif"type object, an "efdStateChange" type object, an"efdTrace" type object, and an "efdClass" type object.Refer to the efdType entry.

The administrativeState attribute of an efd object sets theconditions for forwarding the associated messages to theOMC-R manager.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : efd

Type : Id

Note : An efd object should be created in unlocked state.

efdType

Description : Type of the messages processed by the efd object.

Value range : [efdAlarm / efdConfiguration / efdObs / efdSpecificNotif /efdStateChange / efdTrace / efdClass]

An "efdAlarm" type object tallies alarm notifications issuedby the OMC-R agent.

An "efdConfiguration" type object tallies object create andset messages issued by the users and attribute valuechange messages issued by the BSC.

An "efdObs" type object tallies observation messagescollected by the OMC-R agent.

An "efdSpecificNotif" type object allows users to definesets of specific notification messages to process such asendOfArchival, endOfRestore, beginningOfBdeArchival,downloadEnd, endOfBdeArchival, endOfBdaBuiding,endOfMarkingConsultation, or endOfSoftwareChange.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

E 215

An "efdStateChange" type object tallies object state changenotifications.

An "efdTrace" type object tallies trace messages collectedby the OMC-R agent.

An "efdClass" type object tallies efd class objects creationand deletion messages. Thus these notifications enable toidentify the external managers which are being connectedto the MD-R.

Object : efd

Type : DP


egprsIrULActivation Class 3

Description : Whether the uplink incremental redundancy feature isenabled or disabled.


Object : bts


Type : DP

Checks : • [M] :Uplink incremental redundancy can not beactivated if EDGE feature is not activated onthe cell. Refer to the egprsServices entry inthis dictionary.

Release : V16

Note: This parameter is mandatory.

egprsServices Class 3

Description :

Activates EDGE in the cell. If ’1’, sets to ’1’ the EDGE presencebit in the GPRS CELL Options including BEP-PERIOD,EGPRS_PACKET_CHANNEL _REQUEST. If ’0’, sets to ’0’the EDGE presence bit in the GPRS Cell Options omittingBEP-PERIOD and EGPRS_PACKET_CHANNEL_REQUEST.

Valuerange :

Disabled (value 0); Enabled (value 1)

Object : bts


Defaultvalue :

0


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

Release : V15

emergencyCallPriority Class 3

Description : Index in the table allocPriorityTable for a TCH allocationrequest whose cause is "emergency call".



Object : bts

Default value : 17

Type : DP

emergencyCallRestricted Class 3

Description : Whether emergency calls from mobiles are authorized ina cell.

Value range : [not restricted / restricted]

• not restricted .....All emergency calls areaccepted whichever is themobile access class

• restricted

— Emergency calls are forbidden for mobiles withaccess classes 0 to 9

— For mobiles with access classes 11 to 15,emergency calls are forbidden for thosewhose classes are listed in the entries of thenotAllowedAccessClasses attribute

Object : bts

Default value : restricted

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

E 217

emergencyThreshold Class 3

Description : If the priority of a group call is equal or higher thanemergencyThreshold, a notification is periodically sent. Amobile station entering a cell where such a high prioritygroup call is ongoing is then notified.

Value range : [none, priority 4, priority 3, priority 2, priority 1, priority 0,priority B, priority A]none is the lowest prioritypriority 0 is recommended


Feature : ASCI

Default value : priority 0

Type : DP

Release : GSM-R V15

eMLPPThreshold Class 3

Description : Defines the minimum value that the eMLPP Precedenceof an incoming call must have to be taken into accountby the BSS with inband signalling (paging and vbs/vgcsassignment request).

Value range : [none / priority 4 / priority 3 / priority 2 / priority 1 / priority 0/ priority B / priority A]


Feature : ASCI (GSM-R V12)

Default value : none

Type : DP

Release : V12

enableRepeatedFacchFr Class 2

Description : Enables or disables the Repeated FACCH feature on AMRFR.

Value range : [disabled / FR 4.75 kbps / FR 5.9 and lower / FR 6.7 andlower]

Object : bts

Feature : Repeated Downlink FACCH

Default value : disabled (0)

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Notes : • The recommended value is FR 6.7 and lower.

• This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher.

Release : V16

encrypAlgoAsscomp Class 1

Description : Whether the "Chosen encryption algorithm" element isused in the ASSIGN COMPLETE messages (Phase IIcompliance).




Type : DP

Release : V8

encrypAlgoCiphModComp Class 1

Description : Whether the "Chosen encryption algorithm" element isused in the CIPHER MODE COMPLETE messages (PhaseII compliance).




Type : DP

Release : V8

encrypAlgoHoperf Class 1

Description : Whether the "Chosen encryption algorithm" element isused in the HANDOVER PERFORMED messages (PhaseII compliance).




Type : DP

Release : V8


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

E 219

encrypAlgoHoreq Class 1

Description : Whether the "Chosen encryption algorithm" element isused in the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGEmessages (Phase II compliance).




Type : DP

Release : V8

encryptionAlgorSupported Class 0

Description : For BSC 3000. Type of ciphering capability supportedby the BTSs of a BSS. When no ciphering capability issupported, users’ calls are not crypted.

Value range : • [none / gsmEncryptionV1]

Object : bsc


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:Only one type of ciphering capability isdefined.

Version : V15-V16

encryptionAlgorSupported Class 1

Description : For BSC 2G. Type of ciphering capability supported by theBTSs of a BSS. When no ciphering capability is supported,users’ calls are not crypted.

Value range : • [none / gsmEncryptionV1]

Object : bsc


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:Only one type of ciphering capability isdefined.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


end date

Description : To select call monitoring data recorded on that date andbefore. It is on or after beginning date.

Do not fill in if information produced to the end should bedisplayed.

Value range : [mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss]

Object : Call monitoring - Display (SDO)

Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:end date is on or after beginning date.

end date

Description : Date on which data were last recorded in the log (default isthe current date). It is on or after start date.

Date format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 1>.



Object : System session log - Filter

Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:end date is on or after start date.

end of probative Phase Type

Description : Whether the user validate or cancel the software changeafter new delivery activation.

Value range : [validate software change / cancel software change]

Object : bsc - End of probative phase

Type : DP

Release : V11

Note : This parameter only applies to BSC Upgrades withprototype BDA change (BSC Version Upgrade and BSCEdition Upgrade).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

E 221

end time

Description : Absolute time of final job run if the job is to be periodicallyrun over a limited period of time.

Absolute time format entry forms are detailed in NTP<130>.

If date matches the date in start time, fill in time with avalue after start time.


Object : job

Condition : To define when a job periodicity is defined and only if thejob life is limited (user’s choice).

Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:end time is after start time.

end time

Description : End of system log reading on the requested end date(default is 24:00).



Value range : [<time>]


Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:If end date and start date are identical, endtime is after start time.

endAlarmFilter

Description : Condition for ceasing the alarm when no counter isinvolved.

The fields that can be combined in the logical expressionare described under the startAlarmFilter entry in theDictionary.




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Condition : To define if no counter is associated with the criterion.

Type : DP

endAlarmThreshold

Description : Minimum counting value in the reference period,below which an end-of-alarm message is sent if thecorresponding start-of-alarm message was sent first. Thevalue must be checked by users.

This attribute defines a minimum value read at the end ofthe defined refPeriod.

It must be lower than startAlarmThreshold.

Threshold changes are effective when the OMC-R isrestarted.

Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646]

Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = "excessiveAnomalyRate"

Type : DP

endAlarmThreshold

Description : Minimum (thresholdLow) / maximum (thresh oldHigh)counting value in the reference period, above/below whichan end of "lower threshold/upper threshold" alarm messageis sent if the corresponding start-of-alarm message wassent first. The value must be checked by users.

If thesholdType is "thresholdLow", it defines a minimumvalue for a one minute reference period (or the countercollecting period for PCM unavailability counters), abovewhich the end of "lower threshold" alarm message is sent.It must be greater than startAlarmThreshold "low".

If thesholdType is "thresholdHigh", it defines a maximumvalue for a one minute reference period (or the countercollecting period for PCM unavailability counters), belowwhich the end of "upper threshold" alarm message is sent.It must be lower than startAlarmThreshold "high".


Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646]


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

E 223

Object : mdWarning if detectionFunction = "outOfRangeCounter"

Type : DP

Remark :

• The threshold limits depend on the associated counter.

• The BSS counter threshold crossing detectionmechanism is described in NTP < 07 >.

endCounterThreshold

Description : Maximum counting threshold when a counter is involved.



Condition : To define if a counter is associated with the criterion.

Type : DP

endSearchTime

Description : Absolute time to end searching for the observation reportsto cumulate. It is six hours before beginSearchTime at themost.

Observation data accumulating ends with the informationcontained in the first observation message collectedin the requested period of time. Refer to the partneredbeginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.


Object : Display custom report

Type DP

Checks : • [A]:endSearchTime is before beginSearchTime.

• [A]:The defined period is less than or equal to sixhours.

endSearchTime

Description : Absolute time to end searching for the observation report toedit (default is one hour before beginSearchTime).

The report displays the information contained in the lastobservation message generated in the requested periodof time. Refer to the partnered beginSearchTime entry inthe Dictionary.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.




Object : Display raw report

Type : DP


Note : If no permanent observation has been received within thespecified period, a message is displayed.

endSearchTime

Description : Absolute time to end searching for the available permanentobservations to list (default is twelve days beforebeginSearchTime).

The last listed report is the first observation reportgenerated in the requested period of time. Refer to thepartnered beginSearchTime entry in the Dictionary.



Object : List available permanent observations

Type : DP


endSearchTime





Object : List available temporary observations


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

E 225

Type : DP


endSearchTime





Type : DP


endSessionCriteriaDuration

Description : Definition of the criterion end a call path tracing session.

Value range : [5 to 1080] mins

Type : DP

Release : V11

endSessionCriteriaType

Description : Definition of the criterion that will end a call path tracingsession.

[duration / number (of calls) / oam (locking thecallPathTrace object)]

• duration .........endSessionCriteriaDuration= [5 to 1080] minutes

• number ..........endSessionCriteriaNbCall =[1 to 2500]

• oam ............administrativeState = "locked"

Value range :

Only one criterion is defined. When it is true, the callfollow-up session is stopped in the BSS. Refer to theusageState entry related to this object in the Dictionary.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

Checks : • [M] :The callPathTrace object is locked.

Note : The session is automatically restarted by unlocking theobject, regardless of the end-of-session criterion.

enhancedTRAUFrameIndication

Description : Whether the BTS uses the Enhanced TRAU Frame (EFT =executable Software) for TCU.

Value range : [notAvailable / available / active]

Object : bsc

Type : DI

Feature : PCM error correction (FM660 - V12)

Notes : • This attribute is set to "available" only if thetranscoderBoards of all the related TCUs are of TCB2board type and their software are V12.

• This attribute is set to "active" only if the pcmErrorCorrection attribute of one bts object related to the BSC isset to "1".

• Only BTSs equipped with non mixed DCU4 or DRXtransceiver architecture can support the EnhancedTRAU Frame.

Release : V12

enhCellTieringConfiguration

Description : This attribute allows to configure the cell tiering algorithm atBTS level instead of the cellTieringConfiguration attributefrom V14 release BSC.

This parameter is composed of the following fiveparameters:

pcwiHreqave: Averaging window size for PwCI

Value range: Int [0 to 16]

numberOfPcwiSamples: Minimum number of PwCIsamples required to reach a reliable distribution(representative of the real distribution in the whole cell) x1000

Value range: Int [0 to 60]


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

E 227

hoMarginTiering: Hysteresis between the uCirDLH andlCirDLH tiering thresholds to avoid ping-pong handovers,expressed in dB

Value range: Int [0 to 63] dB

selfTuningObs: Indicating that the bts is in charge ofsending PwCI distribution onto Abis interface

Value range: [notSentByBts / sentEveryTime /sentEveryHour]

nbLargeReuseDataChannels: Mean number of logicalchannels belonging to the large frequency reuse patternand used at the same time for data communications

Value range: Int [-16 to 16]


Type : DP

Available bits are the following:

Bit N: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Value X X 0 0 0 0 0 0

Note :

First bits (upper bits) indicate :

- All bits set to 0 = PwCI distribution is gathered if tieringis activated (intracell attribute) but not sent onto Abisinterface.

Checks : • [C/M] 522DI01:Only ten cells at OMC-R levelcan be observed with thismode

Checks : • [C/M] 522DI02:Only 40 cells at OMC-R levelcan be observed with thismode

Checks : • [C/M] 522CO01:Bit six and seven can not beset at the same time

Checks : • [C/M] 522CO02:All the handoverControl objectinstances of the OMC-R musthave the same value for theselfTuningObs field when a bitis different from 0


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Note : The bit numbers 0 to 5 (six lower bits) are reserved forfuture use.



Release : V14

equipment identity

Description : This parameter is composed of the bts equipment nameand the equipment processor number parameters. Referto these entries in the Dictionary.

Object : mdWarning (create)

Type : DP

Release : V11

Note : During the command "create mdWarning", the operator candefine either "equipment identity" or "processor identity",but not both.

equipment processor number

Description : To select a processor or an equipment in the preselectedtype

Consult the corresponding notification messages("Equipment number" field).

Do not fill in if neither bsc equipment name nor btsequipment name is defined or if this criterion is not to beselected.



Type : DP

error concealment unit Class 2

Description : Whether the Error Concealment Unit (ECU) is used. TheECU provides a voice quality improvement on the uplink inbad radio propagation conditions.

Value range : [not used, used]

Object : bts



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

E 229

Type : DP

Release : V11

errorCorrectionMethod Class 3

Description : Type of correction method used on the A interface.

Value range : [basicRetr (only value accepted) / prevCyclRetr]


Default value : basicRetr

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The only accepted value is 1"basicRetr".


estimatedSiteLoad Class 3

Description : This parameter is used

• at site creation, in order to preset the Erlangconsumption of the new Cell Group

• otherwise, in order to set the Erlang consumption ofa site to a value either less or greater than the onecalculated using the ERLANG_PER_N_TRX_CELLtable



Default value : 0 (the consumption is then calculated using theERLANG_PER_N_TRX_CELL table)

Type : DP

Release : V15

exclusive interval of codano

Description : To select messages according to their fault number.

The filter can contain one (or several) intervals defining thefault numbers not to be retrieved. For example, interval5~8 enables to retrieve ALL the fault numbers except faultnumbers 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Value range : [0 to 65535 - 0 to 65535]



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

Release : V12

exclusive list of codano

Description : To select messages that do not contain one (or several)given fault number(s).



Type : DP

Release : V12

executableSoftware

Description : An instance of this managed object class is used torepresent a unit of software that is separately identifiableand is ready to be used by the system.



Type : DP

executableSoftwareId

Description : Identifier of a ’executableSoftware’ object class. Thisidentifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation, if notgiven by the Manager. This attribute cannot be modified.



Type : Id

Release : V13

executableSoftwareName

Description : Name of a software version. This attribute is allocated bythe MD-R at object creation, if not given by the Manager.This attribute cannot be modified.

Value range : [9 to 12] String


Type : DP

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

E 231

extCommsInt

State of the X.25 links set up from the BSC chain X.25ports [working / fault]. Each port is identified with regard tothe mother SICX board:

• working .........The X.25 link is correctlyinitialized.

Description :

• fault ............An error was detected (SLSboard faulty, etc.).



Type : DD


extended cell Class 2

Description : Whether the cell is extended (up to 120 km large) or not.

The cell working mode governs the upper limit of thefollowing attribute values (refer to theses entries in theDictionary):

• callClearing, msRangeMax, and rndAccTimAdvThreshold attributes of the bts object

• concentAlgoExtMsRange and concentAlgoIntMsRange attributes of the associated handOverControl objectif the bts object describes a concentric cell

Value range : [true (extended) / false (normal)]

Object : bts


Type : DP

• [M]:If the attribute is changed to "true" and aCBCH is defined for the cell, this channelis carried by a radio time slot with an evenidentifier number. Refer to the channelTypeentry in the Dictionary.

Checks :

• [M]:It is not possible to unlock a BTS that has itsextendedCell parameter set to true if the siteis running software from one of Dual TDMADLUs.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Release : V9

Note : In that mode, the radio time slots with odd identifiernumbers are unknown to the BSC and the diversityfunctionality is not available in the cells.

extendedTimingAdvanceWindow

Description :

This parameter is used to control the Extended Timing AdvanceWindow feature.

Valuerange :

[disabled / enabled]

Object : bts

Defaultvalue :

disabled

Type : DP

Checks: • [M]:It is not possible to unlock a BTS that has itsextendedTimingAdvanceWindow parameter set todisabled if the site is running software from one of DualTDMA DLUs.

Release : V16

Note : The recommended value is enabled.

The feature will be enabled/disabled for all the TRXs of a given cell.

external alarm configuration Class 2

Description : Configuration of the external alarm loops controlled by aBTS. Alarm loop "n" is monitored (not monitored) when thenth bit is set to 1 (0) in the binary field. The alarm mask isimmediately displayed in the hexadecimal field just below.The alarm mask can be set using the hexadecimal field aswell as the binary field.

The number of connectors per alarm board depends on thetype of the alarm boards installed in the BTS.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

E 233

BTS Type of board Number of protectedexternal alarms

per cabinet

S2000 ALATO 4

S2000H/L SBCF 6

S4000 Indoor ALAT 4

S4000 Outdoor ALATO 4

S4000 Smart ALATO 4

S8000 ALCORECAL (CBCF)

16

S12000 ALCORECAL (CBCF)

16

BTS 18000 ABM 16

BTS 6000 (Seenote below.)

ABM/RICAM 8

The correspondence between those 48 bits and theexternal alarms of each site directly depends on threefactors: the type of BTS, the number of cabinets, and theconvention for numbering those cabinets.

• S4000:24 external alarms max., 6cabinets - 4 externals alarmsper cabinet. Therefore 4 bits bycabinets placed on the mask onthe same order of the numberingof the cabinets.Example: to unmask all theexternal alarms of S4000 IndoorS22 the alarm mask would be:

• S8000/S12000/BTS 18000:

48 external alarms max., up to 3cabinets in the future - 16 alarmsper cabinet (16 bits per cabinet).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• BTS 600024 external alarms max., up to 3cabinets - 8 alarms per cabinet (8bits per cabinet).

• S2000H/L:18 external alarms max., up to 3cabinets in the future - 6 alarmsper cabinet (6 bits per cabinet).

Value range : [48-bit register]


Default value : 48 bits equal to "0"

Type : DP

Note : If RICAM/ICAM is used instead in the BCF, the reducedconnectivity leads to limitations in terms of ABMs. Then interm of total alarms:

• BTS18000 with RICAM/ICAM max. configurationincludes one full main cab + one half ext cab, that is 1RICAM + 2 ABMs, so 24 DALE max.

• BT6000 with RICAM/ICAM max. configuration includesone main cab + one ext cab, that is 1 RICAM+ 1 ABM,so 16 DALE max.

Release : V9

external battery cabinet Class 2

Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment "ancillarybattery cabinet" in S8000 Outdoor.

Value range : [Present / Absent]


Type : DP

Release : V9

externalTime

Description : Current OMC-R agent date and time.

Absolute time format entry forms are detailedin NTP < 130 >.


Object : md

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

F 235

Remark : Setting this attribute does not change the time displayed inthe system "Session informations" window which refers tothe workstation internal clock.

Note : This parameter cannot be modified.

extUtbfNoData Class 3

Description : When this Extended UL TBF sub-feature is enabled,it makes possible that MSs do not send Packet UplinkDummy Control Block during periods of inactivity.


Object : bts


Type : DP

Feature : Extended UL TBF

Release : V15

FfacchPowerOffset Class 2

Description : Power offset that applies to FACCH signalling

Value range : [0..10]; step = 2

Object : bts

Type : DP

Feature : Tx power offset for signalling channels

Default value : 0 (no power offset)

Note : This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher.

Release : V16

Family

Description : Family of counters in which are chosen the counters to beobserved.

The list of the available families depends on the Observedobject class and the observation type selected in thereport template definition of the observation. See Tableshereafter.

Value range : [See tables below]


Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Checks : • [M] :Family is used to include counters inobservation report. Family is not saved withthe report template as it is reset every timethe template editor is open. Counters fromdifferent families can be included in the samereport template.

Observed object: bsc

Observation real time(ORT)

A interface, synthetic

Observation fast statistic(OFS)

A interface, OMC interfaceReleases of communicationsin signaling phase, Channelmode, ASCI, NONE, BSC3G, synthetic

Observed object: bts


SDCCH allocations,Intra-bss handovers,Inter-bss handovers,TCH allocations,Establishment,Global handovers


SDCCH allocations,TCH allocations,Channel mode,Inter-bss handovers,Intra-bss handovers,Intra-cell handovers,Dedicated channelassignment,Global handovers,Establishment,Releases of communicationsin signaling phase,Releases of communicationsin traffic phase,Layer One Management,Interferences, Directed retry,SMS, Abis Level 2, ASCI,NONE, GPRS, AMR, EDGE,WPS, synthetic

Observed object : transceiverZone


SDCCH allocations onTrZone TCH allocations onTrZone


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

F 237


SDCCH allocations onTrZone,TCH allocations on TrZone,Layer One Management onTrZone,GPRS on TrZone,AMR on TrZone, EDGE,WPS

Observed object : transceiverEquipment


----------------------


----------------------

Observed object : btsSiteManager


----------------------


BSC 3G - Abis Level 1

Observed object : pcmCircuit


-----------------------


PCM/synthetic

Observed object : adjacentCellHandOver


---------------------


Neighbor cells, AMR

Observed object : omu


-----------------------


BSC 3G

Observed object : tmu


-----------------------


BSC 3G

Observed object : cc


-----------------------


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



BSC 3G

Observed object : cem


-----------------------


BSC 3G

Observed object : pcmPort


----------------------


BSC 3G - PcmPort

Observed object : signalingLink


----------------------


----------------------

Observed object : channel


----------------------


----------------------

faultNumber

Description : To select messages with a given fault number.

This parameter is a component of the specific problemsfilter. Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.



Type : DP

fERThreshold1 Class 3

Description : Lowest threshold taken into account for Frame ErasureRate (FER) evaluation.

Object : bts

Value range : [0 to 100], steps of 0.1 %

Type : DP



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

F 239

Default value : 0


Checks : • [C/M]:Following rule applies: fERThreshold1 <=fERThreshold2 <= fERThreshold3 <=fERThreshold4

The purpose of this semantic check is to checkcoherency between FER thresholds.

Release : V15


Description : Second threshold taken into account for FER evaluation.

Object : bts


Type : DP


Default value : 0


Checks : • [C/M]:Following rule applies: fERThreshold1<= fERThreshold2 <= fERThreshold3 <=fERThreshold4


Release :V15


Description : Third threshold taken into account for FER evaluation.

Object : bts


Type : DP


Default value : 0



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.




Release : V15


Description : Highest threshold taken into account for FER evaluation.

Object : bts


Type : DP


Default value : 0




Release : V15

fhsRef Class 2

Description : Identifier of the frequencyHoppingSystem object thatdefines the frequency hopping management parametersfor the radio time slot.

Setting this attribute and the maio attribute allows the timeslot to obey frequency hopping laws.


Object : channel

Condition : To define if the time slot hops in frequencies.

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:This attribute is undefined if frequencyhopping is not allowed for the parent btsobject (btsIsHopping = "no hopping") orthe channelType of the channel object is"mainBCCH", "mainBCCHCombined", or"bcchSdcch4CBCH".


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

F 241

• [C/M]:If the attribute is defined, the following ischecked:

• The maio attribute is also defined.

• The referenced frequencyHoppingSystem object iscreated for the parent bts object.

• Each frequency occurs once in the mobileAllocation list and is allotted in the cellAllocation list of theparent bts object.

• The number of frequencies in the mobileAllocationlist is greater than the maio attribute value.

• Concentric cell: The frequencies in themobileAllocation list are not used in thezone to which the parent transceiver object doesnot belong.

filteredTrafficCoefficient Class 3

Description : Filter coefficient which is taken into account in the cell loadevaluation.

Object : bts

Value range : [0 to 1, by step of 0.001]

Type : DP

Feature : AMR based on traffic

Default value : 0

Release : V15

floor

Description : Floor number which identifies the localization in a building.

Value range : [1 to 2 characters]

Object : transcoder, controlNode, interfaceNode, hardwaretranscoder 3G.

Type : DD

flowControlMaxDelay

Description : This attribute specifies the maximum time interval betweentwo consecutive FLOW-CONTROL-MS messages sent tothe SGSN.


Object : pcusn


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Default value : 300

Type : DP

Release : V14

flowControlMaxRate

Description : This attribute specifies the minimum interval betweensending consecutive Flow-Control PDU for a given BVCor for a MS. It represents the C timer in the ETSI GPRSspecifications.

Value range : [1001 to 9999] ms

Object : pcusn

Default value : 2000

Type : DP

Release : V14

fnOffset class 2

Description : Allows to specify and control Frame Number(FN) difference between BTSs in case of networksynchronization by GPS.

Refer also to the tnOffset entry in this dictionary.



Type : DP


Default value : 0

Release : V15


forced handover algo Class 3

Description : Minimum signal strength level received by the mobilesto be granted access to a neighbor cell in case of forcedhandover.

Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ..., -49 to -48, more than -48]dB


Default value : less than -110


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

F 243

Type : DP

Release : V9

frAmrPriority Class 2

Description : This attribute defines the AMR FR priority of a TDMA.

This attribute is modified only if the corresponding ’bts’object instance is locked (objectMustBeLockedError).

Value range : Int [0 to 2]Priority 0 is given to a high priority TDMAPriority 1 is given to a low priority TDMAPriority 2 disables this service on the TDMA


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V14


frequencyHoppingSystem

Description : Identifier of a frequencyHoppingSystem object that definesfrequency hopping management parameters for radio timeslots that obey frequency hopping laws. A bts object mayreference up to sixty-four objects of this type.

Refer to the hoppingSequenceNumber andmobileAllocation entries in the Dictionary.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : frequencyHoppingSystem

Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The associated bts object is created and thefrequencyHoppingSystem object is not createdfor that object.

• [C]:The number of frequencyHoppingSystemobjects created for a bts object is limited tosixty-four.


• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.

• [M/D]:The frequencyHoppingSystem object iscreated.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



• [D]:No channel object dependent on the bts objectrefers to the frequencyHoppingSystem object(fhsRef attribute).

frPowerControlTargetMode Class 3

Description : This attribute defines the target codec mode for AMR FRpower control.



This attribute is modified if the ’powerControl’ objectinstance is unlocked.

Value range : [FR 12.2 / FR 10.2 / FR 6.7 / FR 5.9 / FR 4.75]


Default value : FR 12.2

Type : DP

Release : V14


frPowerControlTargetModeDl Class 3

Description : Downlink AMR codec target used to define the downlinkpower control threshold for FR AMR calls.

Value range : [FR 12.2 / FR 10.2 / FR 6.7 / FR 5.9 / FR 4.75]



Default value : FR 12.2

Type : DP

Notes : This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher.

Release : V16

fullDlKa Class 3

Description : Whether the Full DL Keep Active feature is enabled or not.

This feature allows MSs that operate in a non-extended ULTBF mode to increase their uplink throughput.


Object : bts


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

G 245



Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The following flag combination is prohibited:nwExtUtbf = enabled and fullDlKa =disabled

Release : V15

Ggeographical coordinates

Description : Definition of the geographical coordinates of the equipmentin the network.

These coordinates are defined by a latitude and alongitude, each expressed by four fields.

Value range : Latitude is expressed by the four following fields:

• Deg Lat ..........[0 to 90] degrees

• Min Lat ..........[0 to 59] minutes

• Hundreth of sec Lat........

[0 to 5999] hundredth second

• Direction Lat ....[North / South]

Longitude is expressed by the four following fields:

• Deg Lon ..........[0 to 180] degrees

• Min Lon ..........[0 to 59] minutes

• Hundreth of sec Lon........


• Direction Lon ....[East / West]

Object : bscbtsSiteManagermdtranscoder

Type : DI

Release : V11


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


geographical coordinates

Description : Definition of the geographical coordinates of the pcuSNequipment in the network.

These coordinates are defined by a latitude and alongitude, each expressed by four fields.

Value range : Latitude is expressed by the four following fields:

• Deg Lat ..........[0 to 90] degrees

• Min Lat ..........[0 to 59] minutes

• Hundreth of sec Lat...........


• Direction Lat ....[North / South]

Longitude is expressed by the four following fields:

• Deg Lon ..........[0 to 180] degrees

• Min Lon ..........[0 to 59] minutes

• Hundreth of sec Lon...........


• Direction Lon ....[East / West]

Object : pcu, pcusn


Type : DI

Release : V12

gprsAvgParam Class 3

Description : This parameter is composed of the following attributes:

• nAvgI

• nAvgT

• nAvgW

Refer to these entries in this dictionary.

Release : V12

gprsCellActivation Class 3

Description : This is a Flag used to activate the GPRS at cell level.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

G 247

Object : bts



Type : DP

Release : V12

gprsNetworkModeOperation Class 3

Description : Indicates the network mode of operation.

Value range : [0..2] with:

• 0 = NMO II

• 1 = NMO I (recommended value, activates the featurefrom the MSs point of view)

• 2 = NMO III (forbidden in this release)

Object : bts

Feature : GPRS (TF1134 - NMO I)

Default value : 0 (NMO II)

Type : DP

Release : V15

gprsPcuCrossConnectList Class 2

Description : This parameter is a list of pairs of the following attributes:

• pcmNbr

• nbrTch

Refer to these entries in this dictionary.

Value range : BSC 12000HC: [0 to 12] pairs of [pcmNbr, nbrTch],BSC 3000 V15: [0 to 24] pairs of [pcmNbr, nbrTch]BSC 3000 V16, E1 PCM: [0 to 32] pairs of [pcmNbr,nbrTch]BSC 3000 V16, T1 PCM: [0 to 36] pairs of [pcmNbr,nbrTch]

Feature : PCUSN - more than 12 Agprs PCMs per BSC (18749)

Release : V12


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


gprsPcuLockExtendedConf Class 2


• dynamicAgprsAllowed

• agprsTSharingProtection

Refer to these entries in this Dictionary.

Default value : [disabled / 0]

Release : V12

gprsPermittedAccess Class 3

Description : It defines the Routing Area Color (3-bit length) of the cell.If the MS receives different values of the Routing AreaColor field in two different cells, it shall interpret the cellre-selection information as if the two cells belonged todifferent RA.


Object : bts

Default value : 0


Type : DP

Release : V12

gprsPreemption Class 3

Description : Set to yes, it allows the PCU to refuse GSM preemptionover shared GSM/GPRS TS if GPRS resources are notsufficient to ensure the minimum bandwidth for each MS.

In the case of lack of GSM radio TS, the BSC has toallocate one shared GSM/GPRS radio TS to GSM anda preemption procedure is started. When one sharedradio TS temporarily allocated to GSM is released (endof GSM allocation due to end of call or handover), thena reallocation procedure is started to increase the GPRScapacity.

Value range : [yes / no]

Object : bts

Feature : GPRS (TF1121 - V12)

Default value : yes


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

G 249

Type : DP

Release : V12

gprsPreemptionProtection Class 3

Description : Protection timer used by the BSC in order to reduce theload in case of PCU TDMA TS Status Nack messagereception during a preemption procedure. This message issent by the PCU.

Value range : [1 to 60] second(s)

Object : bts


Default value : 10

Type : DP

Release : V12

gprsPriority Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf)

Description : Priorities affected to the TDMA.

Priority affected to the TDMA when allocating packetresources.

Value range : [p1 or p2 (high GPRS priority)]


Default value : p1


Type : DP

Release : V12

gprsState

Description : Reserved for future use.

Object : bts (cell)

Type : DD

Release : V15

gprsState




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DD

Release : V15

gprsTimerWaitPUAM Class 3

Description : Waiting timer for the reception of the uplink assignmentafter sending a PACKET RESOURCE REQUESTmessage.

This timer is used on the MS side to define when to stopwaiting for Packet Uplink Assignment Message aftersending of a PACKET RESOURCE REQUEST message

Value range : [500ms, 1s, 2s, 4s]

Object : bts

Default value : 0.5 s


Type : DP

Release : V12

Note : These parameters are applicable for BSS V12 and V14only.

gprsTimerWaitRLC Class 3

Description : Waiting timer for release of the TBF after reception of thefinal block.

This timer is used on the MS side to define when the MShas received all the RLC data blocks. When the timerexpires the MS releases the resources associated with theTBF and begins to monitor its paging.

Value range : [500ms, 1s, 2s, 4s]

Object : bts

Default value : 0 s


Type : DP

Release : V12

Note : These parameters are applicable for BSS V12 and V14only.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

G 251

gsmToUmtsReselection Class 3

Description : Attribute specifiedto implementL1M features onPowerControl.This spareparameter isused to transit theattribute.

gsmToUmtsReselection iscomposed of 4parameters:

• UMTS Accessmin level

• UMTS reselection ARFCN

• UMTS reselection offset

• UMTS searchmin level

Default value : no

Object : bts

Type : DP

Checks: • [C/M]:UMTS reselection ARFCN of theattribute gsmToUmtsReselectionaccept 0 (feature not activated) orfrequencies must be in bands:

• band I (UMTS 2000): 10562 to10838

• band II (UMTS 1900): 9662 to9938 and 412, 437, 462, 487,512, 537, 562, 587, 612, 637,662, 687

• band III (UMTS 1800): 1162 to1513

• band IV: (UMTS 1700/2100):1537 to 1738 and 1887, 1912,1937, 1962, 1987, 2012, 2037,2062, 2087


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• band V (UMTS 850): 4357 to4458 and 1007, 1012, 1032,1037, 1062, 1087

• band VI (UMTS 800): 4387 to4413 and 1037, 1062

• band VII (UMTS 2600): 2237to 2563 and 2587, 2612, 2637,2662, 2687, 2712, 2737, 2762,2787, 2812, 2837, 2862, 2887,2912

• band VIII (UMTS 900): 2937 to3088

• band IX: (UMTS 1700): 9237 to9387

Release : V14

Description: Allows the customer to set a value that theBSC uses when the MSC does not provideoptional service handover information inASSIGN_REQUEST or HANDOVER_REQUESTmessages

Value range: 0: should;1: should not; 2: shall not;3:gsmToUMTSHoDisabled (always takesprecedence over the MSC value)

Object: bsc

Default value: 3

Type: DP

Checks:

Release: V17

Note: This parameter is available only for BSC 3000.

This parameter is optional.

HhandOver from signalling channel Class 3

Description : Authorization to perform intercell handovers on signallingchannels (SDCCH or TCH in signalling mode).





411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

H 253

Type : DP

Remark : The attribute was named TCH and sDCCHHandOver onthe V8 OMC-R MMI.

handOverControl

Description : Identifier of a handOverControl object that defineshandover management parameters in a cell. A bts objectmay reference one and only one object of this type.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The associated bts object is created andthe handOverControl object is not createdfor that object.

• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked. If class2 attributes are modified, the associated btsobject is locked.

• [C/D]:If the application database of the relatedBSC is built, the parent bsc object isunlocked and the associated bts object islocked.

• [M/D]:The handOverControl object is created.

• [D]:The associated bts object is not referenced,except by a powerControl object.

• [D]:If the application database of the relatedBSC is not built, it has been reset by an Offline reset BDA command.

hardware configuration Class 2

Description : Type of architecture used in the transceiverEquipment.This parameter flags the TRX in HPRM, RM, MPRM orHPRM3T in the BTS 18000.

Value range : • [Dcu2 / Dcu4 / Drx / Rm / Hprm / Mrm / Other] for BSCV15

• [Dcu2 / Dcu4 / Drx / Rm / Hprm / Mprm / HPRM3T /Other] for BSC V16 and subsequent releases


Feature : BTS 18000 introduction, BTS 18000 HPRM, differentiationof the BTS 18000 RMs with power transmit level of 40Watts, and BTS 18000 HPRM3T differentiation at theOMC-R


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:Checks that the default value is not lefton BTS 18000. In case of BTS 18000(btsModel = 910, 911, 900, 901), checksat unlock transceiverEquipment that itsHardwareConfiguration is different from“DRX”, “DCU2”, “DCU4”.

Checks: • [M]:Checks that the default value is not lefton BTS 6000 or BTS 18000. In caseof BTS 6000 or BTS 18000 (btsModel= 910, 911, 900, 901), checks atunlock transceiverEquipment that itsHardwareConfiguration is one of thefollowing “DCU2”, “DCU4”. or "DRX"

• [M]:Checks that default value is set on otherBTS than BTS 18000. In case of BTSdifferent from BTS 18000 (btsModel =910, 911, 900, 901), this checks at unlocktransceiverEquipment that its HardwareConfiguration is different from Rm, Hprm,Mprm, Hprm3t or Other.

• [M]:Checks that default value is set on otherBTS than BTS 6000 or BTS 18000. In caseof BTS different from BTS 6000 or BTS18000 (btsModel = 910, 911, 900, 901), thischecks at unlock transceiverEquipment thatits Hardware Configuration is different fromRm, Hprm, Mprm, Hprm3t or Other.

• [M]:Consistency inside an RM definition. Incase of BTS 18000 (btsModel = 910,911, 900, 901), this checks at unlocktransceiverEquipment that its hardwareconfiguration is the same as the otherunlocked transceiver equipment of the sameRM.

• [M]:Consistency inside an RM definition. In caseof BTS 6000 or BTS 18000 (btsModel =910, 911, 900, 901), this checks at unlocktransceiverEquipment that its hardwareconfiguration is the same as the otherunlocked transceiver equipment of the sameRM.

• [M]:Software Reference coherency inside anRM. Existing check that must be run afterprevious checks.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

H 255

Release : V11

Note : The value MRM is not supported. The value HPRM3T onlyapplies to BSC 3000.

hardwareRef Class 2

Description : Hardware reference of a site BCF. Check BSS upgrade file.



Type : DP

hardwareRef Class 2

Description : Hardware reference of a TRX/DRX. Check BSS upgradefile. When a TRX is a DCU4 or a DRX (S2000, S8000,S12000, E-cell), the hardware reference field of thetransceiver equipment object must be equal to 0.



Type : DP

hardwareRef Class 2

Description : Hardware reference of a TCB. Check BSS upgrade file.



Type : DP

hexa text

Description : Transcription in hexadecimal of the contents of a shortmessage.

The content of the hexa text parameter is displayed whenusing the command Display hexa. It cannot be modified bythe user. Only the content of the text parameter is modifiedby the user.

Refer to the text (short message) entry in the Dictionary.

Value range : [chain of characters]

Object : short message - Display hexa

Type : DI

Release : V12


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


highSpeedUplinkDistortionRemoval

Description : To control the high speed uplink distortion removal; whenenabled, some uplink distortion caused by high speedmobiles will be removed by the BTS.


Object : bts


Type : DP

hoMargin Class 3

Description : A margin to use for PBGT handovers to avoid subsequenthandover, in PBGT formula.



Default value : 4

Type : DP

hoMarginAMR Class 3

Description : This attribute defines the handover margin linked to AMRquality handover.

This attribute is modified if the ’adjacentCellHandOver’object instance is unlocked.



Default value : -2

Type : DP

Release : V14

hoMarginBeg Class 3

Description : Margin to be added to hoMargin until rxLevHreqave forearly handover mechanism in order to compensate the lackof measurements.

This parameter is coupled with hoMargin andrxLevHreqaveBeg.

Value range : [0..63] dB

Object : bts

Default value : 4


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

H 257

Type : DP

Checks : • [M] :This parameter is inhibited when set to 63 dB.

Note : This parameter shall be set such as hoMargin≤hoMargin+hoMarginBeg or hoMarginBeg≥0

This parameter is not available for DCU2.

Release : V11

hoMarginDist Class 3

Description : Margin to be used for Distance Handovers.



Default value : -24 dB

Type : DP

Release : V8

hoMarginRxLev Class 3

Description : Margin to be used for signal strength Handovers.




Type : DP

Release : V8

hoMarginRxQual Class 3

Description : The margin is used for Signal Quality Handovers.




Type : DP

Release : V8


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


hoMarginTiering Class 3

Description : Hysteresis between the uPwCIDLH and lPwCIDLHtiering thresholds to avoid ping-pong handovers(expressed in dB). This attribute allows to configure theCellTieringConfiguration at bts level.

Note : CellTiering mode must be activated.





Type : DP

Release : V12

hoMarginTrafficOffset Class 3

Description : Minimum signal strength margin with the serving cellallowing the best neighbor cell selection when a handoveris triggered for overload reasons.



Feature : Handover for traffic reasons (TF132 - V12)


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:This attribute must be in the range [0 63].

• [C/M]:When set to "0", the handovers for trafficreasons are not allowed in the adjacent cell.

Release : V12

Note : This attribute only applies to BTSs equipped with nonmixed DCU4 or DRX boards.

hoPingpongCombination Class 3

Description : Two causes (HOInitialCause and HONonEssentialCause),indicating the causes of ping-pong handovers inoverlapping areas.

The following causes are defined with regard to theneighboring cell:


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

H 259

• HOInitialCause indicates the essential handovercause which leads to enter the neighbor cell (cause ofincoming handover).

• HONonEssentialCause indicates the non-essentialhandover cause which leads to leave the cell (cause ofoutgoing handover).

This parameter defines the combination for which thehoPingpongTimeRejection attribute is used.

Value range : [rxQual, rxLev, distance, powerBudget, capture,directedRetry, OaM, traffic, all, allCapture, allPowerBudget,AMRquality]


Feature : General protection against ping-pong handovers(TF821-V12)

Type : DP


[M]: Check that all the values of ’HOPingpongCombination’ attribute must be different.This element checks for non duplications ofHOPingpongCombination values

Notes : • allCapture cause (only applying to HONonEssentialCause)matches the capture cause for all the micro-cellsbelonging to the current macro-cell . This cause hasto be used in order to prevent ping-pong handoversbetween micro- and macro-layers.

• allPowerBudget cause (only applying to HONonEssentialCause) matches the powerBudget cause for allthe neighboring cells of the current cell. This cause isused in order to restore the "Minimum time betweenhandovers" (feature TF218).

Release : V12


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


hoPingpongTimeRejection Class 3

Description : Time before a new handover attempt is triggered.

Refer to bsc object timeBetweenHOConfiguration and btsobject bts time between HO configuration attributes inthis Dictionary of Parameters for this timer activation.

Refer to adjacentCellHandOver object hoPingpongCombination attribute in this Dictionary of Parameters for thecombinations for which this timer applies.

To avoid ping-pong handovers this new timer is startedafter a successful handover. Up to the expiration of thistimer, the receipt of HANDOVER INDICATION messageis ignored.

Value range : [0 to 60] s


Feature : General protection against ping-pong handovers(TF821-V12).

Default value : [30 sec]

Release : V12

Description: Time before a new handover attempt to UMTS can betriggered

Value range: 0...60 seconds (0 means immediately)

Object: adjacentCellUTRAN

Default value: 30s

Type: DP

Checks:

Release: V17


hoppingSequenceNumber Class 2

Description : Hopping sequence number used by a radio time slot whichobeys frequency hopping laws.

Select different HSNs for nearby cells that use the sameset of frequencies.




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

H 261

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:If the frequencyHoppingSystem object isreferenced by a channel object (fhsRefattribute defined), the parent bsc object isunlocked and the associated bts object islocked.

hoSecondBestCellConfiguration Class 3

Description : Number of neighbor cells in which the BSC immediatelyattempts to perform a new handover when the previoushandover attempt failed with return to the old channel.

Giving the attribute a value greater than 2 allows the BSCto renew the handover request without waiting for a newset of radio measurements (the first attempt is included inthis count). The same list of neighbor eligible cells is usedto process the request (no new list is provided by the BTS).


Object : bsc

Default value : 3

Type : DP

Release : V9

hoTraffic Class 3

Description : Whether handovers for traffic reasons at bsc level areallowed.


Object : bsc



Type : DP

Release : V12

Note : Enabling this parameter allows the related BTSs with DCU4or DRX transceiver architecture handle handovers for trafficreasons.

hoTraffic Class 3

Description : Whether handovers for traffic reasons at bts level areallowed.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : bts



Type : DP

Release : V12

Note : This attribute is only available for DCU4 or DRX transceiverarchitecture.

hrAmrPriority Class 2

Description : This attribute defines the AMR HR priority of a TDMA.



This attribute can be modified only if the corresponding ’bts’object instance is locked (objectMustBeLockedError).

Value range : [0 to 2]Priority 0 is given to a high priority TDMAPriority 1 is given to a low priority TDMAPriority 2 disables this service on the TDMA


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V14


hrCellLoadEnd Class 3

Description : This attribute defines the cell load threshold used for AMRFR/HR decision.



This attribute can only be modified if the ’bts’ objectinstance is unlocked.


Object : bts

Default value : 0


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

H 263

Type : DP

Checks : • 0570CO01 - hrCellLoadEnd <= hrCellLoadStart

Release : V14


hrCellLoadStart Class 3

Description : This attribute is used to trigger the beginning of AMR HRallocation in the cell.




In this version, this parameter has the following meaning:

• if HRCellLoadStart is equal to 0, then a FR radiochannel is always allocated to the MS,

• if HRCellLoadStart is greater than 0, then a HR radiochannel is allocated to the MS, according to its radioconditions.


Object : bts

Default value : 100

Type : DP

Checks : • 0570CO01 - hrCellLoadEnd <= hrCellLoadStart

Release : V14


hrPowerControlTargetMode Class 3

Description : This attribute defines the target codec mode for AMR HRpower control.




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


This attribute can only be modified if the ’powerControl’object instance is unlocked.

Value range : [HR 7.4 / HR 6.7 / HR 5.9 / HR4.75]


Default value : HR 7.4

Type : DP

Release : V14


hrPowerControlTargetModeDl Class 3

Description : Downlink AMR codec target used to define the downlinkpower control threshold for HR AMR calls.

Value range : [HR 7.4 / HR 6.7 / HR 5.9 / HR 4.75]

Object : PowerControl

Type : DP


Default value : HR 7.4


Release : V16

Iidentifier

Description : Name of a BSS software application followed by its versionnumber.

Refer to the executableSoftware entry related to thesoftware object in the Dictionary where the name formatsare explained.

Value range : [XXXabcdef]


Type : DD


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

I 265

identifier

Description : Name of a BSC database configuration file followed by itsversion number.

Refer to the executableSoftware entry related to thesoftware object in the Dictionary where the name formatsare explained.

Value range : [BSxabvcdefgh]


Type : DD

identifier

Description : Name of a BSC database configuration file followed by itsversion number.

Refer to the eft entry related to the software object in theDictionary where the name formats are explained.

Value range : [BSxabvcdefgh]


Type : DD

identifier

Description : Identifier of a short message. It allows MSs to identify theshort message and discard it if already received.



Type : DD

iem

Description : The Interface Electronic Module, is part of the LSA RC(Low Speed Access Resource Complex) module.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : iem

Type : DP

Note : It is possible for this parameter to take on an infinite value.

• If so, it the time will not expire and there will be noautomatic logout procedure.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


iemId

Description : Identifier of the ’iem’ object class. This identifier is allocatedby the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf andslot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000 and TCU3000.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : iem

Type : DP

Release : V13

iMSIAttachDetach Class 2

Description : Whether MS attachment/detachment is allowed. Allowingenables the system to take into account temporary MSabsence to prevent unsuccessful call attempts.


Object : bts

Default value : allowed

Type : DP

in

Description : The Interface Node, which provides the networkconnectivity through PCM trunk or higher speed interfaces(OC-3 - Optical Carrier level 3 - or STM-1 - SynchronousTransport level 1) as well as the time switching capability.



Type : DP

inactivity timeout

Description : Maximum time between two user commands, over whichthe system induces an automatic logout procedure.

Value range : [2 to 2147483646] (5) minute


Type : DP

Remark : Moving the mouse inside an MMI window on the terminalscreen resets the counter.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

I 267

inclusive interval of codano

Description : To select messages according to their fault number. Thefiltering list can contain one (or several) interval(s).

For example, interval 5~8 enables to retrieve fault numbers15, 6, 7, and 8.


Value range : [0 to 65535 - 0 to 65535]


Type : DP

Release : V12

inclusive list of codano

Description : To select messages according to their fault number. Thefilter can contain one (or several) fault number(s).




Type : DP

Release : V12

incomingHandOver Class 3

Description : Whether incoming handovers are allowed in a cell.




Type : DP

inhibitRequest

Description : Whether the SS7 channel is inhibited.


Object : signallingLink - Set inhibit

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Checks : • [M]:The parent bsc object and the signallingLinkobject are unlocked.

Remark : An inhibit request may have no immediate effect andcan even be refused. Run a Display all command on thesignallingLink object to display the resource state of theSS7 channel and check that the system has applied therequest (signallingLinkResState).

inId

Description : Identifier of an ’ in’ object class. This identifier is allocatedby the MD-R at object creation. The only value allocated bythe MD-R is 0. This attribute cannot be modified.



Type : DP

Release : V13

initialMCSDL Class 3

Description : Initial MCS in the DL direction.. It is selected by the PCUfor the initial DL-LA-CommandedMCS. Note the backhaulconstraints can reduce the MCS.

Value range : MCS2 (value of 0 or 2), MCS3 = 3, MCS5 = 5, MCS6 = 6,MCS7 = 7, MCS8 = 8, MCS9 = 9



Default value : MCS2

Type : DP

Release : V15

Note : MCS5 is the recommended value. If a cell with a low radioquality is experiencing a high BLER in MCS5, it is thenrecommended to use MCS2 or MCS3.

initialMCSUL Class 3

Description : Initial MCS in the UL direction. It is selected by the PCU forthe initial UL-LA-CommandedMCS.

Note the backhaul constraints will reduce the MCS.

Value range : MCS2 (value of 0 or 2), MCS3 = 3, MCS5 = 5, MCS6 = 6,MCS7 = 7, MCS8 = 8, MCS9 = 9



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

I 269


Default value : MCS2

Type : DP

Release : V15

interBscDirectedRetry Class 3

Description : Whether inter-bss directed retry handovers are allowed ina BSS.


Object : bsc


Type : DP

Release : V9

Note : Queuing must also be activated at BSC level.

interBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3

Description : Whether inter-bss directed retry handovers are allowed ina cell.


Object : bts


Type : DP

Release : V9

Note : Queueing must also be activated at BSC level.

interCellHOExtPriority Class 3

Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable defines the processingpriority of incoming inter-bss handovers in a cell.

This priority is used when radio resource allocationqueueing is not requested by the MSC or not authorized inthe BSS (refer to the "bscQueueingOption" entry in theDictionary).


Object : bts

Default value : 17

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


interCellHOIntPriority Class 3

Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable defines the processingpriority of incoming intra-bss handovers in a cell.

This priority is always used, whether radio resourceallocation queueing is authorized in the BSS or not.


Object : bts

Default value : 17

Type : DP

interferenceType Class 3

Description : Type of interference created by neighbor cell.

Value range : [notApplicable / adjacent / coChannel]



Default value : notApplicable

Type : DP

Release : V12

interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc

Description : Mediation of interferenceMatrixRunning attribute.

Value range : [yes (if at least one cell below BSC with the parameteris equal to “yes” / no (if no cell below BSC with theinterferenceMatrixRunningOnBts parameter is equal to“no”]

Object : bts

Feature : Switch Interference Matrix (16411)

Default value : 0

Type : DD

Note : This parameter is optional and read-only. It is applicableto BSC 3000 only. It is not present in CREATE or SETcommands. This flag is displayed at the OMC-R using theGet command.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

I 271

Checks : • [C/M]: • This parameter checks the callDropActivation and DistributionActivationparameters.

• The OMC-R prevents a simultaneousactivation of the call dropped analysisand the switch interference matrix. TheIM_FREQUENCIES_MEASUREMENTTGE is prohibited on the bsc thatincludes at least one cell withcallDropActivation parameter set toenabled. In this case, the following errormessage is displayed: ”InterferenceMatrix cannot be launched on a BSCperforming Call Drop Analysis”.

• This check is performed when launchingthe interference matrix (IM).

• Vice versa, when activating the droppedcall analysis on a cell, a control isrun at the OMC-R. If in a BSC, theinterferenceMatrixRunningOnBtsparameter in at least one cell is still setto ”yes”, then the callDropActivationparameter cannot be set to enable.

• The OMC-R prevents a simultaneousactivation of measurement distributionsand the switch interference matrix. TheIM_FREQUENCIES_MEASUREMENTTGE is prohibited on the bts that hasthe distributionActivation parameterset to enabled. In this case, thefollowing error message is displayed:”Interference Matrix cannot be launchedon a cell performing MeasurementDistributions”.

• This check is performed when launchingthe Interference Matrix.

• Vice versa, when activatingMeasurement Distributions on acell, the OMC-R checks for theinterferenceMatrixRunningOnBtsflag. If the cell is still running withinterference matrix measurements, thedistributionActivation parameter cannotbe set to enable.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [C/M]:Bts shall not be deleted while IM is running.Checks that interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc is set to ”no” prior to deleting a bts.

• [C/M]:BCCH and BSIC values shall not bechanged while IM is running.If the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBtsparameter is set to ”yes” for one cell,the check prevents the setting of BCCH,BCC and NCC parameters on bts andadjacentCellHandover objects

• [C/M]:Neighboring cannot be changed while IM isrunning.If the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBtsparameter is set to “yes” for one cell, thecheck prevents the creation or deletion ofone adjacentCellHandover object.

interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts

Description : Mediation of interferenceMatrixRunning attribute.

Value range : [notApplicable / adjacent / coChannel]

[0 / 1]

• 0 interferenceMatrixOnBts is not running.

• 1 interferenceMatrixOnBts is running.

Object : bts

Feature : Switch Interference Matrix (16411)

Default value : 0

Type : DD

Note : This parameter is optional and read-only. It is applicableto BSC 3000 only. It is not present in CREATE or SETcommands. This flag is displayed at the OMC-R using theGet command.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

I 273

Checks : • [C/M]: • This parameter checks the callDropActivation and DistributionActivation parameters.

• The OMC-R prevents a simultaneousactivation of the call dropped analysisand the switch interference matrix. TheIM_FREQUENCIES_MEASUREMENTTGE is prohibited on the bsc that includesat least one cell with callDropActivationparameter set to enabled. In this case,the following error message is displayed:”Interference Matrix cannot be launched ona BSC performing Call Drop Analysis”.

• This check is performed when launchingthe interference matrix (IM).

• Vice versa, when activating the droppedcall analysis on a cell, a control isrun at the OMC-R. If in a BSC, theinterferenceMatrixRunningOnBts parameterin at least one cell is still set to ”yes”, thenthe callDropActivation parameter cannot beset to enable.

• The OMC-R prevents a simultaneousactivation of measurement distributionsand the switch interference matrix. TheIM_FREQUENCIES_MEASUREMENTTGE is prohibited on the bts that has thedistributionActivation parameter set toenabled. In this case, the following errormessage is displayed: ”Interference Matrixcannot be launched on a cell performingMeasurement Distributions”.

• This check is performed when launchingthe Interference Matrix.

• Vice versa, when activating MeasurementDistributions on a cell, the OMC-R checksfor the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBtsflag. If the cell is still running withinterference matrix measurements, thedistributionActivation parameter cannot beset to enable.

• [C/M]:Bts shall not be deleted while IM is running.Checks that interferenceMatrixRunningOnBscis set to ”no” prior to deleting a bts.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [C/M]:BCCH and BSIC values shall not be changedwhile IM is running.If the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBtsparameter is set to ”yes” for one cell,the check prevents the setting of BCCH,BCC and NCC parameters on bts andadjacentCellHandover objects.

• [C/M]:Neighboring cannot be changed while IM isrunning.If the interferenceMatrixRunningOnBtsparameter is set to “yes” for one cell, thecheck prevents the creation or deletion of oneadjacentCellHandover object.

interferer cancel algo usage Class 2

Description : Correlation ratio of the input signals received from thenormal and diversity antennas. This ratio enables to adaptthe SPU software (the interferer cancellation algorithm) tothe propagation conditions. Correlation ratio = 0 meansthat the interferer cancellation algorithm is inactive.


Object : bts

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V10

internal DMUX alarm state

Description : State of the BSC chain equipment controlled by the ECIboard by means of alarm loops.

Value range : The following is a list of equipment in alphabetical order:

• Control bayextractor .......... [all working / one failed]

• Control bay extractorpower supply .... [all working / one failed]

• EQP fans ........ [all working / one failed]

• MPU converters ... [all working / one failed]

• MPU converter(other channel) ... [all working / one failed]

• MPU fan powersupply ........... [all working / one failed]


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

I 275

• MPU fans ........ [all working / one failed]

• RCB0 ........... [present / absent]



• Right MPUconverter ........ [all working / one failed]

• SWD converter ... [all working / one failed]

BSC 2000

• EQPD converter ... [all working / one failed]

• EQPM converter .. [all working / one failed]

• EQPM EQPD fan .. [all working / one failed]

BSC 12000HC

• EQPD0 converter .. [all working / one failed]

• EQPD0 EQPD1EQPI shelves fans . [all working / one failed]


• EQPI converter ... [all working / one failed]

• EQPT fans ....... [all working / one failed]

• EQPT and SWGshelf fans ........ [all working / one failed]

• RCB3 ............ [present / absent]



• Control bayextractor .......... [all working / one failed]

• Control bay extractorpower supply .... [all working / one failed]

• EQP fans ........ [all working / one failed]

• MPU converters ... [all working / one failed]

• MPU converter(other channel) ... [all working / one failed]

• MPU fan powersupply ........... [all working / one failed]


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• MPU fans ........ [all working / one failed]




• Right MPUconverter ........ [all working / one failed]

• SWD converter ... [all working / one failed]

BSC 2000

• EQPD converter ... [all working / one failed]

• EQPM converter .. [all working / one failed]

• EQPM EQPD fan .. [all working / one failed]

BSC 12000HC


• EQPD0 EQPD1EQPI shelves fans . [all working / one failed]


• EQPI converter ... [all working / one failed]

• EQPT fans ....... [all working / one failed]

• EQPT and SWGshelf fans ........ [all working / one failed]




Type : DD


internal DMUX state

Description : Internal state of the BSC chain ECI board.


• working .........The board has been successfullyinitialized.

• fault ............A fault was detected on the board.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

I 277

Type : DD


internal PCM states

Description : State of the internal PCM links of the BSC chain. Each linkis identified by a serial number: [0 to 15] (BSC type 1), [0 to31] (BSC types 2, 3, 4), [0 to 63] (BSC type 5).


• working .........The internal PCM link is working.

• fault ............A fault was detected on the link.


Type : DD


internal switching matrix

Description : State of the BSC chain switching unit

Value range : [working / fault)]

• working .........The switching boards are correctlyinitialized.

• fault ............A fault was detected on a switchingboard.


Type : DD


interOmuEtherlinkOper

Description : Operational state of the inner OMU Ethernet link.

This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS.

Value changes are not notified to the manager.

ISO operational state

This attribute is relevant for the BSC 3000.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.




Type : DD

Release : V13

intraBscDirectedRetry Class 3

Description : Whether intra-bss directed retry handovers are allowed ina BSS.


Object : bsc


Type : DP

Release : V9


intraBscDirectedRetryFromCell Class 3

Description : Whether intra-bss directed retry handovers are allowed ina cell.


Object : bts


Type : DP

Release : V9


intraCell Class 3

Description : Whether intra-bts handovers on TCH are allowed in a cellfor interference reasons or Cell Tiering reasons.

Value range : [cellTieringHandover/ intraCellHandover / handoverNotAllowed]

• cellTieringHandover: the intra-bts handovers areallowed for CellTiering reason

• intraCellHandover: the intra-bts handovers are allowedfor interference reason

• handoverNotAllowed: the intra bts handovers are notallowed



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

I 279


Default value : handoverNotAllowed

Type : DP

intraCellHOIntPriority Class 3

Description : Index in the allocPriorityTable that defines the processingpriority of an intra-bts handover in a cell.

This priority is always used, whether radio resourceallocation queueing is authorized in the BSS or not.


Object : bts

Default value : 17

Type : DP

intraCellQueueing Class 3

Description : Whether intra-bts handover requests are queued for acell. This parameter is significant only when queuing radioresource allocation requests is allowed in the BSS.

Refer to the bscQueueingOption entry in the Dictionary.


Object : bts


Type : DP

intraCellSDCCH Class 3

Description : Whether intra-bts handovers on SDCCH are authorized in acell for interference reasons.




Type : DP

Release : V8


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Jjob

Description : Identifier (name) of a job on the OMC-R.

Value range : [case sensitive, unlimited number of characters]. The . and/ characters are forbidden.

Object : job

Type : Id

Checks : • [M/D]: The job is created on the OMC-R.

jobResult

Description : Identifier (name) of the associated job on the OMC-R.

A results file stores the commands executed and thesystem responses to those commands during theassociated job successive runs, beginning with the first run.


Object : jobResult

Type : Id

jokerPerMainTarget Class 3

Description : Target number of joker AGPRS 16 kbit/s TSs to beassigned by both BSC and PCU to every main AGPRS 16kbit/s TS (that is to every PDTCH linked with AGPRS).

Value range : 0 to 4



Default value : 0

Type : DP

Notes : • The recommended values are 2, 3 or 4, depending onoperator Abis configuration (numberOfJokerDS0) andestimated EDGE TDMA throughput.

• Even if jokerPerMainTarget is a class 3 parameter,new values will not be immediately taken into account.The parameter will be used by BSC or PCU at the nextAGPRS reconfiguration (when a TDMA_TS_STATUSmessage is sent from BSC to PCU) or when the PCUprotection timer expires (agprsTsSharingProtection,internal timer set to 10s).

Release : V15


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

L 281

Llabel

Description : Label of an archive cartridge.

When a label is set, all information already stored on thecartridge is lost.


Object : md, omc - Display labelmd, omc - Set labelmd, omc - Archivemd, omc - Restoremd, omc - Display archive list.

Type : DP

language

Description : Language in which a short message is broadcasted.

The information is used in the data coding scheme whenthe short message is broadcasted.

Value range : [German / English / Italian / French / Spanish / Dutch /Swedish / Danish / Portuguese / Finnish / Norwegian /Greek / Turkish / Hungarian / Polish / unspecified / MultiByte Character Set]


Type : DP

lapdConcentration

Description : Whether information concentration is authorized on a LAPDlink.


Object : lapdLink


Type : DP

Checks : • [C]:The attribute value can be "enabled"or"disabled" if the link carries BTS signaling onthe Abis interface in a BSS that manages BTSLAPD signaling concentration.

• [C]:The attribute value is "enabled" if the linkcarries TCU signaling on the Ater interface.

• [C]:The attribute value is "disabled" if the linkcarries PCU signaling on the Agprs interface.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.




lapdLink

Description : Identifier of a lapdLink object defined with regard to a bscobject.

In all MMI commands, a LAPD link can be referencedby "bscName.lapdLink" where bscName is a permanentattribute of the parent bsc object that identifies it by name.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : lapdLink

Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The number of LAPD links per BSC is limitedto 841. Fourteen links can be assigned to theTCUs on the Ater interface or to the PCU onthe Agprs interface, 147 links can be assignedto the radio sites on the Abis interface, andthe remaining links can be assigned to theTRX/DRXs on the Abis interface, with two linksper TRX/DRX.


• [C]:The number of lapdLlink objects dependenton the same bsc object that use thesame lapdTerminalNumber is limited tomaxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).

• [C]:All lapdLlink objects dependent on thesame bsc object that use the samelapdTerminalNumber have identicalassociatedInterface and lapdConcentrationattributes.



• [D]:No btsSiteManager, transceiverEquipment, ortranscoder objects refer to the lapdLink object.

Remark : A lapdLink object has no administrativeState of its own; itsoperationalState depends on the administrativeState of theparent bsc object.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

L 283

lapdLinkOMLRef Class 2

Description : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = OML referencedby the btsSiteManager object.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The referenced lapdLink object depends onthe same bsc object as the btsSiteManagerobject, it is assigned to the Abis interface(associatedInterface), its sapi attribute valueis "OML".

• [C/M]:The number of objects dependent on a bscobject that refer to lapdLink objects usingthe same lapdTerminalNumber is limited tomaxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).

• [C]:The number of LAPD channels used by asite and the related TRX/DRXs is limited tomaxLapdChPerBtsSM (static configurationdata).

• [C/M]:If the lapdLink object lapdConcent rationattribute value is "enabled", the definedlapdTerminalNumber is used by no morethan four btsSiteManager objects dependenton the same bsc object.

• [C/M]:If the lapdLink object lapdConcent rationattribute value is "disabled", the definedlapdTerminalNumber is not used.


Description : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = OML referencedby the transceiverEquipment object.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : DP

Checks : • [C]:The number of LAPD channels used by asite and its related TRX/DRXs is limited tomaxLapdChPerBtsSM (static configurationdata).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [C/M]:The referenced lapdLink objects depend on thesame bsc object as the transceiverEquipmentobject, they are assigned to the Abis interface(associatedInterface), they use the samelapdTerminalNumber, their sapi attributematches the type of use ("OML" or "RSL").

• [C/M]:The number of btsSiteManager andtransceiverEquipment objects dependent on absc object that refer to lapdLink objects usingthe same lapdTerminalNumber is limited tomaxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).

• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked, theparent btsSiteManager object and thetransceiverEquipment object are locked.


Description : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = OML referencedby the transcoder object.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : transcoder

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The referenced lapdLink object dependson the same bsc object as the transcoderobject, it is assigned to the Ater interface(associatedInterface = "Ater"), its sapiattribute value is "OML".


lapdLinkRSLRef Class 2

Description : Identifier of the lapdLink object with sapi = RSL referencedby the transceiverEquipment object.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : DP

Checks : • [C]:The number of LAPD channels used by asite and its related TRX/DRXs is limited tomaxLapdChPerBtsSM (static configurationdata).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

L 285

• [C/M]:The referenced lapdLink objects depend on thesame bsc object as the transceiverEquipmentobject, they are assigned to the Abis interface(associatedInterface), they use the samelapdTerminalNumber, their sapi attributematches the type of use ("OML" or "RSL").

• [C/M]:The number of btsSiteManager andtransceiverEquipment objects dependent on absc object that refer to lapdLink objects usingthe same lapdTerminalNumber is limited tomaxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).

• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked, theparent btsSiteManager object and thetransceiverEquipment object are locked.

lapdTerminalNumber Class 0

Description : BSC SICD port assigned to the LAPD link.

For more information on the use of this parameter, refer toGSM BSS Engineering Rules, 411-9001-138.

lapdTerninalNumber = 4 x number of the mother SICD4board [0 to 9] + port number [0 to 3]

lapdTerninalNumber = 8 x number of the mother SICD8board [0 to 4] + port number [0 to 7]

Value range : [0 to 7] (BSC type 1)[0 to 15] (BSC type 2)[0 to 23] (BSC type 3)[0 to 31] (BSC type 4)[0 to 39] (BSC type 5)[0 to 254] (BSC 3000)

Object : lapdLink

Default value :


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M] :The number of SICD ports in a BSC dependson its type, knowing that a SICD boardmanages four ports and a SICD8V boardmanages eight ports.

BSC type T1 T2 T3 T4 T5

SICD ports 8 16 24 32 40


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [M] :If the port is used by an Abis interface LAPDlink, it cannot be used for TCU and PCUsignaling.

• [M] :If the port is used by an Ater interface LAPDlink, it cannot be used for BTS and PCUsignaling.

• [M] :If the port is used by an Agprs interface LAPDlink, it cannot be used for BTS and TCUsignaling.

• [M]:The number of btsSiteManager andtransceiverEquipment objects dependent on absc object that refer to lapdLink objects usingthe same lapdTerminalNumber is limited tomaxTeiPerLapdCh (static configuration data).

layer3MsgCyphModComp Class 1

Description : Whether the "Layer 3 message" element is used inthe CYPHER MODE COMPLETE messages (Phase IIcompliance).




Type : DP

Release : V8

lcsType Class 0

Description : MS Location technical solution to use.

Value range : According to the BSC version:

• BSC V15: [nss based / tandem hybrid]

• BSC V16: [nss based / bss based]

Object : bsc

Type : DP

Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC3000.

Checks : • [M]:If the value of lcsType is bss based thentwo signallingLinkSet instances must becreated and at least one signallingLinkmust be created for the Lb interface -signallingLinkSet(1).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

L 287

• [M]:If the value of lcsType is nss based then onlyone signallingLinkSet instance must existand be equal to 0.

• [M]:If the value of lcsType is tandem hybrid thenonly one signallingLinkSet instance mustexist and be equal to 0.

Release : V14

level to process

Description : Identifier of a set of SDO resultant data files. Level 1identifies the latest set produced by the SDO machine.

As many as three sets of resultant data files created fromthe same workstation can exist in the SDO machine. Anyone can be selected for report display or purge purposes.

Value range : [1, 2, 3]

Object : Call monitoring - Display/Management) (SDO)

Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:The set of files exists in the SDO machine.

lightning protection Class 2

Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment "lightningarrester" in S8000 Outdoor.



Type : DP

Release : V9

line

Description : Line number of the first command to run (default is 1).

Every command in a command file is assigned a linenumber. Line no.1 corresponds to the first recordedcommand, line no.n corresponds to the last recordedcommand.

Value range : [1 to 2147483646]

Object : commandFile - Run

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


locationAreaCode Class 3

Description : Code of a location area of the neighbor cell in the PLMN.



Type : DP



Description : Code of a location area of the neighbor cell in the PLMN.



Type : DP



Description : Code of a location area in the PLMN.

A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique in a locationarea. It identifies a cell in the PLMN and includes fourfields: cellIdentity (CI), locationAreaCode (LAC),mobileCountryCode (MCC), and mobileNetworkCode(MNC).


Object : bts

Type : DP


log

Description : Identifier of a log object defined with regard to the mdobject. It is assigned by the OMC-R agent.

The current alarm log is no.1. Current observations logsare created in ascending numerical order each time anew mdScanner object is created. Current trace logs arecreated in ascending numerical order each time a newcallPathTrace or traceControl object is created.

A restored log is created each time a Restore command onthe md object related to faults, observations, or trace datais run.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

L 289

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : log

Type : Id

Checks : • (on observation and trace logs)

• [D]:The observation or the associated tracefunction is stopped.

Restrictions : • [D]:The log object describing the current alarm logcannot be deleted.

Notes : • The log objects are created by the OMC-R agent andcan be deleted by users under certain conditions (seeabove).

• The attributes of the log objects are not managed byusers.

logFullAction

Description : Action taken by the OMC-R agent in case of storagedirectory capacity threshold overflow.

The value "wrap" means that messages may be purged;the value "halt" means that further messages are notsaved. Refer to the capacityAlarmThreshold entry in theDictionary.

Value range : [wrap (alarm log) / halt (observation or trace log)]


Type : DP


login command type

Description : Select login and user profile

Value range : [login request, server update]


longTbfLossThroughput Class 3

Description : Loss of throughput for long TBF in percentage of allocatedbandwidth. Prioritize normal transfer over long datatransfer.

Value range : [0 to 100] in %

Object : bts



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V12

longTbfSizeThreshold Class 3

Description : Threshold for long TBF size, in Kbytes. This parameter isused in the functionality which penalizes long TBF.


Object : bts


Default value : 100

Type : DP

Release : V12

lRxLevDLH Class 3

Description : Signal strength threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, belowwhich a handover may be triggered.



Default value : -101 to -100 dB (GSM 900 and GSM 850)-99 to -98 dB (GSM1800/1900)

Type : DP

lRxLevDLP Class 3

Description : Signal strength threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, belowwhich the power control function increases power. It islower than uRxLevDLP.




Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:lRxLevDLP + powerIncrStepSize ≤uRxLevDLP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

L 291

• [M]:uRxLevDLP - p owerRedStepSize ≥lRxLevDLP

Note : The powerIncrStepSize, powerRedStepSize, anduRxLevDLP parameters are ignored when the BTS usesthe advanced "one shot" power control algorithm.

lRxLevULH Class 3

Description : Signal strength threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, belowwhich a handover may be triggered.



Default value : -101 to -100 dB (GSM 900 and GSM 850)-99 to -98 dB (GSM 1800/1900)

Type : DP

lRxLevULP Class 3

Description : Signal strength threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, belowwhich the power control function increases power. It islower than uRxLevULP.




Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:lRxLevULP + powerIncrStepSize ≤uRxLevULP

• [M]:uRxLevULP - powerRedStepSize ≥lRxLevULP

Note : The powerIncrStepSize, powerRedStepSize, anduRxLevULP parameters are ignored when the BTS usesthe advanced "one shot" power control algorithm.

lRxQualDLH Class 3

Description : Bit error rate threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, above whichan inter cell handover may be triggered.

Value range : [less than 0.2, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.8, ... , 6.4 to 12.8, morethan 12.8] %


Feature : Intracell handover enhancements (TF819 - V12)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Default value : 1.6 to 3.2 %

Type : DP

lRxQualDLP Class 3

Description : Bit error rate threshold in BTS-to-MS direction, above whichthe power control function increases power. It is greaterthan or equal to uRxQualDLP.



Default value : 0.4 to 0.8

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]: lRxQualDLP ≥ uRxQualDLP

Note : The uRxQualDLP parameter is ignored when the BTSuses the advanced "one shot" power control algorithm.

lRxQualULH Class 3

Description : Bit error rate threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, above whichan inter cell handover may be triggered.




Feature : Intracell handover enhancements (TF819 - V12)

Type : DP

lRxQualULP Class 3

Description : Bit error rate threshold in MS-to-BTS direction, above whichthe power control function increases power. It is greaterthan or equal to uRxQualULP.




Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]: lRxQualULP ≥ uRxQualULP

Note : The uRxQualULP parameter is ignored when the BTSuses the advanced "one shot" power control algorithm.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

L 293

lsaPcmList Class 3

Description : List of pcmCircuit object instances connected to a LSA.

Note : The class is 3 since some new pcmCircuits may beconnected without stopping the LSA. Moreover, for a givenport, the pcmCircuit may be replaced provided that theold and new pcmCircuits are in the ’locked’ administrativeState.

The complete pcmCircuit list is always given.

This attribute is monitored by the Manager.


This attribute can be modified only if the ’bsc’ objectinstance is unlocked.

This attribute is relevant for 3G BSC and 3G TCU.


Object : iem, lsaRc


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]: LsaRc under Bsc not possible for a non existingreferenced PcmCircuit.

• [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder not possible for a nonexisting referenced PcmCircuit.

• [C/M]: LsaRc under Bsc not possible if a referencedpcmCircuit is already referenced by another LsaRc.

• [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder not possible if areferenced pcmCircuit is already referenced by anotherLsaRc.

• [C/M]: Creation/Modification LsaRc under Transcoderis not possible for referenced PcmCircuit different thanAte r, A, A_Lb or Lb types.

• [C/M]: A LSA under Transcoder module of E1 typehandles 21 PCMs. The Ater referenced PcmCircuit areconnected to port 0 through port 4 and the A, A _Lband Lb referenced PcmCircuits are connected to port 5through port 20.

• [C/M]: A LSA under Transcoder module of T1 typehandles 28 PCMs. The Ater referenced PcmCircuit areconnected to port 0 through port 5 and the A, A _Lband Lb’ referenced PcmCircuits are connected to port 6through port 27.

• [D]: Not possible to delete a PcmCircuit under bsc, stillreferenced to a LsaRc.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [D]: Not possible to delete a PcmCircuit undertranscoder, still referenced to a LsaRc.

• [C/M]: LsaRc under Bsc not possible with tworeferenced PcmCircuits on the same port number.

• [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder not possible with tworeferenced PcmCircuits on the same port number.

• [C/M]: LsaRc not possible for shelf position and slotposition already used.

• [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder not possible for an Areferenced PcmCircuit which is not defined under thesame transcoder.

• [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder not possible for an Areferenced PcmCircuit with a port number equal to 0,1, 2 or 3.

• [C/M]: LsaRc under Transcoder is not possible forreferenced PcmCircuit different than ’Ater’ or ’A’ type.[C/M]: The association between Pcm and port of LsaRcis incorrect.

Release : V13

lsaRc

Description : The Low Speed Access Resource Complex module, whichprovides the electrical interface for the DS1 (Digital Signallevel 1) or PCM30 interfaces.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : lsaRc

Type : DP

lsaRcId

Description : Identifier of the ’lsaRc’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000and TCU 3000.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : lsaRc

Type : DP

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 295

lsaRc Reference

Description : Pointer to the associated ’lsaRc’ object instance.

This attribute cannot be modified. It is set at ’iem’ creationas indicated by the BSS.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : iem


Release : V13

Mmachine name

Description : Name of the machine (terminal or server), as defined in itsprofile for a terminal, in which the job is run (default is thelogged-in user’s terminal). Enter "server" for the OMC-Rserver console.


Object : job

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The machine is authorized to run jobs.

Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.

machine name

Description : Name of the machine, as defined in its profile for aterminal, in which the associated job was run ("server"identifies the OMC-R server).

Object : jobResult

Type : DD


mainNetworkBand Class 0

Description : Indicates the main network band.

Value range : [900/1800/850/1900] network band

Object : bsc


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

Release : V15

maio Class 2

Description : Index in the list of frequencies allotted to a radio time slotwhich obeys frequency hopping laws.

Setting this attribute, together with the fhsRef attribute,allows the time slot to obey frequency hopping laws.

This offset allows to differentiate channel objects thatreference frequencyHoppingSystem objects with identicalattributes (orthogonality principle).

Value range : [0 to N-1] N is the number of frequencies (≤ 64) allotted tothe time slot.

Object : channel

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The attribute is in the range [0 to 63].

• [C/M]:It is undefined if frequency hopping isnot allowed for the parent bts object(btsIsHopping = "no hopping") or thechannelType of the channel object is"mainBCCH", "mainBCCHCombined", or"bcchSdcch4CBCH".

• [C/M]:If the attribute is defined, the fhsRef attributeis also defined.

• [C/M]:If the attribute is defined, its value is lowerthan the number of frequencies defined inthe mobile Allocation list (attribute of thereferenced frequencyHoppingSystem object).

managedObjectClass

Description : Object class referenced.

Value range : [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection/ bsc / bscMdInterface / bts / btsSiteManager /callPathTrace / channel / efd / frequencyHoppingSystem/ handOverControl / lapdLink / log / md / mdScanner /mdWarning / pcmCircuit / powerControl / signallingLink /signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software / traceControl/ transceiver / transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone /transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp]


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 297

Object : alarmRecord, mdScanReportRecord, observationFileReadyRecord, stateChangeRecord, traceFileReadyRecord,traceLogRecord.

Type : DP

managedObjectInstance

Description : Identification of an object in the class.


Type : DP

manager address type

Description : OMC-R manager address type.

Value range : [internal / external]


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:This attribute is not managed by users.

manager addresses

Description : Addresses of the OMC-R manager that receives themessages. They are provided by the manager.


Type : DP


managerServer

Description : Name of the active OMC-R agent server. It is provided bythe OMC-R agent.

This server is referred to as the "NMC" server in the Q3names of the permanent md observation counters relatedto the OMC-R agent active server.


Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


manufacturerIntervention

Description : Type of action associated with an alarm criterion in themanufacturer configuration.



Type : DP

marking type

Description : Type of software to consult.

Selecting "prom" allows to display the software applicationsloaded in PROMs in the selected BSS entity. Selecting"soft" allows to display the software applications loaded inthe processors of the selected BSS entity.

Value range : [prom / soft]


Type : DP

masterBtsSMId class 2

Description : When its value is not empty, this parameter identifies themaster BTS (for synchronization purpose).


Value range : [0 to 499 or empty]

Type : DP

Feature : BTS Synchronization

Default value : empty

Release : V15


max log size

Description : Maximum log size expressed in bytes.


Type : DP

Remark : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by theusers.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 299

maxAdjCHOARMPerBts

Description : Maximum number of neighbor cells associated with aserving cell for handover and re-selection management(static OMC-R configuration data).

Value range : [32]

Object : OMC-R

Type : DS

maxBscPerNetwork

Description : Maximum number of BSCs handled by an OMC-R (staticOMC-R configuration data).

Value range : [20]

Object : OMC-R

Type : DS

maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone Class 3

Description : Maximum level of BTS transmission power in the innerzone of a dual-band cell.


Object : bts


Default value : 2

Type : DP

Release : V12

maxBtsPerBtsSM

Description : Maximum number of radio cells controlled by a site (staticOMC-R configuration data).

Value range : [6 (BTS "conventional") / 4 (others)]

Object : OMC-R

Type : DS

maxBtsPerNetwork

Description : Maximum number of radio cells controlled by an OMC-R(static OMC-R configuration data).

Value range : [3200]

Object : OMC-R

Type : DS


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3

Description : Maximum number of downlink TBF on a P1 TDMA beforeselection of P2 TDMA.


Object : bts


Default value : 16

Release : V12

maxDnTbfPerTs Class 3

Description : Maximum number of downlink TBF per TDMA on a timeslotbasis.


Object : bts


Default value : 8

Type : DP

Release : V12

maxDwAssign Class 3

Description : Maximum number of Immediate Assignment messagesper second.

Value range : [1 to 32] blocks

Object : bts


Default value : 8

Type : DP

Release : V12

Note : Because no TS partitioning is implemented in GPRS V12.4b release, the number of maximum TBF establishmentcannot exceed the number of TS configured in the cell.Recommended value has to be set to the number ofPDTCH configured in the cell.

maxFileSize Class 2

Description : Maximum size of the call path tracing data file in the BSC.

Value range : [30 to 500] kbit/s



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 301

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:The callPathTrace object is locked.


• If trace data collecting is stopped by locking theobject or on reaching the end-of-session criterion, itis automatically restarted whenever the callPathTraceobject is unlocked. For instance, if the end-of-sessioncriterion defines a period of time that elapsed, datacollecting will restart for the entire period.

maximum acknowledgment time

Description : To select messages acknowledged at that time or before.





Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It is after minimum acknowledgment timewhen filled in.

maximum alarm number

Description : To select alarms with a number lower than or equal to thatone.


Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It is greater than or equal to minimum alarmnumber when filled in.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


maximum clear time

Description : To select alarms cleared at that time or before.





Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It is after minimum clear time when filled in.

maximum event time

Description : To select messages issued at that time or before.





Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It is after minimum event time when filled in.

maximum MD notification number

Description : To select OMC-R agent notifications with a number lowerthan or equal to that one.


Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It is greater than or equal to minimum MDnotification number when filled in.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 303

maximum OMC notification number

Description : To select OMC-R manager notifications with a numberlower than or equal to that one.

Do not fill in if this criteria is not to be selected.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It is greater than or equal to minimum OMCnotification number when filled in.

maximum reception time

Description : To select messages received at that time or before.





Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It is after minimum reception time when filledin.

maxLapdChPerBtsSM

Description : Maximum number of LAPD channels used by a radio site(static OMC-R configuration data).

Value range : [6]

Object : OMC-R

Type : DS

maxNbrConsMess

Description : Maximum number of messages stored in the BSC log files.This number is allocated by the MD-R at object creation.This attribute can be modified only if the ’bsc’ objectinstance is locked.


Object : bscLog


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

Release : V13

maxNbOfCells Class 2

Description : Maximum number of radio cells controlled by a site.

Value range : [1 to maxBtsPerBtsSM]


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The number of cells controlled by a site islimited to maxBtsPerBtsSM (refer to this entryin the Dictionary).

• [M]:This number must be greater than the btsobject greatest identifier created for thebtsSiteManager object.

maxNbrPDAAssig Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf)

Description : Maximum number of:

• Polling request messages sent on PDCH afterimmediate assignment message has been sent onCCCH.

• PDAS messages on old TS when changing TSallocation before going into failure.




Default value : 5

Type : DP

Release : V12

maxNbrPUDWithoutVchange Class 2 (NN0002Max) gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf

Description : Maximum number of PUAN (Packet Uplink Ack/Nack)consecutively sent without V(A) has changed (respectively,maximum number of PDAN (Packet Downlink Ack/Nack)consecutively sent without V(Q) has changed).





411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 305

Default value : 10

Type DP

Release : V12

maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock Class 2 (n3101Max) (gprsTranscvLockExtendedConf)

Description : Maximum number of USF where no data is received in theUL direction.




Default value : 10

Type : DP

Release : V12

maxNumberRetransmission Class 3

Description : Maximum number of RACH burst retransmissions allowedin a call in case of non-system response.

The information is broadcast to the mobiles at regularintervals on the cell BCCH. It defines the maximum numberof times a mobile can renew access requests to the BTSon RACH.

Value range : [one / two / four / seven]

Object : bts

Default value : two

Type : DP

maxPcmCPerBtsSM

Description : Maximum number of PCM links used by a radio site on theAbis interface (static OMC-R configuration data).

Value range : [6]

Object : OMC-R

Type : DS


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


maxPcmCPerTranscd

Description : Maximum number of PCM links used by a remotetranscoder on the Abis interface (static OMC-Rconfiguration data).

Value range : [4]

Object : OMC-R

Type : DS

maxRACH Class 3

Description : Broadcast of the PSI 13 message on PACCH during uplinkor downlink TBF.

The parameter has an MMI constraint (visibility) of GPRSonly for usage.


• 0: disabled

• 1..15: enabled

Object : bts

Feature : Broadcast of PSI 13 (Feature 27358)

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Notes : • The recommended value is 1.

• Only applicable for BSC 3000.

Release : V12

maxRowCount

Description : Maximum number of information lines per table to access."0" means accessing all data. The default value is "1000".


Object : Trace data display

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 307

maxSigLPerSigLS

Description : Maximum number of SS7 channels linked to a BSC (staticOMC-R configuration data).

Value range : [2 (BSC 12000HC type 1)4 (BSC 12000HC types 2, 3, 4)6 (BSC 12000HC type 5)16 (BSC 3000)]

Object : OMC-R

Type : DS

maxTeiPerLapdCh

Description : Maximum number of TEI addresses allotted to a LAPDterminal (static OMC-R configuration data).

It defines the maximum number of LAPD links that can usethe same SICD port in the BSC (lapdTerminalNumberattribute of the lapdLink objects).

Value range : [15]

Object : OMC-R

Type : DS

maxTranscdBPerTranscd

Description : Maximum number of transcoding boards housed in aremote transcoder (static OMC-R configuration data).

Value range : [10 in a GSM 900, E-GSM, GSM-R or 1800 network 8 ina GSM 1900 network]

Object : OMC-R

Type DS

maxTranscdPerBsc

Description : Maximum number of remote transcoders linked to a BSC(static OMC-R configuration data).

Value range : [10 (BSC 12000HC)34 (BSC 3000)32 (TCU2G)2 (TCU3G)]

Object : OMC-R

Type : DS


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold Class 3

Description : Maximum number of uplink TBF on a P1 TDMA beforeselection of P2 TDMA.


Object : bts


Type : DP

Default value : 16

Release : V12

maxUpTbfPerTs Class 3

Description : Maximum number of uplink TBF per TDMA on a timeslotbasis.


Object : bts


Type : DP

Default value : 8

Release : V12

md

Description : Identifier of the md object that describes the OMC-R agent.It is enforced by the system.

The md object is unique to the OMC-R. It is created whenthe system is started.

Value range : [1]

Object : md

Type : Id

md notification number

Description : To select OMC-R agent notifications with a given number.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 309

mdArchive

Description : Whether archiving the observation messages processedis allowed.

The value of this attribute is "not archived" whenmdScannerType = "performance monitor" (instrumentpanel observation) and "archived" otherwise.

Value range : [archived / not archived]

Object : mdScanner

Type DP


mdConfirm

Description : Whether the observation messages processed should beacknowledged.

The value of this attribute is "not confirmed" whenmdScannerType = "performance monitor" (instrumentpanel observation) and "confirmed" otherwise.

Value range : [confirmed (yes) / not confirmed (no)]

Object : mdScanner - Display

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:This attribute is not managed by users.

mdFileName

Description : Name of an observation file containing an elementaryreport. Refer to the naming rules to NTP < 07 >.

Object : mdScanReportRecord

Type : DP


mdGranularityPeriod

Description : Recovery period of the observation messages by theOMC-R agent.

Value range :

• [5, 10, 15] minutes.......permanent general md


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [15, 30, 60] minutes......Fast Statistic Observation(OFS)

• [1440] minutes...General StatisticObservation (OGS)

• [5, 10, 15] minutes.......Diagnostic Observation(ODIAG)

• [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] minutes...performance monitor(Real Time Observation(ORT))

• [5, 10, 15, 30, 60]minutes........

Temporary Observation(TO)

Object : mdScanner

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The number of temporary observations runningat the same time with a 5-minute recoveryperiod in the BSSs managed on the OMC-R islimited to 50.

Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified ifmdScannerType = "temporary xxx".Stop the observation if necessary by deletingthe concerned mdScanner object and create itback with a new observation period.

Note : For a BSC 12000HC the value range is 15 minutes.For a BSC 3000 the mdGranularityPeriod can be reduced:

• 5 minutes if the mdObjectList contains 1 bts max.

• 10 minutes if the mdObjectList contains 2 bts max.

• 15 minutes in all other cases

This note only applies to ODIAG observation.

mdGranularityPeriod


Value range :


• [15, 30, 60] minutes......permanent general bsc(GPO-BSC)



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 311


• [15] minutes.....Diagnostic Observation(ODIAG)

• [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] minutes...performance monitor(Instrument Panel (IPO)or Real Time Observation(ORT))

• [5, 10, 15, 30, 60]minutes........


Object : mdScanReportRecord

Type : DP

mdGranularityPeriod


Value range :


• [15, 30, 60] minutes......permanent general bsc(GPO-BSC)



• [15] minutes.....Diagnostic Observation(ODIAG)

• [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] minutes...performance monitor(Instrument Panel (IPO)or Real Time Observation(ORT))

• [5, 10, 15, 30, 60]minutes........


Object : observationFileReadyRecord

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


mdId

Description : Identifier of the md object describing the OMC-R agent. Itis enforced by the system.

This attribute allows users to identify the md object on theOMC-R.

Value range : [1]


Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:This attribute is not managed by users.

mdLog

Description : Whether the observation messages processed are savedon the OMC-R agent disks.

The value of this attribute is "not logged" whenmdScannerType = "performance monitor" (instrumentpanel observation) and "logged" otherwise.

Value range : [logged / not logged]

Object : mdScanner

Type DP


mdObjectList

Description : Identification of the observed object. It depends on the typeof the defined observation.

mdScannerType mdObjectList

permanent general md md

permanent general bsc bsc

general statistic (OGS) bsc

fast statistic (OFS) bsc

performance monitor bsc

real time (ORT) bsc

temporary signallingLink* bsc & signallingLink

* This type only applies to V12 BSCs.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 313

mdScannerType mdObjectList

temporary Abis Interface bts* bsc & btsSiteManager &bts

diagnostic (ODIAG) bsc, bts, signallingLink,hardware transcoder3G, transcoderEqpt,pcmPort, transceiverEqpt& btsSiteManager,pcmCircuit, adjacentCell

* This type only applies to V12 BSCs.

mdObjectList

Description : Identification of the observed object. It depends on the typeof the defined observation.


Object : display xxx report

Type DP

mdObjectList

Description : Identification of the observed object. It depends on the typeof observation defined.



Type : DP

mdScanner

Description : Identifier of an mdScanner object defined with regard to themd object.

The mdScanner object class describes the OMC-R agentand BSS observations. These objects are managed by theOMC-R "Performance Management" function.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : mdScanner

Type : Id

Checks : • (performed only when the object describes a BSSobservation)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [C/M/D]

: The application database of the BSC isnot being built.

• [C/M/D]

: If the application database of the BSC isnot built, temporary observations cannotbe managed.

• [C/M/D]

: If the application database of the BSC isbuilt, the BSS/OMC-R link is establishedand no audit is in-progress in the BSC.

Remark : Deleting an mdScanner object that describes a temporaryobservation is always possible if the observation durationhas elapsed (stopTime 1= 0) and the stop TGE has beensent to the BSC.

mdScannerType

Description : The type of observation.

Value range : [fast Statistic / general statistic / real Time / diagnostic/ temporary interference / temporary signallingLink /temporary Abis Interface bts / permanent general md /permanent general manager]


Type : DP

mdScannerType


Value range : [fast Statistic / general statistic / real Time / diagnostic/ temporary interference / temporary signallingLink /temporary Abis Interface bts / permanent general md /permanent general manager


Type : DP

mdScannerType


Value range : [fast Statistic / general statistic / real Time / diagnostic/ temporary interference / temporary signallingLink /temporary Abis Interface bts / permanent general md /permanent general manager]

Object : Load formulae

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 315

mdScannerType


Value range : [fast Statistic / general statistic / real Time / diagnostic/ temporary interference / temporary signallingLink /temporary Abis Interface bts / permanent general md /permanent general manager / pcuSN]

Object : mdScanner

Type : DP

Checks : • [C]:The defined observation is not running.


Notes : • The permanent general md observation is unique to theOMC-R.

• The permanent general bsc and Instrument Panelobservations are unique to a BSS (V10).

• The OGS is unique to a BSS (V11+).

• The OFS is unique to a BSS (V11+).

• The ORT is unique to a BSS (V11+).

• A temporary observation of a given type or ODIAG(V11+) is unique to a BSS.

mdScannerType


Value range : [fast Statistic / general statistic / real Time / diagnostic/ temporary interference / temporary signallingLink /temporary Abis Interface bts / permanent general md /permanent general manager / pcuSN]r]


Type : DP

mdStorageDuration

Description : Storage duration of the observation messages processedon the OMC-R agent disks.

Observation messages are kept on the OMC-R agentdisks for a limited period of time, provided the mdLogattribute of the associated log object is "logged". They are


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


automatically purged at regular intervals. The user mustarchive the observation data, for data analysis occurringafter the purge time set by the static configuration.

Value range : [N] hour. N is a static configuration data.

Since instrument panel observation messages are notkept, N equals zero for the log objects that describe theseobservations.

Object : mdScanner

Type : DP


mdTransferMode

Description : Service used by the OMC-R agent to transmit theobservation messages processed to the OMC-R manager.

Value range : [FTAM (permanent general md and bsc observations) /CMIS (others)]


Type : DP


mdWarning

Description : Identifier of a mdWarning object defined with regard to themd object.

The mdWarning object class describes the processingconditions of BSS alarms of "outOfRangeCounter" and"excessiveAnomalyRate" type. These objects are managedby the OMC-R "Fault Management" function.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : mdWarning

Type : Id

measurementProcAlgorithm Class 2

Description : Whether the new L1M interface is used.

Value range : [L1MV1, L1MV2]

• L1MV1:the older L1M is used

• L1MV2:the newer L1M is used


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 317

Object : bts

Feature : L1M evolutions for advanced features support(TF1089-V12)

Default value : L1MV1

Type : DP

Release : V12

microCellCaptureTimer Class 3

Description : Time used to confirm a capture (signal strength stability)when using micro-cell Algorithm type A.

Value range : Time = N multiplied by <runHandOver>.

According to microCellCaptureTimer value, N values arethe following:

• [0 to 249]N = [0 to 249]

• 250N = 512

• 251N = 1024

• 252N = 2048

• 253N = 4096

• 254N = 8192

• 255N = 16384


Default value : 0

Condition : To define if A handover algorithm is activated

Type : DP

Checks : • [C]:This attribute is defined if the describedneighbor cell is a micro-cell (cellType ="microType").

Release : V8

Note: To activate the MicroCellAlgo feature for this parameter,1. Set the MicroCellAlgo (in the omc_services.cfg of theOMC) to A. Stop the OMC-R application and perform the"omc_configure.sh -A" command.2. For the BSCs to take effect of the new featureactivation, perform a Build-BDA on all the BSCs on thisOMC-R during the next maintenance window.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


microCellStability Class 3

Description : Strength Level Stability Criterion for Capture Algorithm A.



Default value : 10

Condition : To define if A handover algorithm is activated

Type : DP

Checks : • [C]:This attribute is defined if the describedneighbor cell is a micro-cell (cellType ="microType").

Note: To activate the MicroCellAlgo feature for this parameter,1. Set the MicroCellAlgo (in the omc_services.cfg of theOMC) to A. Stop the OMC-R application and perform the"omc_configure.sh -A" command.2. For the BSCs to take effect of the new feature activation,perform a Build-BDA on all the BSCs on this OMC-R duringthe next maintenance window.

minimum acknowledgment time

Description : Selecting messages acknowledged at that time or after.


Do not fill in criterion if not to be selected.



Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It is before maximum acknowledgment timewhen filled in.

minimum alarm number

Description : To select alarms with a number greater than or equal tothat one.


Value range : [0 to 2147483646]



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 319

Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It is lower than or equal to maximum alarmnumber when filled in.

minimum clear time

Description : To select alarms cleared at that time or after.





Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It is before maximum clear time when filledin.

minimum event time

Description : To select messages issued at that time or after.





Type DP

Checks : • [A]:It is before maximum event time when filledin.

minimum MD notification number

Description : To select OMC-R agent notifications with a number greaterthan or equal to that one.


Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It is lower than or equal to maximum MDnotification number when filled in.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


minimum OMC notification number

Description : To select OMC-R manager notifications with a numbergreater than or equal to that one.


Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It is lower than or equal to maximum OMCnotification number when filled in.

minimum reception time

Description : To select messages received at that time or after.





Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It is before maximum reception time whenfilled in.

minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain Class 3

Description : Minimum number of joker AGPRS 16 kbit/s TSs per mainAGPRS 16 kbit/s TS, that cannot be preempted by theDynamic Agprs feature.

Value range : [0..4] step 0.125


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Feature : EDGE Dynamic Agprs minimum of joker TS

Checks : • [C/M]:minNbOfJokersPerCon nectedMainmust be lower than or equal to the targetnumber of jokers per TDMA (parameterjokerPerMainTarget)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 321

• [C/M]:minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain mustbe equal to 0 when EDGE is not activated onTDMA (that is when edgeDataServiceType isequal to capability is not requested)

Release : V16

Note : This parameter is mandatory. It is only available for BSC3000.

minNbOfTDMA Class 2

Description : Minimum number of TDMA frames working for the cellitself.

The frame carrying the cell BCCH must be among themand successfully configured.


Object : bts

Default value : 1

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:This number is less than or equal to thenumber of transceiver objects (TDMA frames)created for the bts object.

minNbrGprsTs Class 3

Description : Minimum number of TS dedicated to GPRS in the cell.


Object : bts


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V12

minTimeQualityIntraCellHO Class 3

Description : This attribute defines the minimum time between oneintracell HO and the next quality intracell HO.

This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance is unlocked




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V14

Note : Applies to a BSC 3000 architecture only.

missDistWt Class 3

Description : Weight applied to missing Distance measurement.

The missing measurement is replaced by the latestreceived raw measurement weighed by this correctivefactor when calculating the average MS-BTS distance.

The range of permitted values makes missing distancemeasurements not favored.



Default value : 110

Type : DP

missRxLevWt Class 3

Description : Weight applied in case of missing signal strengthmeasurement report.

The missing measurement is replaced by the latestcomputed arithmetic average, or by the latest received rawmeasurement if no average value is available, weighed bythis corrective factor when calculating the average signalstrength in the cell.

Selecting the greatest value makes missing strengthmeasurements not favored.



Default value : 90

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 323

missRxQualWt Class 3

Description : Weight applied to missing Quality measurement.

The missing measurement is replaced by the latestcomputed arithmetic average, or by the latest received rawmeasurement if no average value is available, weighed bythis corrective factor when calculating the average bit errorrate in the radio link.

The range of permitted values makes missing qualitymeasurements not favored.



Default value : 110

Type : DP

mms

Description : The Memory Mass Storage module, which holds all theprivate data (for OMU) and those that must be secured andstill accessible in the event of an OMU failure or disk failure(for Control Node).

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : mms

Type : Id

mmsId

Description : Identifier of the ’mms’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000and TCU 3000.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : mms

Type : DP

Release : V 13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


mmsUsage

Description : Indicates whether the MMS is private (i.e. associated to anOMU) ; or shared-mirrored (associated to the Control Node).

This attribute cannot be modified. It is set by the MD-R atMMS creation.

Value range : [0 (Shared) to 1 (Private)]

Object : mms


Type : DP

Release : V13

mobileAllocation Class 2

Description : List of sixty-four frequencies allotted in the networkfrequency band to a radio time slot obeying frequencyhopping laws.

Value range : [1 to 124] (GSM 900 network),[955 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (GSM-R),[975 to 1023] / [0 to 124] (E-GSM),[512 to 885] (GSM 1800 network),[512 to 810] (GSM 1900 network),[128 to 251] (GSM 850 network),[955 / 1023] / [0 /55] (GSM-R).


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:Each frequency occurs once in the list andis allotted to the parent bts object (cellAllocation).

• [M]:If the frequencyHoppingSystem object isreferenced by a channel object dependent onthe associated bts object, the parent bsc objectis unlocked and the associated bts object islocked.

mobileCountryCode Class 3

Description : Code of the PLMN home country.

Refer to the next entry.



Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 325

Checks : • [C]:This code is identical to the mobileCountryCode attribute of the parent bsc object when it isdefined for that object.

• [C/M]:A CGI is unique in the set including a servingcell and its neighbor cells.






Type : DP




Description : Code of the PLMN home country. It is defined whentheMSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI). TheMSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI) for aGSM-R network (Group call).



Object : bsc

Condition : For a GSM network: to define when the MSC does notmanage cell global identifiers (CGI).

Condition : For a GSM-R network: mandatory as the MSC does notmanage cell global identifiers (CGI) for Group Call.

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.




A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique within a locationarea. It identifies a cell unambiguously in the PLMNand includes four fields: cellIdentityCode (CI),locationAreaCode (LAC), mobileCountryCode (MCC),and mobileNetworkCode (MNC).


Object : bts

Type : DP



mobileNetworkCode Class 3

Description : Code of the PLMN in the country.




Type : DP

Checks : • [C]:This code is identical to the mobileNetworkCode attribute of the parent bsc object when it isdefined for that object.







Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 327




Description : Code of the PLMN in the country. It must be defined whenthe MSC does not manage cell global identifiers (CGI).



Object : bsc

Type : DP



A CGI (Cell Global Identifier) is unique within a locationarea. It identifies a cell unambiguously in the PLMNand includes four fields: cellIdentityCode (CI),locationAreaCode (LAC), mobileCountryCode (MCC),and mobileNetworkCode (MNC).


Object : bts

Type : DP



modeModifyMandatory Class 3

Description : Whether a CHANNEL MODE MODIFY message is sent tothe mobile after a directed retry handover in the BSS.

Value range : [used (yes) / not used (no)]

Object : bsc


Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Checks : • [C/M]:The attribute value can only be "used" ifdirected retry handovers are allowed at BSClevel. Refer to the interBscDirectedRetryand intraBs cDirectedRetry entries in theDictionary.

Release : V9

monitoredObjectClass

Description : Class of the serving object for the notifications processed.Lists the possible object classes to be monitored.

Value range : [bsc / signallingPoint / transcoder / pcmCircuit / xtp/ lapdLink / software / bscLog / btsSiteManager /signallingLinkSet / transcoderBoard / bts / signallingLink/ transceiver / powerControl / frequencyHoppingSystem/ adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection /handOverControl / transceiverEquipment / channel /transceiverZone / pcu / pcusn / lsaRc Bsc / lsaRc Tcu /hardware bsc 3G / hardware transcoder 3G / interfacenode / control node / cem / iem / atmRm / sw8kRm / cc /omu / mms / trm / pcmCircuit]

Object : mdWarning

Feature : PM1270 - TDMA based counters

Type : DP


monitoredObjectInstance

Description : Identification of a serving object in the class.

They identify the object that issued the processednotifications. Enter the concerned object identificationsequence.

Object : mdWarning

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 329

monitoredSpecificProblemsList

Description : List of the specific problems taken into account in theprocess.

This parameter filters the processed notifications accordingto the following criteria: cause number, fault number, andprocessor number.

Value range : [(cause, faultNumber) pair]


Type : DP

month

Description : Identifies the month the observation report was created.



Object : Display busiest day of the month report

Type : DP

msBtsDistanceInterCell Class 3

Description : To determine whether inter-bts handovers are allowed ina cell for distance reasons.




Type : DP

msCapWeightActive Class 2

Description : To specify whether the Weight Fair Allocation algorithm isused or not.

Value range : [yes / no]

Object : bts


Default value : yes

Type : DP

Release : V12


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


msLeakRate

Description : This attribute specifies the leak rate parameter for oneGPRS MS with 1 TS. This value is used only once at theMS Bucket creation time on SGSN side. For GPRS, (thatis, if EDGE is not activated in the cell or there is no TDMAthat is EDGE capable in the cell), this value is sent to theSGSN in the FLOW-CONTROL-BVC message as thedefault MS Leak Rate. (60kbps is considered as soon asone EDGE TDMA is activated in the cell).

Value range : [2W, 8 W, 2W + 8 W]

Default value : 2W + 8W

Release : V12

msPowerClassToggle Class 3

Description : MS power class which needs dedicated statistics.

Value range : [2W / 8W / 2W + 8W]

Object : bts

Feature : Advanced Speech Call Items

Default value : 2W + 8W

Type : DP

Release : V15

msRangeMax Class 3

Description : Maximum MS-to-BTS distance beyond which a handovermay be triggered. It can be set to 1 for a microcell and isless than callClearing in all cases.

The attributes ’msRangeMax’ and ’concentAlgoIntMsRange’ must verify ’msRangeMax’ >= ’concentAlgoIntMsRange’.

Value range : [1 to 134] km (non-extended mode),[1 to 120] km (extended mode).


Default value : 34 in non-extended mode, 89 in extended mode

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:msRangeMax < callClearing (associated btsobject attribute)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 331

• [C/M]:The maximum distance is limited to 34 km ifthe extended cell attribute of the associatedbts object is "false".


msTxPwrMax Class 3

Description : Maximum MS transmission power in a serving cell. It isequal to msTxPwrMaxCCH in a GSM 900 network.

Value range : [5 to 43, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 900, GSM-R, E-GSM,GSM 850, GSM 850 - GSM 1900 and GSM 900 - GSM1800 networks)

[0 to 36, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 1800, and GSM 1800 -GSM 900 networks)

[0 to 33] dB (GSM 1900, E-GSM and 1900-850, GSM 850)

Object : bts

Default value : Typical value of 33 dB for GSM 900 handhelds

Default value : lds and 30 dB for GSM 1800 and 1900 handhelds

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:GSM 900 networks: msTxPwrMax =msTxPwrMaxCCH

Note : The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC-R] /[typed by the OMC-R operator] are encoded values. Thecorresponding maximum MS transmission powers in aserving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say:

• [5 to 39] dB (GSM 900 network)

msTxPwrMax2ndBand Class 2

Description : Maximum MS transmission power in the band 1 of thedualband cell depending on the network type (BCCH isonly defined in band 0).

Value range : [0 to 36] for GSM 900 - GSM 1800 (gsmdcs),[5 to 43] for GSM 1800 - GSM 900 (dcsgsm),[0 to 33] for GSM 850 - GSM 1900 (gsm850pcs),[5 to 43] for GSM 1900 - GSM 850 (pcsgsm850),for all in the steps of 2 + value = 33 for GSM 850 - GSM1900 0..43 for other standardIndicator types.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : bts

Default value : Typical value of 33 dB for GSM 900 and GSM 850handhelds, 30 dB for GSM 1800 and 1900


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:464C001 The attribute value must be evenand located between [0 to 36] dB whenthe standardIndicator attribute is equal to"gsmdcs".

• [C/M]:464C002 The attribute value must be oddand located between [5 to 43] dB whenthe standardIndicator attribute is equal to"dcsgsm".

• [C/M]:464C003 The attribute value must be evenand located between [0 to 33] dB when thestandardIndicato r attribute is equal to"gsm850pcs".

• [C/M]:464C004 The attribute value must be oddand located between [5 to 43] dB whenthe standardIndicator attribute is equal to"pcsgsm850".

Note : The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC-R] /[typed by the OMC-R operator] are encoded values. Thecorresponding maximum MS transmission powers in aserving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, it means:



Release : V12

msTxPwrMaxCCH Class 3

Description : Maximum MS transmission power in a cell CCCH.

The BSC relays the information to the mobiles in the AbisCELL MODIFY REQUEST message.

Value range : [[5 to 43, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 900, GSM 850, GSM-R,and GSM 900 - GSM 1800 networks)

[0 to 36, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 1800, and GSM 1800 -GSM 900 networks)

[0 to 33] dB (GSM 1900, 1900-850, and GSM-R networks)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 333

Object : bts

Default value : Typical value of 33 dB for GSM 900 and GSM 850handhelds, 30 dB for GSM 1800 and 1900

Type DP

Remark : If the cell is used as a neighbor cell of another serving cellin the network, msTxPwrMaxCCH must be identical to themsTxPwrMaxCell power defined for the correspondingadjacentCellHandOver object (the values must be checkedby users).

Note : The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC-R] /[typed by the OMC-R operator] are encoded values. Thecorresponding maximum MS transmission powers in aserving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say:


msTxPwrMaxCell Class 3

Description : Maximum MS transmission power in a neighbor cell. It isequal to msTxPwrMaxCCH when the cell is declared as aserving cell on the network (the value must be checked byusers).

Value range : [5 to 43, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 900, GSM-R, E-GSM,GSM 850, GSM 850 - GSM 1900 and GSM 900 - GSM1800 networks)

[0 to 36, by steps of 2] dB (GSM 1800 network and GSM1800 - GSM 900)

[0 to 33, by steps of 2 + value 33] dB (GSM 1900-850networks)


Default value : Typical value of 33 dB for GSM 900 or 850 handhelds and30 dB for GSM 1800 and 1900 handhelds

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Remark : If the cell is used as a neighbor cell of another serving cellin the network, msTxPwrMaxCell should be identical to themsTxPwrMaxCCH power defined for the correspondingadjacentCellHandOver object (the values must be checkedby users).

Notes : • The msTxPwrMax values [displayed by the OMC-R] /[typed by the OMC-R operator] are encoded values.

The corresponding maximum MS transmission powers in aserving cell are compliant to GSM Rec 05.05, that is to say:



multi band reporting Class 3

Description : Minimum number of cells multibanding MSs, report theirradio measurements in each frequency band.

Value range : [the six strongest cells / the strongest cell out band / thetwo strongest cells out band / the three strongest cells outband]

• six strongest allowed cells irrespective of theirfrequency band

• the strongest allowed cell outside the current frequencyband

• the two strongest allowed cells outside the currentfrequency band

• the three strongest allowed cells outside the currentfrequency band

Object : bts

Default value : the six strongest cells

Type : DP

Release : V10

multiple site

Description : Identifier of a multiple site object defined with regard to absc object.



Type : Id


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

M 335

Checks : • [C]:The multiple site object is not created for theparent bsc object.

• [C/M]:The btsSiteManager objects in thebtsSiteManagerList list are created forthe parent bsc object and are not referencedby another multiple site object.

• [M/D]:The multiple site object is created and thecurrent btsSiteManager objects referenced inthe btsSiteMan agerList list are locked.

Release : V8

multipleVocoders Class 1

Description : Whether the BSC is linked to one or more MSCs usingdifferent speech coding protocols.

An MSC uses either the GSM protocol or the JTC protocol."False" means that only the GSM protocol is compatible.


Object : bsc


Type : DP

Notes : • If MSC parameter MULTIPLE_VOCODER_SUP PORT,

(Table OFCVAR) is set to ON (as detailed in NTP < 455 >),then the following BSC parameters must be set to TRUE:

• chosenChannelAsscomp

• chosenChannelHoReq

• chosenChannelHoPerf

• chosenChannelCompL3Info

Release : V8

muxNumber Class 3

Description : pcuSN mux identification

Value range : [noMux / oneMux / twoMux]

Object : pcusn


Type : DP

Release : V12


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Nn3103 Class 3

Description : Maximum number of repetition of a PUAN (Packet UplinkAck/Nack) message.


Object : bts

Default value : 5


Type : DP

Release : V12

n3105max Class 2 (gprsTranscvLockBtsExtendedConf)

Description : Maximum number of consecutive RLC data blocks sentby the PCU with a valid RRBP and not having beenacknowledged by the MS.



Default value : 4


Type : DP

Release : V12

nACCActivation Class 3

Description : Activation of the Network Assisted Cell Change feature.


Object : bts


Feature : Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS

Type : DP

Release : V16


nAvgl Class 3 (gprsAvgParam)

Description : Signal strength filter used for MS output power control.

It specifies the "Interference signal strength filter" constantfor power control. NAVG -I = 2 (k/2) with k = nAvgI.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

N 337

Object : bts

Default value : 0


Type : DP

Release : V12

nAvgT Class 3 (gprsAvgParam)

Description : Signal strength filter used for MS output power control,which specifies the "Signal strength filter period" for powercontrol in packet transfer mode. TAVG -T = 2 (k/2) /6 with k =nAvgT.


Object : bts

Default value : 0


Type : DP


Release : V12

nAvgW Class 3 (gprsAvgParam)

Description : Signal strength filter used for MS output power control,which specifies the "Signal strength filter period" for powercontrol in packet idle mode. TAVG -W = 2 (k/2) /6 with k =nAvgW.


Object : bts


Type : DP


Release : V12

Note : Tavg_w has no impact on frequency measurements andcomputations done by the MS, which is always equal to thefrequency of paging blocks decoding.

nbOfFramesForFER Class 3

Description : Number of frames taken into account for FER(Frame Erasure Rate) evaluation.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : bts

Type : DP


Default value : 0

Release : V14

Note : This parameteris mandatory. Itis only availablefor BSC 3000V15 and later,and applicablesince BSC 3000V15.1.1.

nbOfRepeat Class 2

Description : Maximum number of times that paging messages arerepeated to mobiles that belong to the same pagingsub-group.

It is set to "3" in former BSS versions (static configurationparameter).

The following inequality, that is not checked by the system,must be true (refer to these entries in the Dictionary):

retransDuration ≥ (delayBetweenRetrans + 1) xnbOfRepeat


Object : bts

Default value : 3

Type : DP

Release : V8

nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation Class 3


Value range : [0]

Object : bts


Default value : 0


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

N 339

Type : DP

Release : V12

nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation Class 3


Value range : [0]

Object : bts

Default value : 0


Type : DP

Release : V12

nbrTch Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList)

Description : Number of TSs used for each Agprs PCM link.

Value range : [1 to 30] for E1 configuration,[1 to 23] for T1 configuration.

Object : pcu



Type : DP

Release : V12


nCapacityFRRequestedCodec Class 3

Description : Number of 12.2 codec mode requested to trigger a capacityhandover (FR to HR).

This attribute can only be modified if the ’handover’ controlobject instance is unlocked.



Default value : 44

Type : DP

Release : V14



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


nCHPosition Class2

Description : Defines the number of blocks and position of the first blockfor NCH.

Value range : [0 block1 block, first block 01 block, first block 11 block, first block 21 block, first block 31 block, first block 41 block, first block 51 block, first block 62 blocks, first block 02 blocks, first block 12 blocks, first block 22 blocks, first block 32 blocks, first block 42 blocks, first block 53 blocks, first block 03 blocks, first block 13 blocks, first block 23 blocks, first block 33 blocks, first block 44 blocks, first block 04 blocks, first block 14 blocks, first block 24 blocks, first block 35 blocks, first block 05 blocks, first block 15 blocks, first block 26 blocks, first block 06 blocks, first block 17 blocks, first block 0]

Object : bts

Feature : (GSM-R V12)

Default value : 0 block

Type : DP

Release : V12

Note : nCHPosition - noOfBlocksForAccessGrant relationaccording to channelType attribute


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

N 341

channelType nCHPosition noOfBlocksForAccessGrant

mainBCCH 1 block, first block 0 to 62 blocks, first block 0 to 53 blocks, first block 0 to 44 blocks, first block 0 to 35 blocks, first block 0 to 26 blocks, first block 0 to 17 blocks, first block 0

>= 1>= 2>= 3>= 4>= 5>= 6= 7

mainBCCHCombined 1 block, first block 01 block, first block 12 blocks, first block 0

1 or 2= 12= 12

networkColourCode Class 3

Description : Color code of the mobile network. The (BCC,NCC) pairforms the cell BSIC.



Type : DP


networkColourCode Class 2

Description : Color code of the mobile network. It allows countries withcommon borders to allocate BCCs and BCCH frequenciesat their own convenience in international border areas. The(BCC,NCC) pair forms the cell BSIC.

The information is broadcasted on the cell SCH.

The Base Station Identity Code (BSIC) is a six-bit code:bits 6-5-4 = NCC (PLMN color code), bits 3-2-1 = BCC(Base station color code). Outside border areas, theNCC bits can be used to increase the number of BCCpossibilities.


Object : bts

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



Remark : The NCC should not be confused with the MCC (MobileCountry Code) nor the MNC (Mobile Network Code), whichare part of the CGI (Cell Global Identifier).


networkIndicator Class 1

Description : Identifier of the SS7 network.

Value range : [nationalReserved / national / internationalReserved /international]


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]: For BSC 12000HC, the only valueaccepted by the system is "national".

For 3G, any value in the value range canbe used.

new name

Description : New name to give to the short message. It is different fromthe current short message identifier.


Object : short message - Rename

Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It is different from the current short messageidentifier.

• [A]:It does not exist on the OMC-R.

new password 1st try

Description : User’s new password to use in the next login request. Itbegins with a letter, contains at least one non-alphabeticalcharacter among the first eight characters, and is casesensitive. It is not displayed.

Value range : [6 characters min]


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

N 343

Object : user profile - Change password

Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It begins with a letter and contains onenon-alphanumerical character among the firsteight characters.

• [A]:It is at least six-character long.

• [A]:It is different from the N previous occurrences(N is set in static configuration data).

new password 2nd try

Description : Second definition of the user’s new password that willnot be validated unless it is exactly the same as newpassword 1st try. It is not displayed.

Refer to the new password 1st try entry in the dictionary.

The new password is validated when opening a newsession.



Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:It begins with a letter and contains onenon-alphanumerical character among the firsteight characters.

• [A]:It is at least six-character long.

• [A]:It is different from the N previous occurrences(N is set in static configuration data).

new power control algorithm Class 3

Description : Algorithm used by the BTS to control power in a cell.

The "step by step" value refers to the standard powercontrol algorithm.

The "one shot" value refers to the advanced power controlalgorithm.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


The "enhanced one shot" value refers to theadvanced power algorithm used in connection withthe handOverControl object rxLevHreqaveBeg attributeused in the early handover mechanism.

Value range : [step by step / one shot / enhanced one shot]

Object : bts

Feature : Fast power control at TCH assignment (TF975 - V12)

Default value : one shot

Type : DP

Notes : • The "enhanced one shot" attribute value can only applyto non mixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.

• Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.

Release : V9

next execution time

Description : Date and time of next job run.

Value range : [<date> <time>]

Object : job - Display

Condition : This parameter is significant and displayed only when a jobrun periodicity is defined.

Type : DD

nFRRequestedCodec Class 3

Description : This attribute modifies the "n" parameter in the AMR fullrate "(n,p) voting" mechanism used for FR->HR handovers.This parameter is used by all AMR FR HO not onlyFR=>HR.




Default value : 24

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

N 345

Release : V14


nHRRequestedCodec Class 3

Description : This attribute modifies the "n" parameter in the AMR halfrate "(n,p) voting" mechanism used for FR->HR handovers.This parameter is used by all AMR HR HO not onlyFR=>HR.




Default value : 34

Type : DP

Release : V14


night intervention

Description : Type of action associated with an alarm criterion in thenighttime configuration.



Type : DP

noOfBlocksForAccessGrant Class 2

Description : Number of CCCH blocks not used for paging.

A BCCH is combined when it shares the same radio timeslot with four SDCCHs which can include a CBCH (referto the channelType entry in the Dictionary). In that case,the attribute value is no greater than to 2 (the value mustbe checked by users).

Refer also to the nCHPosition entry in this dictionary.

Value range : [0 to 2] if the cell uses a combined BCCH,[1 to 7] otherwise.

"0" means that PCH blocks are used for sending immediateassignment messages as and when needed.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : bts

Default value : 2

Type : DP

• [M]:This number is greater than zero if thechannelType of one of the channel objectsdependent on the bts object is "sdcch8CBCH"(refer to this entry in the Dictionary).

• [M]:This number is strictly greater than zero if theSysInfo 2Q and/or SysInfo 13 on extendedBCCH features are activated.

Checks :

• [M]:If Bit 9 (SI13) or Bit 10 (SI2Quater) in valueof label 64 in bscDataConfig table is set, thevalue of NoOfBlocksForAccessGrant in the btsobject cannot be set to 0.

noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging Class 2

Description : Number of occurrences of a paging sub-group.

The greater this number, the greater the number of pagingsub-groups.

Value range : [2 to 9] multi-frame of fifty-one frames

Object : bts

Default value : 6

Type : DP

notAllowedAccessClasses Class 3

Description : List of mobile access classes that are forbidden in the cell,except case of congestion.

This attribute, together with the emergencyCallRestrictedattribute, allows to control access to a cell according to theservice classes authorized.

Value range : List of mobile access class:

• [0 to 9]: user classes

• [11 to 15]: operator classes

Object : bts

Default value : Leave the field empty


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

N 347

Type : DP

Remark : General conditions mobiles are granted access to a cell areallotted at subscription time.

notification number

Description : Reference number of the associated notification

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : alarmRecord,mdScanReportRecord,observationFileReadyRecord,stateChangeRecord,traceFileReadyRecord,traceLogRecord.

Type : DP

notification type

Description : This is to select messages specific to the type ofnotifications.


Value range : [attributeValueChange / communicationsAlarm /environmentalAlarm / equipmentAlarm / objectCreation /objectDeletion / processingErrorAlarm / qualityOfServiceAlarm / stateChange / specific]


Type : DP

numberOfJokerDS0 Class 2

Description : Number of jokers DS0 associated to one TDMA. Thedescription applies to the Abis interface.



Feature : Data Backhaul Evolution (19174)

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]: The numberOfJokerDS0 allowed values are:

• [0..4] for S8000 BCF BTS model

• [0..6] for S8000 CBCF, S12000 and e-cell BTS models

• [0..8] for BTS 18000 BTS models


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Release : V15

Note : The recommended value is linked to target QoS and radioconditions. The value may be set to a non-zero valueeven if EDGE is not activated in corresponding TDMA.Resources will be reserved and unused in that case.However, it may help to properly configure a TDMA beforeactivating EDGE.

number of records

Description : Number of records.


Type : DP

Remark : The attributes of the log objects are not managed by theusers.

number of large reuse data channels Class 3

Description : Mean number of logical channels belonging to the largerfrequency reuse pattern and used at the same time for datacommunications which is used for cell tiering.

Value range : [-16 to +16]

Object : handOvercontrol

Type : DP

Release : V15

numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts

Description : Number of ’enabled’ HDLC ports in the TMU or IEMmodule.

Operational State of the HDLC channels in the TMU/IEMmodules.

Operational State of the HDLC channels in the TMU/LSAmodules. The global Operational State of the HDLC featureis given by the number of ports/channels with an individualoperational state set to ’enabled’.

This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. It is setto NULL at ’iem’ or ’tmu’ object instance creation. Valuechanges are not notified to the Manager.

This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

N 349

Object : iem, tmu


Type : DD

Release : V13

Note : BSC 3000 V16: this parameter no more exists.

numberOfPwciSamples Class 3

Description : Minimum number of PwCI samples required to reach areliable distribution. This attribute allows the configurationof CellTieringConfiguration at bts level.




Default value : 20

Type : DP

Release : V12


numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans Class 3

Description : Number of radio time slots RACH transmission accessesare spread in a random manner to avoid collisions.


In the event of non-system response, the mobile renewsthe RACH bursts after a randomly defined period varyingwith numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans.

MS Phase 1


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


The time T between two transmissions of the same RACHburst is the following:

T= [D + (N+1) x 4.615]ms where

• D is the maximum system response pending time:

• N is the randomly number generated by the mobile inthe range [0 to numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans-1]

• 4.615 ms is the time occupied by a time slot.

MS Phase 2

The time T between two transmissions of the same RACHburst is the following (whichever is the BCCH, combinedor not):

T= 4.615 x [S+(N + 1)] ms where

• S is a parameter depending on the BCCH configurationand on the value of numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans (seetable hereafter)

• N is the randomly number generated by the mobile inthe range [0 to numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans-1]

• 4.615 ms is the time occupied by a time slot.

NumberOfSlotsSpreadTrans S on notcombinedBCCH

S on combinedBCCH

3, 8, 14, 50 55 41

4, 9, 16 76 52

5, 10, 20 109 58


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

N 351

NumberOfSlotsSpreadTrans S on notcombinedBCCH

S on combinedBCCH

6, 11, 25 163 86

7, 12, 32 217 11

Value range : [3 to 12 / 14 / 16 / 20 / 25 / 32 / 50] time slots

Object : bts

Default value : 32

Type : DP

Note : The choice will depend on the quantities of GSM phase 1and GSM phase 2 mobiles.

For Mobile phase 1, numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans = 50leads to the lower double allocation rate.

For Mobile phase 2, numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans = 6, 7,11, 12, 25, 32 (respectively 5, 10, 20) for BCCH combined(respectively BCCH not combined) leads to the lowerdouble allocation rate.

Therefore, for a network that handles a combination of bothtypes of mobiles, numberOfSlotsSpreadTrans should beset to 32 (default value).

numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion Class 3

Description : Minimum number of free TCHs triggering the beginning ofthe TCH congestion phase and the beginning of the trafficoverload condition.


Object : bts

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]: numberOfTCHFree BeforeCongestion ≤numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion

Release : V9


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion Class 3

Description : A threshold giving the number of free TCHs, which triggersthe end of TCH congestion phase and the end of the trafficoverload condition (additionally, this parameter takes intoaccount the preempted PDTCH).


Object : bts

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]: numberOfTCHFreeToEndCongestion ≥numberOfTCHFreeBeforeCongestion

Release : V9

numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion Class 3

Description : Maximum number of TCH allocation requests queuedwhich triggers the beginning of the TCH congestion phaseand the beginning of the traffic overload condition.


Object : bts

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]: numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion ≥numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion

Release : V9

numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion Class 3

Description : Maximum number of TCH allocation requests queuedtriggering the end of the TCH congestion phase and theend of the traffic overload condition.


Object : bts

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]: numberOfTCHQueuedToEndCongestion ≤numberOfTCHQueuedBeforeCongestion

Release : V9


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

O 353

nUsfExt Class 3

Description : USF frequency during the second phase of the extendedUL period

Value range : [0..100] (1 unit = 20 ms)

Note : Even if the nUsfExt parameter value is set to 0 or 1, theperiod remains equal to 40ms (nUsfExt=2); 2 being theminimum parameter value for PCU.

Object : bts


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V15

nwExtUtbf Class 3

Description : Whether the Extended UpLink TBF feature is enabled ornot.


Object : bts



Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:The following flag combination is prohibited:nwExtUtbf = enabled and fullDlKa =disabled

Release : V15

OobjectClass

Description : Q3 object class

Value range : [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection /alarmRecord / bsc / bscCounterList / bscMdInterface /bts / btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel / efd /frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl / lapdLink /log / md / mdScanner / mdScanReportRecord / mdWarning/ network / observationFileReadyRecord / pcmCircuit/ powerControl / signallingLink / signallingLinkSet/ signallingPoint / software / stateChangeRecord /traceControl / traceFileReadyRecord / traceLogRecord/ transceiver / transceiverEquipment / transceiverZone /transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp]


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



Type : DP

objectInstance

Description : Scope of an alarm criteria. It covers all network objectswhen undefined.


Type : DP

object Filter List

Description : To select messages issued by one or several objects, andtheir subtree (optional).

The object Filter List parameter includes the followingcomponents: objects and scope.

Click the Modify button to enter the names of the objectsto be selected.

The scope enables to select the subtree of an object.

Value range : objects [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection/ alarmRecord / bsc / bscCounterList / bscMdInterface/ bts / btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel /efd / frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl /lapdLink / log / md / mdScanner / mdScanReportRecord /mdWarning / network / observationFileReadyRecord / omc/ pcmCircuit / pcu / pcusn / powerControl / signallingLink/ signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software /stateChangeRecord / traceControl / traceFileReadyRecord/ traceLogRecord / transceiver / transceiverEquipment /transceiverZone / transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp]


Type : DP

Release : V12


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

O 355

objects

Description : To select messages issued by one or several objects (50objects max.), enter the concerned object class(es). Thisfield must be empty to select all object classes.


If a class is selected, the user may select one or moreobjects created in that class. If no object is selected, allmessages issued by all objects created in the class aredisplayed.

Value range : [adjacentCellHandOver / adjacentCellReselection /alarmRecord / bsc / bscCounterList / bscMdInterface/ bts / btsSiteManager / callPathTrace / channel /efd / frequencyHoppingSystem / handOverControl /lapdLink / log / md / mdScanner / mdScanReportRecord /mdWarning / network / observationFileReadyRecord / omc/ pcmCircuit / pcu / pcusn / powerControl / signallingLink/ signallingLinkSet / signallingPoint / software /stateChangeRecord / traceControl / traceFileReadyRecord/ traceLogRecord / transceiver / transceiverEquipment /transceiverZone / transcoder / transcoderBoard / xtp]


Type : DP

objects assigned

Description : List of the BSSs assigned to the relay. Fill in the list withbsc object identifiers or names.


Object : relay

Type : DP

Remark : A BSS can be assigned to several relays at the same time.

observation type

Description : Type of the observation.

Value range : [general Statistic / fast Statistic / real Time / diagnostic]


Type : DP

Release : V11


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


observation type

Description : Type of the observation.

Value range : [Observation real time / Observation fast statistic /Performance monitor]


Type : DP

Release : V11

observed counters

Description : List of counters (Q3 names) chosen for observation.


Value range : [list of Q3 counter names]

Type : DP

Release : V11

observed object class

Description : Class of object the user observes.

Value range : [bsc / btsSiteManager / bts / pcmCircuit / adjacentCellHandOver / transceiverZone / transceiverEquipment / omu / tmu/ cc / cem / pcmPort / signallingLink / channel / omc / md /machine]


Type : DP

Release : V11

occupationState

Description : Determines whether the PCM TS used by the terrestrialcircuit is occupied by an SS7 channel.

This attribute is significant provided the xtp object isunlocked.

[preempted / notPreempted]

• preempted........The terrestrial circuit is mappedon a time slot occupied by an SS7channel on the Ater interface.

Value range :

• notPreempted.....The PCM time slot is available forthe traffic.

Object : xtp

Type : DD


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

O 357

offsetLoad Class 3

Description : Load offset applied by the bsc to the cell selection process.



Feature : Handover decision according to adjacent cell priority andload (TF716 - V12)

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]: This attribute must be in the range [0 to 63].

Notes : • When set to "0", no offset is effective.

• This parameter is set to "0" for the cells that do notbelong to the related bsc object.

Release : V12

offsetNeighbouringCell Class 3

Description : This attribute modifies the offset linked to the neighboringcell, used to increase the HO margin, in some specificcases

This attribute can only be modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance is unlocked

Value range : Int [-63 to 63] dB


Default value : 2

Type : DP

The following tables show for each case, the ho marginvalue and the averaging windows taking account into thePBGT handover mechanism according to:

• the MS type-fast or slow mobile or managed by ahopping TCH

• the number of measurement of the serving cellcompared with the normal averaging window

• the number of measurement of the neighboring cellcompared with the normal averaging window

Release : V14

Note : This parameter is available for BSC 12000HC V15 andBSC 3000 V14 and V15.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Table 1Mobile type: SFH MS

cell Meas neighboringcell meas

cell meas avg neighboring cell avg Ho Margin

< < RxLevHreqAveBeg

RxNCellHreqAveBeg HoMargin+offsetNeighbouringCell

< ≥ RxLevHreqAveBeg

RxNCellHreqAve HoMargin

≥ < RxLevHreqAve RxNCellHreqAve Beg HoMargin+offsetNeighbouringCell-servingfactorOffset

≥ ≥ RxLevHreqAve RxNCellHreqAve HoMargin-servingfactorOffset

Table 2Mobile type: slow non SFH MS

cell Measneighboringcell meas


< < RxLevHreqAveBeg

RxNCellHreqAveBeg HoMargin+hoMarginBeg

< ≥ RxLevHreqAveBeg

RxNCellHreqAve HoMargin+hoMarginBeg

≥ < RxLevHreqAve RxNCellHreqAveBeg HoMargin+offsetNeighbouringCell

≥ ≥ RxLevHreqAve RxNCellHreqAve HoMargin

Table 3Mobile type: fast non SFH MS

cell Measneighboringcell meas


- - RxLevHreqAveBeg RxNCellHreqAve Beg HoMargin

with:

• < : number of available measurements is less than thenormal window,

• ≥ : number of available measurements is greater thanthe normal window.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

O 359

offsetPriority Class 3

Description : Priority offset applied by the bsc to the cell selectionprocess.



Feature : Handover decision according to adjacent cell priority andload (TF716 - V12)

Default value : 1

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:This attribute must be in the range [1 to 5].

Release : V12

Note : "1" is the highest priority.

Description: Priority offset applied by the bsc to the cell selectionprocess

Value range: 1...5


Default value: 1

Type: DP

Checks:

Release: V17


oMC notification number

Description : To select OMC-R manager notifications identified by agiven number.

Do not fill in this criterion if not to be selected.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : DP

omu

Description : Managed object class representing the Mass Memory Unit(hard disk) board.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : omu


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : Id

Notes : • This parameter is significant only when the BTS usesthe standard "step by step power control algorithm.

• This parameter is only available for BSC 12000HC.

omuId

Description : Identifier of the ’omu’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified and is relevant for BSC 3000 and TCU3000.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : omu

Type : DP

Release : V13

on error

Description : Whether to stop running commands when an applicativeerror is detected by the system (stop).

Value range : [stop / continue]


Type : DP

onlyExtUtbf Class 3

Description : Whether only Extended UpLink TBF mode is supported.


Object : bts



Type : DP

Release : V15

Note : The recommended value is ’enable’.

onePhaseAccess Class 2

Description : One phase access activation parameter.

Value range : BSC V15: int [0 to 1]BSC V16: [disabled / enabled / edgeEnabled /gprsEdgeEnabled]


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

O 361

Object : bts

Feature : GPRS TBF establishment improvement: one phase access(15015)


Type : DP

• [C/M]:Edge must be activated at cell level(egprsServices must be equal to enabled ) ifonePhaseAccess is equal to edgeEnabled orgprsEdgeEnabled.

Checks :

• [C/M]:Edge must be activated (edgeDataServiceType must be equal to full capabilities arerequested) on BCCH TDMA (TDMA havinglowest priority) if onePhaseAccess is equal toedgeEnabled or gprsEdgeEnabled

Notes : • "0" stands for disabled "One phase access".

• "1" stands for enabled "One phase access".

Release : V15

onePhaseDnMsCapability Class 3

Description : Default number of DL TS to be considered for MSattempting a 1 phase access.


Object : bts

Feature : GPRS TBF establishment improvement: one phase access(15015)

Default value : 1

Type : DP

Release : V15

Note : Values 0 and 9 to 255 are interpreted as default value bythe PCU.

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the atmRm objectare as follows:

administrative State operationalState availabilityStatus

{} disabled notInstalled


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



{} disabled {}

{} disabled failed

{} disabled dependency

{} enabled {}

Object : atmRm


Type : DD

Release : V13

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the bsc object areas follows:

administrativeState

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

locked disabled {} The BSC has just beencreated or locked.

unlocked disabled {} The BSC is in restart or BDAbuild phase.

unlocked disabled dependency The BSS/OMC-R link is notcreated or the BSC databaseis not built.

unlocked disabled failed The BSC refuses everycommand, including resetting.

unlocked enabled {} The BSS/OMC-R link and theassociations with the BSCare established, and the BSCdatabase is built.

Object : bsc

Type : DD


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

O 363

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the bscMdInterfaceobject are as follows:

administrativeState

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

locked disabled {} The BSS/OMC-R link hasbeen locked by a user.

unlocked disabled {} The link has just been createdand the connection is notestablished yet (initial state).

unlocked disabled dependency The link is down.

unlocked disabled failed The connection cannot bereestablished.

unlocked enabled {} The connection is established.


Type : DD

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the bts object are asfollows:

administrativeState

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

locked disabled {} The cell has just been createdor locked.

unlocked disabled dependency The radio site is not workingor the TDMA frames are notcorrectly configured.

unlocked enabled {} The radio site is working andthe number of TDMA framescorrectly configured for thecell is reached.

shutting Down enabled busy The radio cell is beingreleased following a softrelease command.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : bts

Type : DD

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the btsSiteManagerobject are as follows:

administrativeState

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

locked disabled {} The site has just been createdor locked.

unlocked disabled {} Downloading in the site BCFis in-progress.

unlocked disabled dependency The PCM link used for the siteLAPD signaling is faulty.

unlocked disabled failed Loss of Level 3 dialogue orconfiguration Abis messagenot correctly acknowledged ordownloading problem

unlocked enabled {} The PCM is available forLAPD signaling, the Level 3dialogue is established, andthe configuration and Abisconnection with the site BCFare OK.


Type : DD

operationalState

Description : ISO state. "disabled" means the BSC cannot send themessages to the OMC-R agent.


The state parameter combinations for the callPathTraceobject are as follows:


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

O 365

administrativeState

operationalState usageState

Meaning

locked enabled idle Call path tracing has juststarted in the BSC or hasbeen stopped by the operator.

unlocked enabled busy Call path tracing is in-progressand messages are forwardedto the OMC-R agent.

unlocked enabled idle Call path tracing is stopped(end-of-session criterion istrue).

unlocked disabled Call path tracing is in-progressbut messages are notforwarded to the OMC-Ragent.


Type : DD

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the cc object are asfollows:

operationalState availabilityStatus

disabled notInstalled

disabled {}

disabled failed

disabled dependency

enabled online

Object : cc


Type : DD

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the cem object areas follows:


{} disabled notInstalled

{} disabled {}

{} disabled failed


{} enabled {}

Object : cem


Type : DD

Release : V13

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the controlNodeobject are as follows:


{} disabled {}

{} disabled failed

{} disabled degraded

{} enabled online



Type : DD

Release : V13

operationalState




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

O 367

Object : efd

Type : DD

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the g3BscEqp objectare as follows:


{} disabled {}

{} enabled {}


Object : g3BscEqp


Type : DD

Release : V13

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the g3Transcoderobject are as follows:


{} disabled {}

{} disabled failed


{} enabled degraded

{} enabled {}



Type : DD

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the iem object areas follows:


{} disabled not installed

{} disabled {}

{} disabled failed


{} enabled {}

Object : iem


Type : DD

Release : V13

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the interfaceNodeobject are as follows:


disabled dependency

disabled {}

enabled degraded

disabled {}



Type : DD

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

O 369

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the lapdLink objectare as follows:

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

disabled dependency Loss of Level 1

disabled failed SICD board faulty or TSCB faulty (Ater LAPDlink) or BSCB faulty (Abis LAPD link)

enabled {} The Level 1 is established and the SICDs,RCBs, and related internal PCMs are working.

Object : lapdLink

Note : This parameter is only available for lapdLink OML andlapdLink RSL objects on BSC 12000HC.

Type : DD

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the log object are asfollows:

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

disabled {} The disk message saving partition is full(current alarm log).

disabled logFull The disk message saving partition is full(current observation or trace log).

enabled {} The messages are actually saved in thepartition.

Object : log

Type : DD


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the lsaRc object areas follows:


disabled dependency

disabled {}

enabled degraded

disabled {}

Object : lsaRc


Type : DD

Release : V13

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the mdScannerobject are as follows:

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

disabled {} The observation is running but the messagescannot be forwarded to the OMC-R agent.

disabled {offDuty} The observation is stopped and the messagescannot be forwarded to the OMC-R agent.

enabled {} The observation is running and the messagesare forwarded to the OMC-R agent.

enabled {offDuty} The observation is stopped and the messagesare forwarded to the OMC-R agent.

Object : mdScanner

Type : DD


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

O 371

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the mms object areas follows:


locked {} {}

Object : mms


Type : DD

Release : V13

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the omu object areas follows:


locked {} {}

Object : omu


Type : DD

Release : V13

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the pcmCircuit objectare as follows:

administrativeState

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

locked disabled {} The PCM has just beencreated or locked.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


administrativeState

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

unlocked disabled dependency The TCU is faulty (A interfacePCMs).

unlocked disabled failed The DDTI board or the internalPCM partner is faulty, or theconnection is down.

unlocked enabled {} The DDTI board and theinternal PCM partner areworking and the connection isestablished.

Object : pcmCircuit

Type : DD

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the pcu object areas follows:

administrativeState

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

locked disabled {} The PCU has just beencreated or locked.

unlocked disabled dependency The Level 2 is not establishedor the connection with theBSC is down (external PCM).

unlocked enabled {} The PCU is working.

Object : pcu


Type : DD

Release : V12

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the pcu object areas follows:


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

O 373

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

disabled {} The pcusn has just been created.

disabled dependency The pcusn object does not work, or the PCMlink does not work.

enabled {} The pcusn object is working.

Object : pcusn


Type : DD

Release : V12


operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the signallingLinkobject are as follows:

administrativeState

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

locked disabled {} The SS7 link has just beencreated or locked.

unlocked disabled dependency The PCM carrying the SS7link is faulty or there is noMTP2 message between theBSC and the MSC.

unlocked disabled failed The CCS7 board is faulty.

unlocked enabled {} The PCM and CCS7 boardare working and MTP2messages are exchangedbetween the BSC and theMSC.


Type : DD


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the sw8kRm objectare as follows:


{} disabled not installed

{} disabled {}

{} disabled failed


{} enabled {}

Object : sw8kRm


Type : DD

Release : V13

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the tmu object areas follows:


locked disabled not installed

unlocked disabled {}

{} disabled failed


{} enabled degraded

{} enabled {}

Object : tmu


Type : DD

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

O 375

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the traceControlobject are as follows:

administrative State

operationalState

Meaning

locked enabled Call tracing has not started or has beenstopped, and the messages are forwarded tothe OMC-R agent.

locked disabled Call tracing has been stopped and themessages cannot be forwarded to the OMC-Ragent.

unlocked enabled Call tracing is in-progress in the BSC and themessages are forwarded to the OMC-R agent.

unlocked disabled Call tracing is in-progress but the messagescannot be forwarded to the OMC-R agent.


Type : DD

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the transceiver objectare as follows:

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

disabled dependency The parent cell is not working or no TRX/DRXis available for the TDMA frame.

disabled failed The BTS has refused the TDMA frameconfiguration or is using the partneredTRX/DRX for BCCH filling purposes.

enabled {} The parent cell is working, a TRX/DRX isavailable for the TDMA frame, and the BTShas accepted the TDMA frame configuration.


Type : DD


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the transceiverEquipment object are as follows:

administrativeState

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

locked disabled {} The TRX/DRX has just beencreated or locked.

unlocked disabled {} Downloading in the TRX/DRXis in-progress.

unlocked disabled dependency The parent radio site or theparent cell or the PCM linkpartner is not working.

unlocked disabled failed The TRX/DRX is assigned toBCCH filling by the BTS orloss of Level 3 dialogue orAbis configuration messagenot correctly acknowledged ordownloading problem or statusregression.

unlocked enabled {} The parent cell is working,a PCM is available to theTRX/DRX, and the Level 3dialogue is established.

shutting Down enabled {} The TRX/DRX is beingreleased following a softrelease command.


Type : DD

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the transcoder objectare as follows:


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

O 377

administrativeState

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

locked disabled {} The TCU has just beencreated or locked.

unlocked disabled dependency The SICD, RCB, TSCB,or internal PCM partneris faulty or the Level 2is not established or theconnection with the BSC isdown (external PCM).

unlocked enabled {} The TCU is working.

Object : transcoder

Type : DD

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the transcoderBoardobject are as follows:

administrativeState

operationalState

availabilityStatus

Meaning

locked disabled {} The TCB has just beencreated or locked.

unlocked disabled {} Downloading in the TCB is inprogress.

unlocked disabled dependency The parent TCU is notworking.

unlocked disabled failed The UTE board or internalPCM partner is faulty ordownloading problem or asevere error was detected.

unlocked enabled {} The TCB is working.


Type : DD


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the trm object are asfollows:


locked disabled not installed

unlocked disabled {}

{} disabled failed


{} enabled {}

Object : trm


Type : DD

Release : V13

operationalState



The state parameter combinations for the xtp object are asfollows:

administrativeState

operationalState usage State

availabilityStatus

Meaning

locked disabled idle {} The CIC hasjust beencreated orlocked.

unlocked disabled idle dependency The PCMlink partneris faulty.

unlocked disabled idle failed The CIC ispreempted.

unlocked enabled idle {} The CIC isworking andtraffic-free.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

O 379

administrativeState

operationalState usage State

availabilityStatus

Meaning

unlocked enabled busy {} The CIC isworking andtraffic-busy.

shutting Down enabled busy {} The CICis beingreleasedfollowing asoft releasecommand.

Object : xtp

Type : DD

otherServicesPriority Class 3

Description : An index in the table allocPriorityTable for a TCH allocationrequest (in signaling mode) whose cause is "otherservices".



Object : bts

Default value : 17

Type : DP

output classes

Description : List of authorized output classes defining a terminal outputdomain. Output classes grant access to various types ofdata.

Value range : [login window / OMC-R browser / alarm window /performance monitor]

When the "login window" class is authorized, the "Login"window is automatically displayed on the terminal screenoutside work sessions.

Object : terminal profile

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


output classes

Description : List of authorized output classes defining a user’s outputdomain. Output classes grant access to various types ofdata.

Value range : [OMC-R browser / alarm window / performance monitor/ command file manager / security manager / SMS-CBmanager / description window / job scheduler window /alarm log window / system session log window / call traceswindow / Unix window / notification log window / notificationwindow / relay manager / alarm criteria]

The "notification log window" class gives access to thesystem notification log, while the "notification window" classgives access to the user notification log.


Type : DP

owner

Description : Name of the user creating the command file on theOMC-R.



Type : DP

PpacketAckTime Class 3


• dwAckTime

• upAckTime

The deactivation value is 64 for both of them.


Release : V12


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 381

packetFlowContext Class 3


• pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection

• pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection





• pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold

• pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold

• pfcPreemptionRatioGold

• pfcPreemptionRatioSilver

• pfcRtDowngradeAllowed

• pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold

• pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold

• pfcT6

• pfcT8

• pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl

• pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl


These attributes have no effect on the BSS if thepfcActivation parameter is disabled.


Feature : BSS Packet Flow Context

Type : DP

Release : V16

Notes : • This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC3000 only.

• This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContext attribute.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


packetSiStatus Class 3

Description : Activation of the System Information Status feature in thecell.


Object : bts


Feature : Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS

Type : DP

Release : V16


pagingOnCell Class 3

Description : Enables or disables paging requests in a cell.


Object : bts


Type : DP

Release : V9

pan Class 3


• panInc

• panDec

• panMax


Release : V12

panDec Class 3 (pan)

Description : The MS counter N3102 is decremented by panDec eachtime PUAN timer expires


Object : bts


Default value : 0


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 383

Type : DP

Release : V12

Note : If the MS counter equals "0", an abnormal release isperformed.

panInc Class 3 (pan)

Description : The MS counter N3102 is incremented by panInc eachtime a PUAN message which allows the transmit window togo forward is received.


Object : bts


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V12


panMax Class 3 (pan)

Description : Maximum value of the counter N3102 (used in case ofblock acknowledgment time out), set by the MS at eachcell reselection.


Object : bts


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V12



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


parameter(s)

Description : List of parameters to define when running the commandfile.

Their generic format is $XXX, where $ identifiessuch a parameter and XXX is a string of uppercase,alphanumerical characters that does not contain spaces.


Type : DP

partialRecordCriteriaType Class 2

Description : Criterion that defines the type of partial records to generatein the BSC.

Value range : [event type / numbered / timed / no partial]

• event type ........The BSC generates partialrecords each time a handoveris successful (partialRecordCriteriaEvent-Type ="handover").

• numbered ........The BSC generates partialrecords every <N> successfulhandovers (partialRecordCriteriaNb-Event = [1 to 64]).

• timed ............The BSC generates partialrecords every <N> seconds(partialRecord-Criteria-Timer= [1 to 60]).

• no partial ........The BSC does not generatepartial records.

If "no partial" is selected, trace data are only recorded atthe end of each traced call. If the traceControl object islocked before the end of a call, all related data are lost.


Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:The traceControl object is locked.

A traceControl object is created in locked state. Unlock theobject to start collecting trace data in the related BSC.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 385

partialRecordCriteriaEventType

Description : Create traceControl. Select this criterion whenpartialRecordCriteriaType is equal to "Event type".

Value range : handover

Type : DP

partialRecordCriteriaNbEvent

Description : Create traceControl. Enter the number of events whenpartialrecordCriteriaType is equal to "Numbered".


Type : DP

partialrecordCriteriaTimer

Description : This parameter should be set to "Hand over" whenpartialRecordCriteriaType is equal to "Event type".


Type : DP

particular intervention

Description : Type of action associated with an alarm criteria in thespecific configuration.



Type : DP

password

Description : User’s current password as defined in the user’s profile. Itis not displayed.



Type : DP

password

Description : User’s password. It begins with a letter, contains at leastone non-alphabetical character among the first eightcharacters, and is case sensitive.

Value range : [6 characters min]

Object : user profile - Create/Set


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The password begins with a letter and containsone non-alphanumerical character among thefirst eight characters.

• [C/M]:The password is at least six-character long.

password duration

Description : Maximum time during which the user’s current passwordis valid.

Value range : [2 to 2147483646] days

When a password validity duration runs out, the passwordmust be changed on opening the next work session.The user’s access to MMI commands is barred until thepassword is changed. Refer to the password status entry.


Type : DP

Note : It is possible for this parameter to take on an infinite value.

If so, the password will not expire.

pcmCircuit

Description : Identifier of a pcmCircuit object defined with regard to absc object (Abis, Ater, Lb, A_Lb, or Agprs interface). It isrelated to the number of the DDTI board to which the PCMdescribed link is physically connected in the BSC.

PCM links are identified by the DDTI boards to whichthey are connected in the BSC. A PCM link connected toDDTI board no.i has a reference equal to "2i" or "2i+1"(each board manages two links at a time). See NTP <22 >, which gives the relationship between the number ofa board and its physical location in the BSC equipmentcabinet.

When the PCM link is allotted to a site on the Abisinterface, it is also identified by a reference number definedwith regard to the site (pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager). Referto the bscSitePcmList entry in the Dictionary.


Max number of pcmCircuit T1: 0..168 (BSC 3000); 0..364(BSC 3000 Optical); 0..88 (TCU 3G)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 387

Max number of pcmCircuit E1: 0..126 (BSC 3000); 0..252(BSC 3000 Optical); 0..66 (TCU 3G)

Object : pcmCircuit (Abis, Ater, Lb, A_Lb and Agprs interfaces)


Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The maximum number of external PCM linksallotted to a BSC depends on its type andarchitecture:

12000BSC

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5

externalPCMs

12 20 28 40 48

Checks : • [C]:The number of external PCM links allotted toa BSC on the Ater interface depends on thenumber of TCUs linked to the BSC (one TCUuses one link).



• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the pcmCircuit object is locked.


• [D]:No btsSiteManager object (Abis PCM) ortranscoder object (Ater PCM) or pcu object(Agprs PCM) refers to the pcmCircuit object.

• [D]:No mdScanner object describing a temporaryobservation refers to the pcmCircuit object (noobservation is running on the concerned PCM).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


pcmCircuit

Description : Identifier of a pcmCircuit object defined with regard to atranscoder object (A interface).

It is related to the number of the TDTI board to which thePCM described link is physically connected in the TCU.PCM links are identified by the TDTI boards to which theyare physically connected in the TCU.

PcmCircuit TDTI N Port N

0 0 0

1 1 0

2 1 1

3 2 0

2 1

Unused


Object : pcmCircuit (A interface)

Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The number of PCM links connected toa remote transcoder on the A interface islimited to maxPcmCTPerTranscd (staticconfiguration data).

• [C]:The parent transcoder object is created.

• [C]:<maxTranscdBPerTranscd> transcoderBoardobjects are created for the parent transcoderobject.


• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the pcmCircuit object is locked.


• [D]:No signallingLink or xtp object refers to thepcmCircuit object.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 389

pcmCircuitBsc

Description : Identifier of a PCM link (pcmCircuit object) used by a radiosite defined with regard to the BSC. It is related to thenumber of the DDTI board to which the link is physicallyconnected in the BSC.

Refer to the bscSitePcmList entry in the Dictionary, whichdefines the relationship between these two attributes.

Value range : Depending on the BSC type, the value range is:

• [0 to 47] for a BSC 12000HC

• [0 to 167] for a BSC 3000


Type : DP

pcmCircuitBtsSiteManager

Description : Identifier of the PCM link defined with regard to the BTS. Itis related to the number of the DTI or PCMI board to whichthe link is physically connected in the BTS.

Refer to the bscSitePcmList entry in the Dictionary, whichdefines the relationship between these two attributes.



Type : DP

pcmCircuitId

Description : Identifier of the PCM link used by a LAPD link.

Since all radio sites have a switching facility, the BSC candirectly allocate the PCM link that supports a LAPD link.

Value range : [0 to 47] for BSC 12000HC

[0 to 167] for BSC 3000

Object : lapdLink



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Note : This parameter is only available for the lapdLink OMLobject on BSC 3000.

Type : DD

pcmCircuitId Class 2

Description : Identifier of the PCM link used by an SS7 channel on the Ainterface, defined with regard to the TCU.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The pcmCircuit object is created forthe transcoder object referenced by thesignallingLink object (transcoderId).

• [C/M]:If the described link is PCMA no.3, thetime slot used by the SS7 channel(timeSlotNumber) is in the range [1 to27] if the PCM link is an E1 link and in therange [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link.Since the last four time slots of that link arenot mapped on the Ater interface, they areunusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entryin the Dictionary).


Description : Identifier of the PCM link used by a TCU on the Aterinterface, defined with regard to the BSC.


Object : transcoder

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The pcmCircuit object is created for the parentbsc object.

• [C/M]:It is not used on the Abis interface by abtsSiteManager object nor on the Aterinterface by another transcoder objectdependent on the same parent bsc object.

• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked, and thetranscoder object and the signallingLinkobjects that refer to it are locked.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 391


Description : Identifier of the PCM link used by a terrestrial circuit on theA interface, defined with regard to the TCU.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : xtp

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The pcmCircuit object is created for thetranscoder object referenced by the xtp object(transcoderId).

• [C/M]:If the described link is PCMA no.3, thetime slot used by the terrestrial circuit(timeSlotNumber ) is in the range [1 to 27] ifthe PCM link is an E1 link and in the range [1to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link. Since thelast four time slots of that link are not mappedon the Ater interface, they are unusable(refer to the transcoderMatrix entry in theDictionary).

pcmErrorCorrection Class 2

Description : Whether the bts uses the new ETF (Enhanced TRAUFrame) frame (set to "1") or the ETSI "Rec 08.60" frame(set to "0").


Object : bts

Feature : PCM error correction (FM660 - V12)

Default value : 1

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M] This attribute can be set to "1" only ifenhancedTRAUFrameIndication attribute isset to "available" or "active "

Release : V12

Note : This parameter is only available for BTSs equipped withnon mixed DCU4 or DRX transceiver architecture.

pcmNbr Class 2 (gprsPcuCrossConnectList)

Description : Number of PCM links used for Agprs interface.

Value range : BSC 12000HC: [1 / 3 / 5 / 7 to 47]

BSC 3000: [6 to 167]

Object : pcu


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.




Type : DP

Release : V12

pcmTimeSlotNumber Class 2

Description : Scheduled time slot of a radio site on the Abis interface.

Value range : [1 to 31] if the PCM link is an E1 link[1 to 24] if the PCM link is a T1 link


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The scheduled time slot is masked in thebstSiteManager object radioSiteMask, so itcannot be allotted by the BSC.

Notes : • The relation "scheduled time slot = teiBtsSiteManager+ 1" is always true at BTS level.

• It can be false at BSC level provided a PCM switchingmatrix is used between the BSC and the BTS;otherwise, it is true.

Release : V8

pcmType Class 3 (BSC 12000) or Class 0 (BSC 3000)

Description : Interface on which the PCM link is used.

Value range : [pcmA / pcmAbis / pcmAter / pcmAgprs / pcmA_Lb /pcm_Lb]

Object : pcmCircuit


Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:If the current attribute value is pcmA, nosignallingLink or xtpobject refers to that object(pcmTimeSlotNumber).

• [M]:If the current attribute value is pcmAbis, nobtsSiteManager object refers to that object(bscSitePcmList).

• [M]:If the current attribute value is pcmAter,no transcoder object refers to that object(pcmCircuitId ).

• [M]:If the current attribute value is pcmAgprs,no pcu object refers to that object(bscPcuPcmRefList ).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 393

• [M]:pcmAbis is forbidden for pcmCircuitId equals0, 2, 4, or 6.

• [C/M]:signallingLink of Lb interface must bereferenced to pcmCircuit of pcmLb orpcmA_Lb type.

• [C/M]:signallingLink of A interface must bereferenced to pcmCircuit of pcmA orpcmA_Lb type.

pcu

Description : Identifier of a pcu object defined with regard to a bscobject.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : pcu


Type : Id

Release : V12

pcuCellState

Description : From the BSC point of view, this parameter correspondsto the GPRS configuration of the cell in the PCU. This ismade possible through the messages exchanged betweenthe BSC and the PCU.

Value range : [0, Not Significant;1, GPRS: no PDTCH channels created;

2, GPRS: out of service;

3, GPRS: service OML configuring;

4, GPRS: service RSL configuring;

5, GPRS: in service;

6, GPRS: service unavailable - OML;

7, GPRS: service unavailable - Gb down;

8, GPRS: service unavailable - BVC KO]

Object : pcu

Type : DD

Release : V16


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


pcuLapdEqptRefList Class 2

Description : List of LAPD equipment numbers used by the pcu object.


Object : pcu


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:All the referred LAPD equipment objectinstances of this attribute must exist

• [C/M]:The sapi attribute of the referred lapdLinkobject instances must have been set to ’OML’.The associatedInterface attribute of thereferred lapdLink object instances must havebeen set to ’Agprs’.

• [C/M]:A lapdLink object instance can be referred byonly one pcu object instance

Release : V12


pcusn

Description : Identifier of a pcusn object.


Object : pcusn


Type : Id

Release : V12

pcuSNName

Description : Reference name of a PCUSN object on the OMC-R.

It begins with a letter and is case sensitive.


Object : pcusn

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The name of a pcuSN is unique to the OMC-R.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 395

Release : V12




- digit symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

- minus sign: -

- undescore: _

penaltyTime Class 3

Description : Timer used by an idle mobile before re-selecting a cell (C2criterion).

When a mobile places the cell on the list of strongestcarriers, it starts a timer that stops after penaltyTimeseconds. This timer is reset when the mobile removes thecell from the list.

For the entire timer duration, the re-selection criterion (C2)is assigned a negative temporaryOffset value.

Refer to the cellReselectOffset entry in the Dictionary.

Value range : [20 to 640, by steps of 20] seconds. The value "640" isreserved and indicates that the temporary offset is ignoredin the re-selection criterion (C2) calculation. It also changesthe sign in the C2 formula.

Object : bts

Feature : AR 264

Default value : 20

Type : DP

Release : V8


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


perceived severity

Description : To select messages according to the priority.

The alarm processing priority provides an indication of howit is perceived that the capability of the managed objecthas been affected. Refer to the alarmPriority entry in theDictionary where the priority levels are explained.

Value range : [cleared / critical / indeterminate / major / minor / warning]



Type : DP

periodCCCHLoadIndication Class 3

Description : Periodicity at which the BTS sends the CCCH payload tothe BSC ("9.2" is the only value accepted).

Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646] second

Object : bts

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The only value accepted by the system is"9.2".


periodicity

Description : Time between two runs if the job is to be periodically run.

Value range : [1 to 2147483646] minute(s)

Object : job

Condition : To define if it is a periodic job.

Type : DP

pfcActivation Class 2

Description : Activates the Packet Flow Context feature in the cell.


Object : bts



Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 397

Release : V16


pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection Class 3

Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Conversational of ARP 1(allocation / retention priorities 1) are protected againstvoice preemption. This parameter is not used.





Type : DP

Note : This parameter is part of the complex packetFlowContextattribute.

Release : V16

pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection Class 3

Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Streaming of ARP 1(allocation / retention priorities 1) are protected againstvoice preemption.





Type : DP



Release : V16







411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



Type : DP


Release : V16


Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Streaming of ARP 2(allocation / retention priorities 2) are protected againstvoice preemption.





Type : DP


Release : V16







Type : DP


Release : V16


Description : Indicates if the real time PFCs Streaming of ARP 3(allocation / retention priorities 3) are protected againstvoice preemption. This parameter is not used.




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 399



Type : DP


Release : V16

pfcFlowControlActivation Class 2

Description : Activates the flow control of the Packet Flow Context in thecell.


Object : bts



Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:If pfcActivation is disabled, it is not allowed toenable pfcFlowControlActivation.

Release : V16

Note : This parameter is optional. It is applicable to BSC 3000only.

pfcMinNrtBandwidthPerTs Class 3

Description : Specifies the percentage of each TS of the TDMA whichis reserved for non real time PFC (including MSs with noPFC). This parameter is used for the admission control ofa real time PFC.



Default value : 0


Type : DP

Release : V16



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Note : The value ‘0’ or a very low value may result in a TBF withonly NRT PFC not being allocated enough bandwidth. Thisresults in TBF drops. The value ‘0’ is internally converted to1 inside the PCU.

Note : The value ‘100’ or a very high value may result in all RTPFC being downgraded or deleted. This value is internallyconverted to 99 inside PCU.

pfcMinNumberOfJokersforTsGuaranteedBitRate Class 3

Description : Number of jokers that are needed to guarantee bothuplink and downlink throughputs in any location of thecell. Refer to the pfcTsGuranteedBitRateUl and thepfcTsGuranteedBitRateDl entries in this dictionary.

Value range : [0 to 4] 16 kbit/s PCM TS


Default value : 0


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:pfcMinNumberOfJoker sforTsGuaranteedBitRate’ must be lower than or equal tominNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain so thatreal timePFC can be accepted when dynamicAgprs is activated.


Release : V16

pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold Class 3

Description : Threshold used by the pcuPfcNrtRequestedDnMbrGTThrescounter (C15267). For more information, refer to NTP<125>.

Value range : [0..568] kbit/s


Default value : 0 (all requests are taken into account)


Type : DP


Release : V16


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 401

pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold Class 3

Description : Threshold used by the pcuPfcNrtRequestedUpMbrGTThrescounter (C15268). For more information, refer to NTP<125>.





Type : DP


Release : V16

pfcPreemptionRatioGold Class 3

Description : Defines the percentage of raw radio bandwidth a gold NRTPFC (THP1) may preempt from silver and bronze NRTPFC (THP2 or THP3 or background or MS without PFCsupport)

Value range : [0.00 to 93.750] by step of 0.5%


Default value : 0 (no preemption)

Type : DP

Release : V14 (renamed in V16)

Note : The value may be decreased to lower the impact on Silverand Bronze subscribers when the traffic is high.

pfcPreemptionRatioSilver Class 3

Description : Defines the percentage of raw radio bandwidth a silverNRT PFC (THP2) may preempt from bronze NRT PFC(THP3 or background or MS without PFC support)

Value range : [0.00 to 93.750] by step of 0.5%


Default value : 0 (no preemption)

Type : DP

Release : V14 (renamed in V16)

Note : The value may be decreased to lower the impact onBronze subscribers when the traffic is high.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


pfcRtDowngradeAllowed Class 3

Description : In case the guaranteed bit rate of a real time PFC cannotbe granted, this parameter indicates whether the PFCis deleted or downgraded into a non real time PFC. If itis downgraded into a non real time PFC, the parameterspecifies which traffic class and PFC are used for thedowngrade.

Value range : [downgrade not allowed / downgrade to interactive THP1 /downgrade to interactive THP2 / downgrade to interactiveTHP3 / downgrade to background]


Default value : downgrade not allowed


Type : DP


Release : V16

pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold Class 3

Description : Threshold used by the pcuPfcRtRequestedDnGbrGTThrescounter (C15265). For more information, refer to NTP<125>.





Type : DP


Release : V16

pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold Class 3

Description : Threshold used by the pcuPfcRtRequestedUpGbrGTThrescounter (C15266). For more information, refer to NTP<125>.






411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 403

Type : DP


Release : V16

pfcT6 Class 3

Description : pfcT6 is the guard timer for the Download Packet FlowContext procedure.

Value range : [0.1 to 10] seconds by step of 0.1 second


Default value : 0


Type : DP


Release : V16

pfcT8 Class 3

Description : pfcT8 is the guard timer for the Modify Packet Flow Contextprocedure.

Value range : [0.1 to 10] seconds by step of 0.1 second


Default value : 0


Type : DP


Release : V16

pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl Class 3

Description : For an EDGE MS, specifies the downlink throughput whichis guaranteed in any location of the cell.


Default value : 0


Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



Release : V16

pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl Class 3

Description : For an EDGE MS, specifies the uplink throughput which isguaranteed in any location of the cell.

Value range : [1 to 60] kbit/s


Default value : 0


Type : DP


Release : V16

plmnPermitted Class 3

Description : List of NCC of the PLMNs on which MSs are allowed totake measurements for handovers. Listening to the PLMNto which the cell belongs must be authorized.


Object : bts

Default value :

Type : DP

pODType

Description : Type of the BSC or BTS involved, as defined in thePhysical Objects Dictionary.

Value range : [BSC1GT / BSC2GT / BTSoutdoor / BTSindoor / BTSmicro/ BTSsmart / BTSoutdoor2G]


Type : DP

pointCode Class 1

Description : MSC identifier in the SS7 network (Destination Point Code).

Value range : • in ETSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16383]

• in ANSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16777215]


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 405


Type : DP

pointCode Class 1

Description : BSC identifier in the SS7 network (Origin Point Code).

Value range : • in ETSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16383]

• in ANSI SS7 protocol [0 to 16777215]


Type : DP

port Ethernet operational

Description : Operational state of the OMU external Ethernet port.

ISO operational state (enabled/disabled).

This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Valuechanges are not notified to the Manager.


Value range : [enabled/disabled]

Object : omu


Type : DD

Release : V13

port Ethernet status

Description : Availability status of the OMU module external Ethernetport.

ISO availability status ({}, {dependency}, {failed}).




Object : omu



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DD

Release : V13

port 0 X25 status

Description : Operational state of the OMU module external X.25 port 0.





Object : omu


Type : DD

Release : V13

port 1 X25 status

Description : Availability status of the OMU external X.25 port 1.

ISO availability status ({}, {dependency}, {failed}).


Value changes are not notified to the Manager.



Object : omu


Type : DD

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 407

portChosen Class 2

Description : Number of the port currently used on the OMC-R end.

Value range : [port0 / port1 / automaticChoice (selection by the OMC-Ragent)]

If the port is not uniquely selected, it will be dynamicallyassigned by the OMC-R agent.

Selecting "automaticChoice" is recommended since itallows the OMC-R agent to reconfigure the port currentlyused when a problem occurs.


Type : DP

Checks : • [M] :The bscMdInterface object is locked.

portUsed

Description : Number of the port currently used on the OMC-R end.

Value range : [port0 / port1]

This dynamic attribute identifies the OMC-R port currentlyused. It can be different from portChosen since theOMC-R agent switches the transport connection with aBSC over to the other port as and when needed.

No information is displayed unless the BSS/OMC-R link isestablished.


Type : DI

positionInShelf

Description : Indicates the position of a module in a shelf.


Object : atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu,trm,


Type : DD

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


powerBudgetInterCell Class 3

Description : Authorization to perform intercell handovers for powerbudget.




Type : DP

powerClass

Description : Transmission power class of a TDMA frame.

Value range : [powerClass5 (GSM 900 network, GSM-R network,E-GSM, GSM 850 - GSM 1900 and GSM 900 - GSM 1800network) powerClass1 (GSM 1800 network, GSM 1900network, GSM 1800 - GSM 900 network and GSM 1900- GSM 850)]


Default value : powerClass1

Type : DP

Checks : • [C]:The attribute value complies with the type ofnetwork in which the TDMA frame is used.Refer to the standardIndicator entry in theDictionary (attribute of the parent bts object).


powerControl

Description : Identifier of a powerControl object that defines the powercontrol management parameters in a cell. A bts object mayreference one and only one object of this type.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The associated bts object is created and thepowerControl object is not created for thatobject.

• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe associated bts object is locked.


• [M/D]:The powerControl object is created.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 409

• [D]:The associated bts object is not referenced,except by an handOverControl object.


powerControlIndicator Class 3

Description : Whether MS signal strength measurements includemeasurements on BCCH.

BCCH measurements must not be included when thefollowing two conditions are met:

• The radio channel hops at least on two differentfrequencies, including the BCCH frequency.

• Power control on the downlink is used.

Value range : [include BCCH measurements / do not include BCCHmeasurements]

This parameter should only be used with cavity coupling.

Object : bts

Default value : include BCCH measurements

Type : DP

powerDownlink (algorithm Used) class 2

Description : Power gain in the BTS-to-MS direction used by the speechprocessing algorithm in a TCB.


Value range : [-15 to +15] dB


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V8

powerIncrStepSize Class 3

Description : Step for increasing MS or BTS txpwr when using step bystep algorithm. This is applicable to BSC 12000HC only.

Value range : [2, 4, 6] dB


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.




Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:lRxLevDLP + powerIncStepSize≤ uRxLevDLP.

• [M]:lRxLevULP + powerIncStepSize ≤uRxLevULP.

Notes : • This parameter is significant only when the BTS usesthe standard "step by step" power control algorithm.


powerIncrStepSizeUpLink Class 3

Description : Increment step size for uplink power control. This isapplicable to BSC 3000 only.



This attribute can only be modified if the ’bsc’ objectinstance is unlocked.




Default value : 4

Type : DP

Checks : • 0566CO01: The attribute ’powerIncrStepSizeUL’ mustverify:

’1RxLevULP’ + ’powerIncrStepSizeUL’ <= ’uRxLevULP’

Release : V14



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 411

powerIncrStepSizeDownLink Class 3

Description : Increment step size for downlink power control. This isapplicable to BSC 3000 only.







Default value : 4

Type : DP

Checks : • 0565CO01 - The attribute ’powerIncrStepSizeDL’ mustverify:

’1RxLevDLP’ + ’powerIncrStepSizeDL’ <= ’uRxLevDLP’

Release : V14

powerRedStepSize Class 3

Description : Step for reducing MS or BTS txpwr when using step bystep algorithm. This is applicable to BSC 12000HC only.

Value range : [2, 4] dB



Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:uRxLevDLP - powerRedStepSize ≥lRxLevDLP.

• [M]:uRxLevULP - powerRedStepSize ≥lRxLevULP.

Notes :

• This parameter is significant only when the BTS usesthe standard "step by step" power control algorithm.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


powerRedStepSizeDownLink Class 3

Description : Decrement step size for downlink power control. This isapplicable to BSC 3000 only.







Default value : 2

Type : DP

Checks : • 0567CO01 - The attribute ’powerRedStepSizeDL’ mustverify:

’uRxLevDLP’ - ’powerRedStepSizeDL’ >= ’1RxLevDLP’

Release : V14


powerRedStepSizeUpLink Class 3

Description : Decrement step size for uplink power control. This isapplicable to BSC 3000 only.







Default value : 2

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 413

Checks : • 0568CO01-The attribute ’powerRedStepSizeUL’ mustverify:

’uRxLevULP’ - ’powerRedStepSizeUL’ >= ’1RxLevULP’

Release : V14


powerUplink (algorithm Used) Class 2

Description : Power gain in the MS-to-BTS direction used by the speechprocessing algorithm in a TCB.


Value range : [-15 to +15] dB


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V8

preemptionAuthor Class 3

Description : Defines the preemption management

Value range : [forbidden,authorizedWithRelease,authorizedForcedHO]


Default value : forbidden

Feature : ASCI (GSM-R V12)

Type : DP

Release : V12

Note : authorizedWithRelease and authorizedForcedHO optionsare not available.

preemptionConfiguration Class 3

Description : This parameter is composed of preemptionAuthor andeMLPPThreshold. Refer to these entries in the Dictionary.


Type : DP

Release : V14


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


pRequestedCodec Class 3

Description : This attribute defines the "p" parameter in the AMR "(n,p)voting" mechanism.


Value range : Int [12 to 192] in steps of 12


Default value : 48

Type : DP

Release : V14


preSynchroTimingAdvance Class 3

Description : Pre-defined timing advance used in a pre-synchronizedhandover procedure between the serving cell and thisneighbor cell.

This value of timing advance is used when the parameter"synchronized" is set to "pre sync HO with timing advance".The operator defines a predefined timing advance when aphase 2 MS goes from the serving cell to this neighbor cellapproximately at the same place (railway, highway).

Value range : [0 to 35] (km)


Default value : Refer to parameter synchronized

Type : DP

Release : V10

priority Class 2

Description : Priority level of a TDMA frame.

Among the set of TDMA frames attached to the cell, onlythe one carrying the cell BCCH must be allotted the highestpriority [0].

At least <minNbOfTDMA> TDMA frames related to a cell(refer to this entry in the Dictionary) must be successfullyconfigured for the cell to be working. They include theTDMA frame carrying the cell BCCH and those with thehighest priority(ies).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 415

If this is true when the cell is brought into service, then,the cell will be working. Otherwise, its operationalStatewill be "disabled" and its availabilityStatus will be"{dependency}".



Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.

privateMmsOmuRef

Description : Pointer to the associated ’omu’ object instance for privateMMS, NULL for shared-mirrored MMS.

This attribute cannot be modified.

It is set by the MD-R at MMS creation.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : mms


Type : DP

Release : V13

privilegedCell Class 3

Description : Allows to segregate cells according to their mapping onAgprs PCM.

Value range : [no, yes]

Object : bts

Default value : no

Feature : Optimized Agprs cell allocation

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Release : V16

Notes : • This parameter is mandatory. It is applicable to BSC3000 only.

• This parameter is of class 3. No modification of its valueis taken into account by the BSC immediately and itdoes not trigger any re-configuration of Agprs.

probable cause

Description : To select messages according to the numerical value of theISO probableCause field.


The following table indicates the messages displayedaccording to the probable cause.

Alarm type Probable cause Value

Communications Execution failure of a MD request by the BSCCall establishment errorCommunication protocol error

Communication subsystem failureCorrupt dataDegraded signal

DTE-DCE interface errorLAN errorLocal node transmission error

Loss of frameLoss of signalReceive failure

Remote node transmission errorTransmit failure

6245

6912

132527

282940

4254


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 417


Environmental External alarm loopEnclosure door openFire detected

Heating, ventilation, or cooling systemMaterial supply exhausted

581418

2130

Equipment Equipment absentEquipment malfunctionHeating, ventilation, or cooling system problem

Input/output device errorInput device errorMaterial supply exhausted

Power problemProcessor problemReceive failure

Receiver failureStorage capacity problemTemperature unacceptable

Timing problemTransmit failureTransmitter failure

601521

232430

353740

414950

525455

ProcessingError Cause of restart or switchoverNo responseApplication subsystem failure

Configuration or customization errorCorrupt dataFile error

Out of memoryQueue size exceededSoftware error

Software program abnormally terminatedSoftware program errorStorage capacity problem

59612

7917

323946

474849


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



Underlying resource unavailableVersion mismatch

5657

QualityOfService ShutdownCongestionPerformance degraded

Queue size exceededResource at or nearing capacityResponse time excessive

Retransmission rate excessive

Threshold crossed

63834

394344

4551



Type : DP

processor identity

Description : This parameter is composed of the bsc equipment nameand the equipment processor number parameters. Referto these entries in the Dictionary.

Object : mdWarning (create)

Type : DP

Release : V11

Note : During the command "create mdWarning", the operator candefine either "equipment identity" or "processor identity",but not both.

processorLoadSupConf Class 3

Description : Threshold used in the load control algorithm by the BSC.

Note : This parameter is significant only for BSC 12000HC.

Value range : [0] The only accepted value is 0 (outOfRangeError).

Object : bsc

Feature : BSC overload management (FM877 - V12)

Default value : 0

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

P 419

Remark : C1400, C1506, C1803, C1834, and C1835 counters allowto check BSC overload problems.

This parameter was used in the previous releases only to control the load onthe BSC CPU boards.

Note : This parameter is valid for BSC 12000HC only.

pwciHrequave Class 3

Description : Cell Tiering Mode parameter.

This is the averaging window size for powerControl.

This attribute allows to configure the cellTieringConfiguration parameter at bts level.

Note : Cell Tiering mode must be activated.



Default value : 8

Type : DP

Description: The MS searches for UMTScells if level is above orbelow the threshold when theserving BCCH frequency ispart of the BA_List

Value range: 0:"<-98 dBm"

1: “< -94 dBm”

2: “< -90 dBm”

3: “< -86 dBm”

QsearchC < -XX dBm: theHO towards the UMTS canbe done only if the RxLevfrom the serving cell is below-XX.

4: “< -82 dBm”

5: “< -78 dBm”

6: “< -74 dBm”

7: “always”

8: “> -78 dBm”

9: “> -74 dBm”

QsearchC > -XX dBm: theHO towards the UMTS canbe done only if the RxLevfrom the serving cell is above-XX.

10: “> -70 dBm”

11: “> -66 dBm”

12: “> -62 dBm”

13: “> -58 dBm”

"values different from"always" and "never" areuseful only if serving BCCH ispart of BA_List in SI5"


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


14: “> -54 dBm”

15: “never”

Object: handoverControl

Default value: 15

Type: DP

Checks:

Release: V17

Notes: This parameter is availableonly for BSC 3000.

RrACHLoadAveragingSlots Class 3

Description : The number of RACH access on which RACHmeasurements are performed (2000 is the only valueaccepted).


Object : bts

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The only value accepted by the system is"2000".


radChanSelIntThreshold Class 3

Description : Maximum interference level on free radio channels, belowwhich are arranged in groups of priority allocation.

The information is used to allocate free channels withthe lowest interference level. The levels depend on thethresholdInterference attribute value defined for the cell.Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.

The BSC distributes free radio channels among twogroups:

• The first group contains the list of channels with ameasured averaged interference level equal to or lowerthan the defined level.

• The second group contains the list of channels with ameasured averaged interference level higher than the


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

R 421

defined level, and recently released channels for whichno measurement is available.

Four resource pools are defined for each SDCCH or TCHtype of channel:

• low interference level radio channels that are authorizedto hop

• low interference level radio channels not authorized tohop

• high interference level radio channels authorized to hop

• high interference level radio channels not authorized tohopChannels are allocated cyclically inside each pool.



Default value : 1

Type : DP

Release : V8

radioAllocator Class 2

Description : Radio allocator type used in the cell.

Value range : [voice + dataCircuit, voice + dataCircuit + packetData]

Object : bts



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Default value : voice + dataCircuit

Type : DP

Release : V12

radioLinkTimeOut Class 3

Description : Maximum value of the counter (S) associated with thedownlink SACCH messages, beyond which the radio link iscut off. It is lower than or equal to t3109.

Mobiles comply with system operating conditions whenthe counter (S) is assigned a value lower than or equal tot3109.

If the receiver is unable to decode a downlink SACCHmessage (BTS-to-MS direction), the counter is decreasedby 1. If the message is received, the counter is increasedby 2. When the counter goes down to zero, the radio link isdeclared "faulty".

Value range : [4 to 64, by steps of 4] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms onTCHs, 470 ms on SDCCHs)

Object : bts

Default value : 20 SACCH

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

R 423

Checks : • [C/M]:radioLinkTimeOut ≤ t3109.

Notes : • The rlf1 attribute serves the same goal on the uplink.

• The system does not check consistent values of the twoattributes.

radioSiteMask Class 2

Description : Definition of the PCM time slots used by a site. TS n ismasked when bit n is set to 0, it is used when bit n is set to1 in the binary field.The radio site mask is immediately displayed in thehexadecimal field just below. The radio site mask is setusing the hexadecimal field as well as the binary field.

The mask defines the time slots used in each PCMlink allotted to a given radio site. Time slot allocation ismanaged by the BSC; a time slot available on a site isused either by a radio time slot for traffic purposes or by aLAPD link which does not carry the link with the site BCFfor signaling.

A PCM E1 link carries thirty-two time slots. TS 0 (leastsignificant bit) is always masked since it cannot be used.The radioSiteMask of a site using E1 links is as follows:

radioSiteMask = xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx0| | | | |TS31 23 15 7 TS0

A PCM T1 link carries twenty-four time slots. TheradioSiteMask of a site using T1 links is as follows:

radioSiteMask = XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX| |TS24 TS1

Sites that do not share PCM links are assigned the full set.

In a BTS chain, the scheduled time slots of each radio sitemust be allotted in ascending order (TS1, TS2, TS3, etc.),beginning with the site closest to the BSC. Refer to thepcmTimeSlotNumber entry.

Value range : [32-bit mask]



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

• [C/M]:TS 0 cannot be assigned.

• [C/M]:If PCM T1 links are used, TSs 25 to 31 cannotbe assigned.

• [C/M]:The radioSiteMask of all sites sharing a samePCM link (drop and insert connections) aredissociated.

Checks :

• [M]:The scheduled time slot of the radio site(pcmTimeSlotNumber) is masked [0] since itcannot be used.

radioSiteMaskOffset Class 2

Description : The radioSiteMaskOffset parameter provides thede-correlation of the radio site mask used on BTS sitewith the radio site mask used on BSC side (refer to theradioSiteMask entry).

On BTS side, the mask is the result of a calculation usingthe radioSiteMask value and the radioSiteMaskOffsetparameter.

According to the radioSiteMaskOffset value (named sbelow), the radio site mask on BTS side (RSMbts) is:

• s = 0: RSMbts and RSMbsc are identical

• s > 0: If RSMbsc is [TSm..TSn] then RSMbts is[TSm-s..TSn-s]

• s < 0: If RSMbsc is [TSm..TSn] then RSMbts is[TSm+|s|..TSn+|s|]

Example 1: if RSMbsc is [TS31..TS28] and s = +26, thenRSMbts is [TS05..TS02].

Example 2: if RSMbsc is [TS05..TS02] and s = -19, thenRSMbts is [TS24..TS21].

Value range : Int [-28 to 28]


Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

R 425

• [C/M]:If the radioSiteMaskOffset is positive, thelowest TS number of the resultant BTS radiosite mask must be greater than or equal to 1.

• [C/M]:If the radioSiteMaskOffset is negative, thegreatest TS number of the resultant BTS radiosite mask must be lower than or equal to 31(case of an E1 PCM) or to 24 (case of a T1PCM).

Checks :

• [C/M]:the radioSiteMaskOffset is in the range [-28,+28] (case of an E1 PCM) or in the range [-21,+21] (case of a T1 PCM).

Release : V14

radioSiteName

Description : Reference name of a multiple site object on the OMC-R. Itbegins with a letter and is case sensitive.

The name of a multiple site can be used in all MMIcommands to reference the multiple site on the OMC-R.



Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The name of a multiple site is unique to theOMC-R.




- digit symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

- minus sign: -

- undescore: _

- space


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


radResSupBusyTimer Class 3

Description : Maximum time that SDCCH or TCH can be continuouslyoccupied without generating an alarm.

Value range : [1 to 18] hours

Object : bsc

Default value : 3

Type : DP

Release : V8

radResSupervision Class 3

Description : Indicates whether radio resources are controlled at the celllevel (both busy resources and free resources).

When no control is performed, no alarm related to the useor non use of an SDCCH or TCH is generated. Refer to theradResSupBusyTimer and radResSupFreeTimer entriesin the Dictionary.


Object : bts


Type : DP

Notes : • radResSupBusyTimer and radResSupFreeTimer can beset automatically by the OMC-R calendar function.

• The activation of this feature does not induce anysignaling or CPU overload. Only the BSS-OMC-R linkis overloaded at a rate of radResSupBusyTimer orradResSupFreeTimer.

Release : V8

radResSupFreeTimer Class 3

Description : Maximum time an SDCCH or TCH can be continuously freewithout generating an alarm.

Value range : [1 to 18] hours

Object : bsc

Default value : 18

Type : DP

Release : V8


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

R 427

range

Description : Time period chosen over which the counter values areread.

Value range : [5 min / 15 min / 30 min / 60 min / 2 hours]


Notes : • The authorized values for OFS observation type are 60min, 2 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.

• The authorized values for ORT and PerformanceMonitor observation types are 5 min, 15 min, 30 min, 60min, and 2 hours.

Type : DP

reception time

Description : To select messages received at that time.





Type : DP

record reference

Description : Identifier of a user call as recorded in a call monitoring datafile.


Object : Call monitoring - Display (SDO)

Type : DP

• [A]:It is in the range [0 to 63].

• [A]:This parameter is mandatory when auser call report (Events option) or a radiomeasurements report (Measurements option)is requested.

Checks :

• [A]:It can be undefined when a synthesis report(Synthesis option) is requested. In thatcase, a summary of all user recorded calls isdisplayed.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


redundantPcmNumber

Description : Number of the redundant PCM link defined on BSC end.

This dynamic attribute is displayed provided thebtsSiteManager object redundantPcmPresence attributevalue is "true".



Type : DD

Remark : A redundant link is not normally used for traffic or signallingconnections.

redundantPcmPresence Class 2

Description : Presence of a redundant PCM link on a radio site



Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:If the attribute value is "true", the objectbscSitePcmList attribute includes two items,one identifies the PCM active link, and theother identifies the PCM redundant link.

refPeriod

Description : Reference counting period when a counter is involved.



Condition : To define if a counter is associated with the criteria.

Type : DP

refPeriod

Description : Reference counting period used by the "excessiveAnomalyRate" function.

This attribute is not used by the detection "outOfRangeCounter" function. In that case, the reference period is set asfollows:


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

R 429

• For cumulative counters, the thresholds define totalvalues not to be reached during a one minute referenceperiod.

• For load or value counters, the thresholds definemaximum or minimum average values not to bereached during a 1 minute reference period, except forthe PCM unavailability counters for which they definetotal values not to be reached during the referenceobservation period.

The BSS observation counter threshold crossing detectionmechanism is described in NTP < 07 >.



Type : DP

relatedSoftwares

Description : This attribute identifies the list of software identifiedseparately. This list represents the units of software readyfor equipment use. This attribute is allocated by the MD-Rat object creation. This attribute is not modified by theManager.



Type : DP

Release : V13

relay

Description : Identifier of a BSS alarm relay which activates an externalalarm loop when the counter of immediate unacknowledgedalarms shows a nonzero value for one of the BSSsassigned to the relay.

BSS relays transfer the state of the associated BSSimmediate action alarm counters to remote sites.

A BSS relay is associated with several BSCs. Conversely,a BSC is simultaneously assigned to several relays.


Object : relay


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : Id

Reminder : OMC-R relays are used to transfer the state of systemalarm counters to remote sites and are not managed byusers.

remoteSsuState

Description : State of the remote subsystem (BSSAP)

Value range : [inService / outOfService]

• inService .................The MSC BSSAP service isworking for the BSC.

• outOfService .....The MSC BSSAP service is notworking.


Type : DD

repetition rate

Description : Periodicity of short message broadcasting.

Each concerned BSC repeatedly sends the selected shortmessage to the BTSs covering the selected cells at therepetition rate defined by the user.

Each BTS repeatedly broadcasts the short message to allmobiles under its control, using the same repetition rate.

Value range : [2 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 16 min./ 32 min.]

Object : short message - Start broadcast

Type : DP

report range

Description : Time period over which the counter values are read.

Value range : [5 min. / 15 min. / 30 min. / 60 min. / 2 hours / 6 hours / 12hours / 24 hours]


Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

R 431

Notes : • The authorized values for OFS observation type are 60min., 2 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours.

• The authorized values for ORT and PerformanceMonitor observation types are 5 min., 15 min., 30 min.,60 min., and 2 hours.

Release : V11

report template

Description : Identifier of the report template object defined with regardto the bsc object.



Type : DP

Release : V11

report type

Description : A type of observation report.

[single observed instance / several observed instance]

• single observed instance ........several observedcounters on a singleobject

Value range :

• several observed instance .......single counterobserved on severalobjects


Type : DP

Release : V11

reportObjLevel

Description : Level of the report to edit.

Fill in only when editing a permanent bsc report. Examples:"bsc = all" or "bsc = 1 & bsc = 2".

Value range : [adjacentCellHandOver / bsc / bts / transceiverZone /hardwareTcu3G]


Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:If specific objects are entered, they all belongto the same class.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


reportTypeMeas Class 2


Value range : disabled, enabled

Object : bts

Type : DP

Release : V15

resetCircuitRepeat Class 1

Description : Whether the RESET CIRCUIT message is repeated onbssMap19 timer elapse if the acknowledgment messagewas not received from the MSC (Phase II compliance).

Value range : [false]



Type DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The only accepted value is "false".


Release : V8

retransDuration Class 2

Description : Maximum number of occurrences of a same pagingsub-group separating the first and last transmissions of thesame paging message.


Object : bts

Default value : 10

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:retransDuration ≥ (delayBetweenRetrans +1) x nbOfRepeat

Release : V8


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

R 433

retry on error

Description : Whether commands are rerun when the system detects anapplication error.

This parameter has priority over the on error parameter.When its value is "True", the error command is rerun; whenit is "False", the on error parameter is analyzed.

The errors involved, the time between reruns, andthe maximum number of reruns are defined in staticconfiguration data.

Value range : [true / false] (default is False)


Type : DP

rlf1 Class 2

Description : Value to compute the initial and maximum value of the (CT)counter used in the BTS radio link control algorithm.

The FP (FrameProcessor) in the BTS runs the followingalgorithm to monitor the uplink SACCHs (MS-to-BTSdirection):

• The FP sets the CT counter to 0 at channel activation.

• On each correct SACCH, the following occurs:

— if (CT=0) then CT=4*rlf1 + 4 else CT=min (4*rlf1 +4, CT+rlf2)

• On each incorrect SACCH, the following occurs:

— CT = max(0, CT-rlf3)

— When CT reaches 0, a CONNECTION FAILUREINDICATION message is sent to the BSC everyT3115 until a Deactivate SACCH or RF CHANNELRELEASE message is received.


Object : bts

Default value : 4

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Notes : • The radioLinkTimeOut attribute serves the same goalon the downlink.

• The system does not check that the values of the twoattributes are consistent.

Release : V8

rlf2 Class 2

Description : Step value by which the (CT) counter is increased by theradio link control algorithm when an uplink SACCH isdecoded.

Refer to the rlf1 entry.

Value range : [1 to 4] SACCH frames

Object : bts

Default value : 2

Type : DP

Release : V8

rlf3 Class 2

Description : Step value by which the (CT) counter is decreased by theradio link control algorithm when an uplink SACCH is notdecoded.

Refer to the rlf1 entry.

Value range : [1 to 4] SACCH frames

Object : bts

Default value : 1

Type : DP

Release : V8


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

R 435

rLCPolling Class 3

Description : Configuring the polling frequency for DL TBF.


• 0 selects the original polling frequency of 240 ms anddeactivates this feature

• 1 selects a polling frequency which doubles the originalto every 120 ms (during the first 240 ms, then addingone opportunity to setup a UL TBF)

• 2 selects a polling frequency which quadruples theoriginal to every 60 ms (during the first 240 ms, thenadding three opportunities to setup a UL TBF)

Object : bts

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V15

rmpConfState

Description : State of radio measurement processing in the TDMA frame.

Value range : [configured / not configured / not significant]

• configured: The CURRENT CELL PARAMETER,NEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER (and EXTENDEDNEIGHBOUR CELL PARAMETER when more thansixteen defined neighbor cells) messages have beenacknowledged by the BTS.

• not configured: The messages have not beenacknowledged by the BTS. If a CURRENT CELLPARAMETER message is not acknowledged, thenotification 1258 "Non response during the configurationof the remote L1M" is issued. If a NEIGHBOUR CELLPARAMETER or EXTENDED NEIGHBOUR CELLPARAMETER message is not acknowledged, thenotification 1259 "Negative acknowledgement of adistant L1M command" is issued.

• not significant: The BTS has not sent the messages tothe BSC (either the TDMA frame is not working or SYSINFO was not acknowledged).


Type : DD


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


rndAccTimAdvThreshold Class 3

Description : MS-to-BTS distance beyond which mobile access requeststo a cell are refused.

It defines the maximum timing advance value accepted.

The effective timing advance value is broadcast in theCHANNEL REQUIRED message sent by the BTS to theBSC. If it is above the user defined threshold, the BSCignores the request.

Value range : [2 to 135] km (non-extended mode)[2 to 120] km (extended mode)

Object : bts

Default value : 35

Type : DP

• [C/M]:The maximum distance is 35 km if the btsobject extended cell attribute is "false".

Checks :


Release : V8

Note : The number of access requests that are refused forthat reason is accounted by the BSC (permanent bscobservation counter 1161/6) and fed back to the OMC-R.

routingArea Class 2

Description : GPRS Cell Global Identifier (locationAreaCode +cellIdentity + routingArea).


Object : bts


Default value : 0

Release : V12

Note : A Routing Area is necessarily included in a Location Area.

rowPosition

Description : Position number which identifies the position within a row.

Value range : String from 1 to 4 characters


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

R 437

Object : transcoder, controlNode, interfaceNode, hardwaretranscoder 3G

Type : DP

runCallClear Class 3

Description : Number of "Measurement Results" messages receivedbefore the call clearing algorithm in a cell is triggered.

Value range : [1 to 31] SACCH frames (1 unit = 480 ms on TCHs, 470 mson SDCCHs)

Object : bts

Default value : 16

runHandOver Class 3

Description : Number of "Measurement Results" messages receivedbefore the handover algorithm in a cell is triggered.


Object : bts

Default value : 1

Type : DP

runPwrControl Class 3

Description : Number of "Measurement Results" messages receivedbefore the power control algorithm in a cell is triggered.


Object : bts

Default value : 4

Type : DP

rxLevAccessMin Class 3

Description : Minimum signal strength level received by the mobiles forbeing granted access to a cell. The information is sent toMS prior to registering.

As an example, a threshold level of -104 dB correspondsto an acceptable BER of approximately 10-2 (minimumrecommended value).



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : bts

Default value : less than -110 dB

Type : DP

rxLevDLIH Class 3

Description : Maximum interference level in BTS-to-MS direction, beyondwhich an intra-cell handover may be triggered.




Type : DP

rxLevDLPBGT Class 3

Description : Downlink signal strength threshold above which handoversfor power budget are inhibited.

In certain issues, the operator may prevent handover forpower budget in case of the received level in the servingcell is good enough that a handover does not improve thesituation.

This parameter shall be set such as rxLevDLPBGT ≥lRxLevDLH.



Default value : more than -48

Type : DP

Notes : • This parameter is disabled by setting it to the defaultvalue: more than -48 (dB).

• This parameter is only available for DCU4 or DRXtransceiver architecture. It is disabled for DCU2architecture.

Release : V11

Description: Downlink signal strength threshold above whichhandovers to UTRAN for power budget are inhibited

Value range: <-110 ... >-48 dBm



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

R 439

Default value: 63 (on MOD), “>-48” (on MMI)�

Type: DP

Checks:

Release: V17

Note: This parameter is available only for BSC 3000.

rxLevHreqave Class 3

Description : Number of signal strength measurements performed on aserving cell, used to compute arithmetic strength averagesin handover and power control algorithms.

Value range : [1 to 10] number of measurement results


Default value : 8

Type : DP

rxLevHreqaveBeg Class3

Description : Number of measurement reports on current cell for signalstrength arithmetic average for early handover mechanism.

Refer to the rxLevHreqave entry in the Dictionary. Thisparameter is coupled with hoMarginBeg and rxNCellHreqaveBeg use.



Default value : 2

Type : DP

Notes : • This parameter is set such as rxLevHreqaveBeg ≤rxLevHreqave.

• This parameter is only available for DCU4 or DRXtransceiver architecture.

Release : V11

rxLevHreqt Class 3

Description : Number of arithmetic averages taken into account tocompute the weighted average signal strength in handoverand power control algorithms. Each is calculated fromrxLevHreqave signal strength measurements on a servingcell.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



Default value : 1

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:It is equal to the number of weights inrxLevWtsList (refer to this entry in theDictionary).

rxLevMinCell Class 3

Description : Minimum signal strength level received by MS for beinggranted access to a neighbor cell.



Default value : -95 to -94 dB (GSM 900 or 850), -93 to -92 (GSM 1800 or1900)

Type : DP

Description: Minimum signal strength level received by MS for beinggranted access to an UMTS neighbour cell

Value range: <-110...>-48


Default value: 63 (on MOD), “>-48” (on MMI)

Type: DP

Checks:

Release: V17


rxLevNCellHreqaveBeg Class 3

Description : Number of measurement results used in early handoveralgorithm to compute the average neighboring signalstrength.

Refer to the rxNCellHreqave entry in this dictionary.This parameter is coupled with hoMarginBeg andrxLevHreqaveBeg use.


Object : handoverControl

Default value : 2

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

R 441

rxLevRxQualDistributionActivation Class 3

Description : Defines the frequency of RxLev and RxQual distribution.This is not used in this version.

Only values 0, 1 and 2 are valid.




Object : bts

Type : DP

Release : V14

rxLevULIH Class 3

Description : The maximum interference level in MS-to-BTS direction,beyond which an intra-cell handover is triggered.

Value range : [less than -110, -110 to -109, ..., -49 to -48, more than -48]dB, without Uplink Mapping Feature activated. [less than-117, ... , more than -42] dB, when the Uplink MappingFeature is used.


Feature : Uplink Mapping (TF 876)


Type : DP

rxLevWtsList Class 3

Description : Values of weights used for signal strength weighedaverage.

The L1M function first calculates rxLevHreqave arithmeticaverages from raw measurements, and balancesrxLevHreqt averages among those with the weightsdefined in rxLevWtsList.

Each arithmetic average is partnered with one weight inthe list. Weight/average associations are set in the orderthe weights are recorded. The latest computed arithmeticaverage is always partnered with the first weight in the list.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Super-average = [ (averagei x weighti)] / 100,i = 1 to rxLevHreqt



Default value : 100

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:The number of weights in the list is equal torxLevHreqt and their sum equals 100.

rxNCellHreqave Class 3

Description : Number of measurement results used in the Power Budgetalgorithm to compute the average neighboring signalstrength.

No weighted average is computed for this category ofmeasurement.



Default value : 8

Type : DP

rxQualAveBeg Class 3

Description : This attribute defines the number of quality measures usedby the power control mechanism, in case of hopping TS orfast MS.

This attribute is modified if the ’handOverControl’ objectinstance is unlocked.



Default value : 2

Type : DP

Release : V14



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

R 443

rxQualDLIH Class 3

Description : Bit error rate threshold in BTS-to-MS direction for intracellhandover, above which a handover may be triggered.




Type : DP

Release : V12

rxQualHreqave Class 3

Description : Number of arithmetic averages taken into account tocompute the weighted average bit error rate in handoverand power control algorithms. Each is calculated fromrxQualHreqave bit error rate (BER) measurements on aradio link.



Default value : 1

Type : DP

rxQualHreqt Class 3

Description : Number of bit error rate measurements performed ona radio link, used to compute arithmetic bit error rateaverages in handover and power control algorithms.



Default value : 8

Type : DP

rxQualULIH Class 3

Description : Bit error rate threshold in MS-to-BTS direction for intracellhandover, above which a handover may be triggered.




Type : DP

Release : V14


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


rxQualThresholdDistribution Class 3

Description : RxQual threshold for taking into account measurements inRxLev and Interf matrix distributions.



Value range : [inferiorTo02 / between02and04 / between04and08 /between08and16 / between16and32 / between32and64 /between64and128 / superiorTo128]

Object : bts

Type : DP

Release : V14

rxQualWtsList Class 3

Description : List of up to sixteen weights used to compute the averagebit error rate on a radio link.

The L1M function calculates rxQualHreqave arithmeticaverages from raw measurements, and balancesrxQualHreqt averages among those with the weightsdefined in rxQualWtsList.

Each arithmetic average is partnered with one weight inthe list. Weight/average associations are set in the orderthe weights are recorded. The latest computed arithmeticaverage is always partnered with the first weight in the list.



Default value : 100

Type : DP

SsIkAssociatedTmuPortPosition

Description : Gives the TMU and port number bearing the SS7signalling.

Value range : [tmuPos / hardwareSlotPositionNMC / portNumber]


Type : DD

Release : V14


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 445

sIkATerResource

Description : Gives the Ater PCM and TS bearing SS7 signalling.

Value range : pcmRef [0 to 167]ts [1 to 31]


Type : DD

Release : V14

sacchPowerOffset Class 2

Description : Describes the power offset that applies to SACCH frames

Value range : [0..6] dB; step = 2

Object : bts

Type : DP


Default value : 0 (no power offset)


Release : V16

sacchPowerOffsetSelection Class 2

Description : Describes the CODEC selection for applying a power offseton SACCH messages.

Value range : [NULL / FR 4.75 kbps / FR 5.9 and lower / FR 6.7 andlower]

Object : bts

Type : DP


Default value : NULL (no power offset for SACCH)

Note : This parameter applies to BSC 3000 V16 and higher.

Release : V16

sapi

Description : The Service Access Point Indicator defining the type ofLAPD link use.

Value range : [RSL / OML]

Object : lapdLink

Type : DP



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


scannerId

Description : The identifier of the mdScanner object describing theobservation.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

"0" identifies the OMC-R permanent manager observation.For a BSS observation or the OMC-R agent permanentobservation, this parameter must match the referencenumber of an mdScanner object.


Type DP

Checks : • [A]:If the request concerns a BSS observation orthe OMC-R agent permanent observation, therelated mdScanner object is created.

scannerId

Description : The identifier of the mdScanner object describing theobservation.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

"0" identifies the OMC-R permanent manager observation.For a BSS observation or the OMC-R agent permanentobservation, this parameter must match the referencenumber of an mdScanner object.


Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:If the request concerns a BSS observation orthe OMC-R agent permanent observation, therelated mdScanner object is created.

sCCPRoutingIndicator

Description : Indicated which route the SCCP takes.

Value range : [international/national]


Type : DP


Description: Scrambling code of the UMTS cell

Value range: 0...511



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 447

Default value: 0

Type: DP

Release: V17

• [C/M/D]:fDDARFCN or scramblingCodecan’t be changed if InterferenceMatrix feature is activated on thebts

Note: This parameter is onlyavailable for the BSC3000.

securedLoopActivation Class 2

Description : Whether the secured loop is disabled or enabled. Whenenabled and in case of a network transmission failure,signalling links are automatically switched to the redundantpath and ongoing calls are kept up.

Value range : [Disabled, Enabled]


Default value : Disabled

Feature : GSM-R V15. Customer specific

Type : DP

Release : V15

selfAdaptActivation Class 3

Description : This attribute specifies if the automatic handover adaptationmechanism is enabled/disabled.



This attribute is modified only if the ’bts’ object instance isunlocked.

Value range : [Enabled/Disabled]

Object : bts


Type : DP

Release : V14



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


selfTuningObs Class 3

Description : BTS mode sending the PwCI distribution on the Abisinterface. This attribute allows the configuration ofCellTieringConfiguration at BTS level.


Value range : [pwCi distribution not sent,pwCi distribution sent after gathering,one pwCi distribution sent per hour]



Type : DP

Release : V12

Note : PWCI distribution may be gathered and sent onto the Abisinterface independently of tiering activation.

sequenceNumber

Description : Tracing the record identification number.

Object : traceFileReady

Type : DP

serial number

Description : Three fields (geographical scope, message code, updatenumber) identify a particular message from the source andtype indicated by the Message Identifier are altered everytime a given Message Identifier is changed.

Value range : [geographical scope, message code, update number]

• geographical scope ..[immediate cell widenormal PLMN widenormal location area widenormal cell wide]

• message code .....[0 to 1023]

differentiate messages from same source and type (sameMessage Identifier)

• update number ....[0 to 15]

differentiate older and newer versions of the samemessage

Object : short message - Display broadcast characteristics

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 449

serial number

Description : Three fields (geographical scope, message code, updatenumber) identify a particular message from the source andtype indicated by the Message Identifier are altered everytime a given Message Identifier is changed.

Value range : [geographical scope, message code, update number]

• geographical scope ..[immediate cell widenormal PLMN widenormal location area widenormal cell wide]

• message code .....[0 to 1023]

differentiate messages from same source and type (sameMessage Identifier)

• update number ....[0 to 15]

differentiate older and newer versions of the samemessage

Object : short message - Display broadcast characteristics

Type : DP

servingFactorOffset Class 3

Description : This attribute defines the offset linked to the serving cell,used to decrease the HO margin, in some specific cases.

This attribute is only modified if the ’handOverControl’object instance is unlocked.



Default value : -2

Type : DP

Release : V14


session context saving mode

Description : Session context saving mode.

Value range : [automatic when logout / on user request]


Type : DP

Release : V10


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


sGSNRelease Class 3

Description : The parameter is set to ’0’ when the SGSN supports rel’98or older and set to ’1’ when the SGSN supports rel’99.

Value range : "SGSN is rel’98 or older" (SGSNR = ’0’)"SGSN is rel’99 onwards" (SGSNR = ’1’)

Object : bts

Default value : 0

Feature : EDGE Traffic Management (20231)

Type : DP

Release : V15

shelfNumber

Description : Indicates the position of a module in a shelf.


Object : atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm, tmu,trm,

Feature : AR 1209 - V13.1 - V13.1

Type : DD

Release : V13

short message

Description : An identifier (name) of a short message on the OMC-R.

A message name identifies the short message on theOMC-R; it is not relayed to the BSC during broadcasting. Itcan be changed by the Rename command (see the newname entry in the Dictionary).

Setting a short message characteristics does not affectthe current broadcast of the message. The change will beeffective when a new broadcast command is launched.

A short message broadcasting is identified on the OMC-Rby a unique serial number assigned by the systemwhen broadcasting is initiated (refer to this entry in theDictionary).



Type : Id


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 451

Checks : • C]:The name of a short message is unique to theOMC-R.

• [M]:The short message is created.

• [D]:The short message is not being broadcast.

sicBoardsInt

Description : The state of the BSC chain SIC boards. Each board isidentified by its type [SICD / SICX / CCS7], along a numberin the type.


• working ..........The SIC board was correctlyinitialized.

• fault ............An error has been detected onthe board.

The number of SICX, SICD, and CCS7 boards in aBSC depends on its hardware architecture. Refer to thebscType entry in the Dictionary.


Type DD


signallingLinkId

Description : Identifier of a signallingLink object defined with regard to asignallingLinkSet object.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The number of signaling links controlled by aBSC is limited to maxSigLPerSigLS (staticconfiguration data).

• [C]:The maximum number of signallingLinkobjects for Lb interface is 2.

• [C/M]:The referenced pcmCircuit object(pcmCircuitId) is assigned to the A interfaceand depends on the same transcoder object(transcoderId) as the signallingLink object.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [C/M]:The referenced PCM,TS pair (pcmCircuitIdand timeSlotNumber) is not already assignedto a signallingLink or xtp object dependent onthe same transcoder object, and the time slotis not mapped on the TS used by the OMCchannel on the Ater interface.

• [C/M]:If the SS7 link uses PCMA link no.3(pcmCircuitId), the timeSlotNumber is in therange [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link orin the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1link. Since the last four time slots of that linkare not mapped on the Ater interface, they areunusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entryin the Dictionary).


• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the signallingLink object is locked.


• [D]:No mdScanner object refers to thesignallingLink object (no observation isrunning on that object).

signallingLinkResState

Value range : [blocked / inhibited / inhibitedLocal / inhibitedDistant / inhibitedLocalDistant / inhibitedBlocked / notInhibitedNotBlocked]

• inhibited .............state enforced by a userSetInhibit command

• inhibitedLocal .........state enforced by a user

• inhibitedDistant ........state enforced by the MSC

• inhibitedLocalDistant ..state enforced by a user andthe MSC

• blocked ..............state enforced by the MSCfollowing a loss of dialoguebetween MTP2 and MTP3


Type : DD


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 453

signallingLinkSet

Description : Identifier of a signallingLinkSet object describing the route(not the linkset) between the BSC and MSC, or the BSCand SMLC.

Value range : [0 to 1] where signallingLinkSet[0] represents A interfaceand signallingLinkSet[1] represents Lb interface.


Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The signallingLinkSet object is not created forthe parent signallingPoint object.

• [C]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked.

• [D]:The application database of the related BSChas been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.

signallingPoint

Description : Identifier of a signallingPoint object describing a BSC-MSClink on the BSC.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The signallingPoint object is not created for theparent bsc object.



• [D]:The application database of the related BSChas been reset by an Off line reset BDAcommand.

signallingPointType

Description : Whether the BSC-MSC link acts as an STP (SignalingTransfer Point).

Value range : [STP / noSTP (only value accepted)]


Default value : noSTP

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Checks : • [C/M]:The only value accepted by the system is"noSTP".


signallingTerminalNumber Class 2

Description : The number of the CCS7 port used by an SS7 channel inthe BSC = 2 x number of the mother CCS7 board [0 to 1] +port number [0 to 1].

Value range : [0 to 1] (BSC 6000 type 1-2),[0 to 3] (BSC 6000 types 3-5),[0 to 5] (BSC 12000HC).


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The port number is one-of-a-kind to the BSC(a CCS7 port controls one and only one SS7link).


sigPowerOverboost Class 3


Value range : [0dB to 1.6dB]

Object : bts

Default value : 0dB

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:sigPowerOverboost cannot be set to 1.6because bsPowerControl is not enabled or btsis not a BTS18000 or is not operating in 1900MHz frequency band

Release : V16

sigPReserved2 Class 3

Description : This attribute is reserved for future use.

Value range : [-32768 to 32767]


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V12


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 455

site

Description : Name that identifies the site.

Value range : String [1 to 16 characters]


Type : DD

siteGsmFctList Class 2

Description : List of up to 14 elements identifying the GSM functionsconfigured in a site BCF.

Value range : [entityMgt / download / siteMgt / abisSig / abisTraf / rfTrans/ rfRecep / cellMgt / fhMgt / tdmaMgt / tsMgt / gsmTime /car0Fil / freqMgt]

Routing mode

The routing mode of the messages handled by the GSMfunctions, enabling the Abis interface to identify the GSMentity to which the messages are sent, and the maximumresponse time of each GSM function summarized in thefollowing table.

GSM function Routing modeResponse

time

Withoutcentralized

O&M

With centralized

O&M

GSM entity Management relative tei bcf 10 seconds

downloading relative tei relative tei 32 seconds

site Management relative tei bcf 120 seconds

abis SignallingManagement

bcf bcf 120 seconds

abis Traffic Management bcf bcf 120 seconds

radio frequencyTransmission

bcf bcf 120 seconds

radio frequency Reception not implemented none 0 second

cell Management bcf bcf 120 seconds

frequency hoppingManagement

relative tei bcf 30 seconds


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


GSM function Routing modeResponse

time

Withoutcentralized

O&M

With centralized

O&M

tdma Management relative tei bcf 30 seconds

time slot Management relative tei bcf 30 seconds

gsmTime not implemented none 0 second

carrier 0 Filling not implemented none 0 second

frequency Management bcf bcf 120 seconds


Default value : site Mgt/abisSig

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:Each function occurs once in the list.

• [C/M]:The "entityMgt", "download", "tdmaMgt", and"tsMgt" functions are included in the list.

• [C/M]:The "freqMgt" function is only allowed for aBTS using cavity coupling.

• [M]:The "fhMgt" function is included in the list ifbts objects dependent on the btsSiteManagerobject are authorized to hop (btsIsHopping).

Notes : • The GSM functions whose routing mode is "notimplemented" must not be included in the list. See thepreceding table.

• The GSM entities managing these GSM functions areBCF and TRX.

siteName

Description : Reference name of a radio site on the OMC-R. It beginswith a letter and is case sensitive.

The name of a site can be used in all MMI commands toreference the site on the OMC-R.



Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 457

Checks : • [C/M]:The name of a site is unique to the OMC-R.

Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL parameternames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.The valid symbols are:

• letter characters: A, B, C..., Z, a, b, c..., z.

• digit symbols: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9.

• minus sign: -

• undescore: _

• space:

slc Class 2

Description : Code of an SS7 channel. It is identical on BSC and MSCends.



Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The code of an SS7 link is one-of-a-kind to theBSC.

small to large zone HO priority Class 3

Description : External priority of inter-zone handovers from the innerzone to the outer zone in a concentric cell.

This attribute is defined if the associated bts objectdescribes a concentric cell.



Default value : 17

Condition : To define if the associated bts object describes aconcentric cell.

Type : DP

Release : V9


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


smoke detector Class 2

Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment "smokedetector" in S4000 Oudoor, S4000 Smart or S8000Outdoor.



Type : DP

Release : V9

smsCB Class 3

Description : Whether broadcasting of short messages inunacknowledged mode is authorized in a cell.

Value range : [used / unused]

Object : bts

Default value : used

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:The attribute value is "used" if thechannelType of one of the channelobjects dependent on the bts object is"bcchSdcch4CBCH" or "sdcch8CBCH" .

Remark : Configuration of logical channels and broadcast of shortmessages are managed by two separate OMC-R functions.

When a short message broadcast is started, the presenceof a CBCH in the channelType of a channel objectdependent on a concerned bts object is checked.

However, the SMS-CB function is not aware of changesmade to that attribute.

Consequently, withdrawing a CBCH from the configurationwill stop any short message broadcast in the concernedcell without the SMS-CB function knowing.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 459

software

Description : Identifier of a software object.

The software object class allows users to manage thesoftware releases of bsc objects (BSC), btsSiteManagerobjects (BCF), transceiverEquipment objects (TRX), andtranscoderBoard objects (TCB). Software objects aremanaged by the OMC-R "Software Management" function.

The software objects have four attributes: sWVersionBackUp, sWVersionFallback, sWVersionNew, andsWVersionRunning. They are managed by the systemaccording to the following user commands: Download,Activate new version, and Return to previous version.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : software

Type : Id

Checks : Checks common to all software objects:

• [C]:The software object is not created for theparent managed object.

• [C]:The sWVersionRunning attribute is defined(nonzero value).


Additional checks performed on the software-bsc object:

• [C]:The sWVersionRunning attribute matches thebscType of the bsc object.

• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the bsc object is locked.

• [D]:All objects dependent on the bsc object aredeleted.

Additional checks performed on the software-btsSiteManager object:

• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe btsSiteManager object is locked.

• [D]:All objects dependent on the btsSiteManagerobject are deleted.

Additional check performed on the software-transceiverEquipment object:


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked,the parent bts object is locked, and thetransceiverEquipment object is locked.

Additional check performed on the software-transcoderBoard object:

• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe transcoderBoard object is locked.

softwareLabel

Description : This attribute is a comment about the related software.This attribute is modified by the Manager. Value changesare notified to the Manager.



Type : DP

Release : V13

source indicator

Description : Select messages according to the source of the operation.


Value range : [resource operation / management operation / unknown]


Type : DP

specific problems

Description : Selecting messages according to a (cause, fault number)pair.

This parameter allows selection of a fault number with oneor more associated causes. Refer to these entries in theDictionary.

Do not fill in if this criterion is not selected.


Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 461

speechMode Class 3

Description : List of the speech algorithms associated with channel usemodes in the cell.

The "full rate" value refers to the standard algorithm.

The "enhanced full rate" value only applies when all theTCUs linked to the BSC are equipped with TCB2 boards(refer to the version entry in the Dictionary).

Value range : list of [algoid]where:algoid id : full rate, enhanced,full rate, AMR full rate, AMR half rate

Object : bts

Default value : [full rate, enhanced full rate]

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The "full rate" value is mandatory; it must bedefined in the list.

• [C/M]:The "enhanced full rate" value is defined inthe list if at least one of the TCUs linked to theBSC is equipped with TCB2 boards.

Release : V8

speechMode Class 3

Description : List of the speech algorithms associated with channel usemodes on the A interface.

The "full rate" value refers to the standard algorithm.

The "enhanced full rate" value only applies when all theTCUs linked to the BSC are equipped with TCB2 boards.

Value range : list of [algoid]where:algoid id: full rate, enhanced,full rate, AMR full rate, AMR half rate


Default value : [full rate, enhanced full rate]

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The "full rate" value is mandatory; it must bedefined in the list.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [C/M]:The "enhanced full rate" value is defined inthe list if at least one of the TCUs linked to theBSC is equipped with TCB2 boards.

Release : V8

speechOnHoppingTs Class 3

Description : This attribute is reserved for future use.

Value range : [true, false]

Object : bts



Type : DP

Release : V12

speechVersionAsscomp Class 1

Description : Whether the "Speech version" element is used or not in theASSIGN COMPLETE messages (Phase II compliance).




Type : DP

Release : V12

speechVersionHoperf Class 1

Description : Whether the "Speech version" element is used or notin the HANDOVER PERFORMED messages (Phase IIcompliance).



Default value :

Type : DP

Release : V12

speechVersionHoreq Class 1

Description : Whether the "Speech version" element is used in theHANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE messages(Phase II compliance).



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 463



Type : DP

Release : V12

speechVersionHorqd Class 1

Description : Whether the "Speech version" element is used or not in theHANDOVER REQUIRED messages (Phase II compliance).




Type : DP

Release : V12

standard indicator AdjC Class 3

Description : Type of network in which this neighbor cell is working.

Value range : [gsm / extended gsm / dcs 1800 / pcs 1900 / R gsm /gsm850 / gsmdcs / dcsgsm / pcsgsm850 / gsm850pcs]

Object : adjacentCellHandover


Default value : gsm

Type : DP

Release : V10

Note : "gsmdcs" and "dcsgsm" are only available for S8000 DRXtransceiver architecture.

standard indicator AdjC Class 3

Description : Type of network in which this neighbor cell is working.

Value range : [gsm / extended gsm / dcs 1800 / pcs 1900 / R gsm /gsm850 / gsmdcs / dcsgsm / pcsgsm850 / gsm850pcs]


Default value : gsm


Type : DP

Release : V10



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


standardIndicator Class 2

Description : Type of network in which the cell is working.

From the value given to this attribute, the OMC-Rdetermines the network frequency band and thefrequencies used by all radio entities (cells and radio timeslots) in the related site.

Value range : [gsm / extended gsm / dcs1800 / pcs1900 / R gsm /gsmdcs / dcsgsm / gsm 850 / gsm850pcs / pcsgsm850 /gsm450 / gsm480 / gsm750 / egsmdcs / dcsegsm]

Object : bts


Type : DP

Note : GSM 900 network (gsm)

The GSM 900 frequency band is 2*25 MHz wide andincludes 124 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [1 to124], which are 200 kHz apart:

• Uplink direction (MS-to-BTS) = 890 to 915 MHz

• Downlink direction (BTS-to-MS) = 935 to 960 MHz

A frequency N corresponds to the following Uplinkfrequency:

• f1 = 890 + 0.2xN MHz where N = [1 to 124]

For the Downlink frequency there is the following shift:

• f2 = f1 + 45 MHz

EXTENDED GSM network (extended gsm)

The extended GSM frequency band is 2*35 MHz wide andincludes 174 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [0 to124] and [975 to 1023], which are 200 kHz apart:





411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 465

• f1 = 880.2 + 0.2x(N - 975) MHz where N = [975 to 1023]

• f1 = 890 + 0.2xN MHz where N = [0 to 124]


• f2 = f1 + 45 MHz

Note : The extended GSM frequency band defined above is thedefinition of the ETSI.

GSM-R network (R gsm)

The GSM-R frequency band is 2*39 MHz wide andincludes 194 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [0 to124] and [955 to 1023], which are 200 kHz apart:




• f1 = 876.2 + 0.2x(N - 955) MHz where N = [955 to 1023]

• f1 = 890 + 0.2xN MHz where N = [0 to 124]


• f2 = f1 + 45 MHz

Note : The GSM-R frequency band defined hereabove is thedefinition of the ETSI.

GSM 1800 network (dcs1800)






411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• f1 = 1710.2 + 0.2x(N - 512) MHz where N = [512 to 885]


• f2 = f1 + 95 MHz

GSM 1900 network (pcs1900)





• f1 = 1850.2 + 0.2x(N - 512) MHz where N = [512 to 810]


• f2 = f1 + 80 MHz

GSM 900 - GSM 1800 network (gsmdcs)

The primary band is GSM 900 (see above GSM 900Network paragraph).

The secondary band is GSM 1800 (see above GSM 1800Network paragraph).

GSM 1800 - GSM 900 network (dcsgsm)

The primary band is GSM 1800 (see above GSM 1800Network paragraph).

The secondary band is GSM 900 (see above GSM 900Network paragraph).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 467


GSM 850

The GSM 850 frequency band is 2*25 MHz wide andincludes 124 pairs of carrier frequencies, numbered [128to 251],

• Uplink direction = 824 to 849 MHz

• Downlink direction = 869 to 894 MHz


• f1 = 824.2 + 0.2x(N - 128) MHz where N = [128 to 251]


• f2 = f1 + 45 MHz

Release : V9

standbyStatus

Description : ISO State

Value range : [hotStandby / coldStandby / providingService]

Object : atmRm, cem, iem, lsaRc, omu, sw8kRm, trm,


Type DD

Release : V13

start date

Description : The date the first data is recorded in the log (default is thecurrent date).




Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


start time

Description : Absolute time of first job run (default is the current date andtime).


If date matches the current date, set time to a value at leastone minute after the current time.


Object : job

Type : DP

start time

Description : Start of system log reading on the requested start date(default is 00:00).

Time format entry forms are detailed in NTP < 130 >.

Do not fill in if this criterion is not selected.

Value range : [<time>]


Type : DP

startAlarmFilter

Description : Condition for triggering an alarm when no counter isinvolved.

The following fields can be combined in the logicalexpression:


administrativeState state change =

availabilityStatus state change =

bsc equipment name alarm =

bsc model alarm =

cause alarm < = >

btsSiteManager model alarm =

bts equipment name alarm =

equipment processor number alarm < = >


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 469


faultNumber alarm < = >

operationalState state change =

perceived severity alarm =

postMortem alarm =

usageState state change =

The following logical operators can be used in the logicalexpression:

• & stands for the logical AND.

• | stands for the logical OR.

• ! stands for the logical NOT.

The "postMortem" field can take two values, either "beforeBSC restart" or "after BSC restart". They have the followingmeaning:

• before BSC restart means that the notification issued bythe BSC was received by the OMC-R agent without theBSC having restarted (nominal conditions).

• after BSC restart means that the notification wasissued by the BSC, then, the BSC was restarted beforethe OMC-R agent received the notification. Thesenotifications do not trigger alarms.



Condition : To define if no counter is associated to the criterion.

Type : DP

startAlarmThreshold

Description : The maximum counting value in the reference periodwhen a start-of-alarm message is sent. The value must bechecked by users.

This attribute defines a maximum value read at the end ofthe defined refPeriod.

It must be greater than endAlarmThreshold.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646]


Type : DP

startAlarmThreshold

Description : Minimum (thresholdLow) / maximum (thresholdHigh)counting value in the reference period, below/above whicha start of "lower threshold/upper threshold" alarm messageis sent. The value must be checked by users.

If thesholdType = "thresholdLow", this attribute defines aminimum value for a one minute reference period (or thecounter collecting period for PCM unavailability counters),below which a start of "lower threshold" alarm message issent. It must be lower than startAlarmThreshold "low".

If thesholdType = "thresholdHigh", this attribute defines amaximum value for a one minute reference period (or thecounter collecting period for PCM unavailability counters),above which a start of "upper threshold" alarm message issent. It must be greater than startAlarmThreshold "high".


Value range : [0.00 to 2147483646]


Type : DP

Remark :

• The threshold limits depend on the associated counter.

• The BSS counter threshold crossing detectionmechanism is described in NTP < 07 >.

startCounterThreshold

Description : Minimum counting threshold when a counter is involved.




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 471

Condition : To define when a counter is associated with the criterion.

Type : DP

startTime

Description : Date and time the files were restored on the OMC-R agentdisks.



Condition : This attribute is significant and displayed only when the logobject describes a log restored on the OMC-R agent disks.

Type : DP

startTime

Description : Date and time the temporary observation started.

This information is provided by the system and indicatesthe exact time when the observation counters are collectedfor the first time.



Type : DI

stopTime

Description : Date and time the OMC-R agent will purge the restoredfiles.

Value range : [<date>, <time>]


Condition : This attribute is significant and displayed only when the logobject describes a log restored on the OMC-R agent disks.

Type : DP

stopTime

Description : Date and time the temporary observation will stop.



Object : mdScanner - Create temporary observation

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Checks : • [C]:stopTime - startTime > mdGranularityPeriodminutes

• [C]:stopTime - startTime < 1440 minutes (24hours)

Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified. Stop theobservation if necessary by deleting themdScanner object and restart it by creating anew mdScanner object with the appropriateattributes.

subChanId

Description : AGCH subchannel number: Do not fill in when thechannelType of the radio time slot is "tchFull" or"mainBCCH".

Value range : [0 to 7] when channelType = "sDCCH" or "sdch8CBCH",[0 to 3] otherwise

Object : channel - Set channel state

Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:The parent btsSiteManager and bts objects areunlocked.

Reminder : A BCCH or a CBCH cannot be blocked.

subject

Description : Identifier (name) of a user message in the OMC-R.

It is displayed in the "Inter-user message manager" windowof the message addressees and allows them to identify themessage before reading.


Object : user message

Type : Id

suffix

Description : Optional string of characters to add to the name of the callmonitoring data files when saved in the OMC-R.

When a suffix is defined, a call monitoring datafile transferred to the OMC-R by running theTransfer command is saved under the name"SDO_CM_BSCnnn_<suffix>.yyyymmdd ", where


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 473

"nnn" identifies the BSC hosting the data file (if bsc = 5,then nnn is read "005") and "yyyymmdd" is the file savingdate. See to NTP < 07 >.


Object : Call monitoring - Transfer (SDO)

Type DP

summary

Description : Text explaining the goal of the command file.


Type : DP

suspendResumeActivation Class 3

Description : Enables or disables the Suspend/Resume feature.

Value range : [disabled / enabled]. The recommended value is "enabled".


Object : bsc

Feature : GPRS / EDGE Suspend and Resume

Type : DP

Notes : • When disabled:

• The Suspend is still performed.

• The Resume is performed through the Routing AreaUpdate message.

• The new value does not apply to ongoing calls. Itapplies to new calls only.

Release : V15

supportingTransceiverEquipment

Description : Identifier of the TRX associated with the TDMA frame bythe BSC.

This dynamic attribute allows the user to know theTDMA-TRX/DRX association established by the BSC. It isdisplayed provided the transceiver object operationalStateis "enabled". Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.

If the TRX/DRX is declared faulty because of a frequencyloss, the system takes the following actions:


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• attempt to reconfigure the associated TDMA frame onthe redundant TRX/DRX

• if there is no redundant TRX/DRX, reconfiguration of theTDMA frame on another TRX/DRX if its priority is higherthan the priority of the TDMA frame currently configured

If the associated TDMA frame cannot be re-configured forsome reason, all frames that were using the frequency lostby the TRX/DRX will be disturbed.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : DD

Remark : Only BTSs using cavity coupling manage dynamicreconfiguration of hopping frequencies.

sw8kRm

Description : The 8k Subrate Timeswitch Ressource Module, which addssub-track switching capability to the Interface Node.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : sw8kRm

Type : Id

sw8kRmId

Description : Identifier of the ’sw8kRm’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000and TCU 3000.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : sw8kRm

Type : DP

Release : V13

sWVersionBackUp

Description : Reference number of the backup software release. It isidentical to sWVersionRunning.

Refer to the sWVersionRunning entry in the Dictionary.

Value range : [Bsxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)]


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 475

Object : software

Type : DP

sWVersionFallBack

Description : Reference number of the previous software release. It isupdated following a version change command.


This attribute is undefined when the object is created.

As a result of an Activate new version command, thesystem updates the sWVersionFallBack attribute with thereference of the software release previously running in therelated BSS entity.

As a result of a Return to previous version command, thesystem sets the sWVersionFallBack attribute undefined.

Value range : [Bsxabvcdefgh (BSC software) / XXXabcdef (others)]

Object : software

Type : DP

sWVersionNew

Description : Reference number of the new software release. It isupdated following a download or version change command.


This attribute is undefined when the object is created.

As a result of an Activate new version command, thesystem sets the sWVersionNew attribute undefined.

As a result of a Download or Return to previous versioncommand, the system updates the sWVersionNewattribute with the reference of the software releasedownloaded or that was presently running in the relatedBSS entity.

Value range : [9 to 12] String

Object : software

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


sWVersionRunning Class 2

Description : Reference number of the software release currentlyrunning. It is defined by the user at object creation time andis updated following version change commands.

This parameter identifies the type and version of thesoftware currently running in the related BSS entity. Checkthe BSS delivery descriptor file to fill it in when creating thesoftware object.

As a result of an Activate new version or Return toprevious version command, the system updates thesWVersionRunning attribute with the reference of thesoftware release newly activated in the related BSS entity.

For more information on the reference number formats foreach type of BSS entity driven by software, refer to the"delivery" entry in this Dictionary.

Value range : String from 9 to 12 characters

Object : software

Type : DP

Checks : • [C]:The attribute is defined (nonzero value).

• [C]:The first three letters of the reference numbermatch the type of the managed object relatedto the software object.

• [C]:For a software-bsc object, the version numbercomplies with the bscType of the parent bscobject.

synchronized Class 3

Description : Whether the neighbor cell and the associated serving cellare synchronous, and is attached to the same BTS.

Value range : [not synchronized cells / synchronized cells / pre sync HOwith timing advance / pre sync HO, default timing advance]

• "not synchronized cells": the neighbor cell and theserving cell are not attached to the same BTS

• "synchronized cells": the neighbor cell and the servingcell are attached to the same BTS

• "pre sync HO with timing advance": the handoverprocedure between the neighbor cell and the servingcell is pre-synchronized with the GSM Real Time


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

S 477

Difference between the neighbor cell and the servingcell in the "HANDOVER COMMAND" message

• "pre sync HO, default timing advance": a pre-definedtiming advance is used in the pre-synchronizedhandover procedure between the serving cell and theneighbor cell. Refer to "preSynchroTimingAdvance"parameter.


Default value : not synchronized cells

Type : DP

synchronizing PCM

Description : Synchronizing PCM choice (on Ater interface).

Value range : [synchro mic 0, synchro mic 2, synchro mic 4, synchro mic6, synchro internal clock]

Object : bsc

Type : DD

Release : V10

syntheticFaultNumber

Description : A synthetic fault number assigned to the alarm when acounter is involved.



Condition : To define when a counter is associated to the criterion.

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The number is in the range [39500 to 39549].

systemInfoType2 Class 2


Value range : disabled/enabled

Object : bts

Type : DP

Release : V15


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


system state

Description : The state of the configurable BSC boards and state of thetraffic to the MSC.


• active - passive link [opened / closed]

• bsc ............. [simplex / duplex]

• chain ............ [active / passive]

• chain ............ [ready / not ready]

• ECI DDTI ALA SWM initialization [allowed / not allowed]

• reset MSCL ....... [in progress / not in progress]

• other chain ....... [ready / not ready]


Type : DD

Tt3101 Class 3

Description : BSC timer triggered during the immediate assignmentprocedure. Use the suggested system value.

It is set on transmission of CHANNEL ACTIVATION by theBSC and canceled on receipt of ESTABLISH INDICATIONsent by the BTS.


Object : bts

Default value : 3

Type : DP

t3103 Class 3

Description : BSC timer triggered during the handover procedure. Usethe suggested system value.

It is set on transmission of HANDOVER COMMAND bythe BSC and canceled on receipt of either HANDOVERCOMPLETE or HANDOVER FAILURE sent by the MS(intra-bss handover), or CLEAR COMMAND sent by theMSC (inter-bss handover). At expiry of T3103, the channelis released.

Value range : [2 to 255] seconds (t3103 < bssMapT8)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 479

Object : bts

Default value : 5 seconds

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:t3103 < bssMapT8 (attribute of the parent bscobject)

t3107 Class 3

Description : BSC timer triggered during the assignment commandprocedure. Use the suggested system value.

It is set on transmission of ASSIGN COMMAND bythe BSC and canceled on receipt of either ASSIGNCOMPLETE or ASSIGN FAILURE sent by MS.


Object : bts


Type : DP

t3109 Class 3

Description : BSC timer triggered during the SACCH deactivationprocedure. Use the suggested system value.

It is set on receipt of DEACTIVATE SACCHACKNOWLEDGE sent by the BTS and canceled onreceipt of RELEASE INDICATION sent by the BTS. If thetimer expires, an RF CHANNEL RELEASE message issent to the BTS and an RF CHANNEL RELEASE ACK isexpected.

Mobiles comply with system operating conditions when thecounter (S) associated with SACCH messages is assigneda value below or equal to t3109.

Value range : [2 to 255] seconds (t3109 ≥ radioLinkTimeout)

Object : bts


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:t3109 ≥ radioLinkTimeout


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


t3111 Class 3

Description : BSC timer triggered during the radio resource clearingprocedure. Use the suggested system value.

It is set on receipt of RELEASE INDICATION sent by theBTS. On elapse, the BSC sends RF CHANNEL RELEASE.


Object : bts

Default value : 2 seconds (1 second in a GSM-R context)

Type : DP

t3122 Class 3

Description : Minimum time that mobiles must wait before issuing achannel allocation request when an immediate assignmenthas failed.


Object : bts


Type : DP

t3168 Class 3

Description : This timer is used at the MS side to define when to stopwaiting for the PUAS message after sending either a PRRmessage or a Channel Request in a PDAN.

Value range : [0 (500 ms)1 (1000 ms)2 (1500 ms)3 (2000 ms)4 (2500 ms)5 (3000 ms)6 (3500 ms)7 (4000 ms)]

Object : bts

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V14


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 481

t3172 Class 3

Description : Value of the timer started by the mobile on reception of aPacket Access Reject message (in seconds)


Object : bts


Default value : 20

Type : DP

Release : V12

t3192 Class 3

Description : Wait for DL TBF release after reception of the final block.This timer is used on the MS side to define when the MSreceived all the RLC data blocks. When the timer expires,the MS releases the resources associated with the TBFand begins to monitor its paging group (DRX mode).

Value range : [0 (500 ms)1 (1000 ms)2 (1500 ms)3 (0 ms)4 (80 ms)5 (120 ms)6 (160 ms)7 (200 ms)]

Object : bts

Type : DP

Default value : 0

Release : V14

target Bda

Description :Target BDA for the On-line reset command

See NTP < 130 >.

Value range : [running / new / old]

• "running" for "BDA Edition" reset on-line (i.e. basic BDAchange without prototype BDA change)

• "new" or "old" for "BDA Version" reset on line (i.e. BSCupgrades with prototype BDA change)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : bsc - On-line reset

Type : DP

Release : V11

tcu2gGroup

Description : This parameter gives the TCU 2G core process id

Value range : Only 4 values are possible: [34, 35 36 and 37]

Object : Tcu2G

Type : DD

Release : V16

teiBtsSiteManager Class 2

Description : TEI address of the site BCF in the LAPD protocol.

In a BTS chain, the TEI addresses must be allocated inascending order (TEI0, TEI1, TEI2, etc.), beginning with theBTS closest to the BSC.

In a BTS loop configuration, the TEI addresses must beallocated in ascending order (TEI0, TEI1, TEI2, etc.),beginning with the BTS directly linked to the BSC that usesDTI board no.0 for the Abis link input.

The following TEI values 3, 7, 11, 15, and 19 are forbiddenwhen T1 PCMs on Abis interface are used.

The relationship between internal E1 PCM TSs (DTI, PCMIor CPCMI) or BSC (DDTI) and external PCM TSs is thefollowing:

E1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

T1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

E1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

T1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 483

E1 PCM TSs 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 28 are not mappedonto T1 PCM TSs. The scheduled or "rendez-vous" TSs(=teiBtsSiteManager +1) cannot be defined on theseinternal E1 PCM TSs

Value range : Depending on the BTS type, the value range is:

• [0 to 9] for a BTS 18000

• [0 to 13] for an S12000

• [0 to 15] for all other BTSs


Type : DP

• [C/M]:The number of TEI addresses allotted to aLAPD channel is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh(static configuration data).

Checks :

• [C/M]:Values 3, 7, 11 and 15 are forbidden in T1mode.

teiLapdLink

Description : TEI address of the LAPD link in the LAPD protocol. It isupdated by the OMC-R agent according to the TEI addressallotted by the user to the entity (BCF, TRX/DRX, TCU)using the LAPD link.


Object : lapdLink - Display

Type : DP


teiTransceiverEqpt Class 2

Description : TEI address of the TRX/DRX in the LAPD protocol.

Value range : The value range is:

• [14 to 55], case of an S12000

• [14 to 79], case of a BTS 18000 and a BSC 3000

• [14 to 65], case of a BTS 18000 and a BSC 12000HC

• [16 to 63], in other cases


Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [C/M]:The number of TEI addresses allotted to aLAPD channel is limited to maxTeiPerLapdCh(static configuration data).

• [C/M]:The TEI address is not assigned to anothertransceiverEquipment object dependent on thesame bts object.

• [C/M]:HPRM does not support following TEIs:14, 17, 18, 21, 22, 25, 34, 37, 42, 45, 50, 53,64, 67, 70, 73, 76, 79

• [M]:No mdScanner object refers to thetransceiverEquipment object (no observation isrunning on the TRX/DRX or the parent cell).

Checks :

• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked, the parentbts object and the transceiverEquipment objectare locked.

teiTranscoder Class 2

Description : TEI address of the TCU in the LAPD protocol.


Object : transcoder

Type : DP

BSC 2g: The TEI address is not assigned toanother transcoder object dependent on thesame bsc object.

• [C/M]:

Bsc 3000: No check. The TEI address is notused by BSC 3000.

Checks :

• [C/M]:0 ≤ teiTranscoder ≤ 126

temporaryOffset Class 3

Description : Negative offset applied during Penalty Time for re-selectinga cell (C2 criterion).

This negative offset is applied during the entirepenaltyTime duration and allows to preventspeeding mobiles from selecting the cell. Refer tothe cellReselectOffset entry in the Dictionary.


Object : bts

Feature : AR 264

Default value : 70


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 485

Type : DP

Release : V8

terminal name

Description : Name of a terminal as defined in its profile (default is thelogged-in user’s terminal).




Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:The terminal is known to the OMC-R.

Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL objectnames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.

terminal profile

Description : Identifier (name) of an OMC-R terminal

Value range : [case sensitive, 1 character min.]


Type : Id

• [C]:The name of a terminal is unique to theOMC-R.

Checks :

• [M/D]:The terminal profile object is created.

text

Description : Comment to display before running the next command

The Echo : text = blah blah blah command can be insertedanywhere in a command file, and as many times asnecessary. The text is displayed as it is in session logswhen the command file is run.

Value range : [unlimited number of characters]

Object : commandFile - Echo command

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


text

Description : Contents of a short message. It is broadcast as it is.

Value range : [93 characters max]


Type : DP

text

Description : Contents of a user message. It is sent as it is.

Value range : [unlimited number of characters]

Object : user message

Type : DP

tFH or RWM Class 2

Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment "microwaveterminal" in 4000 Outdoor.



Type : DP

Release : V9

tGMMKeepAlive Class 3

Description : Configures the GMM Keep Alive mechanism.


• 0: the feature is disabled (the same Keep Alive timer isused for data and GMM procedures)

• [1..63] (1 unit = 100 ms): enables the feature and setsthe GMM Keep Alive timer duration. The recommendedvalue is 5

• 64: the Keep Alive mechanism is disabled for GMMprocedures

Object : bts

Feature : 23038 - Disabling ’TBF Keep Alive’

Type : DP

Release : V15


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 487

thresholdCCCHLoadIndication Class 3

Description : Threshold used by the BTS to inform the BSC about aCCCH congestion (104 is the only value accepted)


Object : bts

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The only value accepted by the system is"104".


thresholdInterference Class 2

Description : List of four thresholds defined in ascending order, used to sort idle channels onthe basis of measured interference levels.

This attribute, together with the averagingPeriod attribute, allows to manageinterferences in a radio cell. The classification is used by the radio resourceallocator.

The interference processing algorithm for a cell is as follows:

• For each idle radio channel, the BTS permanently measures the signalstrength level RXLEV.

• When averagingPeriod "Measurement results" messages have beenreceived, the L1M function in the BTS calculates interference level averages,sorts the idle channels according to the five defined interference levels (Level0 corresponds to the lowest interference level), and sends the informationto the BSC.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• The BSC tallies the interference levels and, if the temporary "interference"observation is running for the bsc object, sends the channelIdleLevelMaxand channelIdleLevelEch counters every <mdGranularityPeriod> minutesto the OMC-R agent.

Refer also to C1619 permanent observation counters.



Default value: -100 -90 -80 -70

Type : DP

• [C/M]:The thresholds are defined in ascending order.Checks :

• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and the associated bts objectis locked.

thresholdType

Description : Type of thresholds managed

The startAlarmThreshold and endAlarmThresholdattribute values, which trigger permanent BSS observationcounter threshold overflow messages, depend on the typeof thresholds managed by the mdWarning object. Refer tothese entries in the Dictionary.

Value range : [thresholdLow / thresholdHigh]


Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 489

timeBetweenHOConfiguration Class 3

Description : Whether the hoPingpongTimeRejection timer can beused in a BSS when processing handovers.

Refer to bts object bts time between HO configurationand adjacentCellHandOver object hoPingpongTimeRejection attributes in this Dictionary of Parameters.


Object : bsc


Default value : used

Type : DP

Release : V9

timerGcchNotif Class 3

Description : Time between two FACCH notifications.



Default value : 2 (recommended)

Feature : ASCI

Type : DP

Release : GSM-R V15

timerPeriodicUpdateMS Class 3

Description : Time between two location update requests.

Value range : [0 to 255] 1/10th of hour. "0" means that no periodiclocation update is requested.

Object : bts

Default value : 60

Type : DP

Remark : The operator must be aware that the input of low valuesfor this attribute causes an important traffic load duringthe location update procedures. For instance, enteringthe value "1" for this attribute leads to that all Mobiles willexecute an update of their LAC every 6 minutes.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


timeSlotNumber

Description : PCM time slot used by a LAPD link

Since all radio sites house a switching facility, the BSC candirectly map the LAPD link onto a PCM time slot.

Value range : [1 to 24] (GSM 1900/850 networks),[1 to 31] (other networks).

Object : lapdLink


Note : This parameter is only available for the lapdLink OMLobject on BSC 3000.

Type : DD

Remark : The LAPD link with a radio site BCF always uses TSn =pcmTimeSlotNumber (radio site scheduled time slot).Refer to this entry in the Dictionary.

timeSlotNumber Class 2

Description : PCM time slot used by an SS7 channel on the A interface



Type : DP

• [C/M]:The time slot is not already assigned on theA interface to a signallingLink or xtp objectdependent on the same bsc object and is notmapped on the TS used by the OMC channelon the Ater interface.

Checks :

• [C/M]:If the SS7 link uses PCMA link no.3(pcmCircuitId), the timeslot is in the range [1to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or in therange [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link.Since the last four time slots of that link arenot mapped on the Ater interface, they areunusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entryin the Dictionary).

timeSlotNumber

Description : PCM time slot used by a terrestrial circuit on the A interface

Value range : [1 to 24] (GSM 1900/850 networks),[1 to 31] (other networks).

Object : xtp


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 491

Type : DP

• [C]:The time slot is identical to the mscPcmTsNumber component of the xtp object cic attribute(refer to this entry in the Dictionary).

• [C]:The time slot is not already assigned on theA interface to an xtp or signallingLink objectdependent on the same bsc object, and is notmapped on the TS used by the OMC channelon the Ater interface.

Checks :

• [C]:If the terrestrial circuit uses PCMA link no.3(pcmCircuitId), the timeslot is in the range [1to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link or in therange [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1 link.Since the last four time slots of that link arenot mapped on the Ater interface, they areunusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entryin the Dictionary).

Restrictions : • [M]:This attribute cannot be modified due toits relationship with the mscPcmTsNumbercomponent of the cic attribute.

tmu

Description : The Traffic Management Unit, which is responsible formanaging the GSM protocol : it provides processing powerfor Call Processing, terminates GSM protocol (A, Abis andAter interfaces), terminates low level GSM protocol (LAPDand SS7).

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : tmu

Type : Id

Release : V13

tmuId

Description : Identifier of the ’tmu’ object class. This identifier isallocated by the MD-R at object creation, depending on theshelf and slot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attributecannot be modified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000and TCU 3000.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : tmu

Type : DP

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


tnOffset class 2

Description : Allows to specify and control Timeslot Number(TN) difference between BTSs in case of networksynchronization by GPS.

Refer also to the fnOffset entry in this dictionary.



Type : DP


Default value : 0

Release : V15


tNwExtUtbf Class 3

Description : Inactive period timer.

Maximum time of inactivity during which the UL radioresources are not released.


Object : bts

Default value : 0

Type : DP


Checks : • [M]:tNwExtUtbf value must be greater than orequal to tUsfExt value.

Release : V15

traceConstraintList

Description : List of logical expressions that allow to filter the informationto display. The following filter criteria are used: [bsPower /bssTraceType / bssTraceTypeUsed / establishmentCause/ hoCauseClass / hoClauseValue / hoRrResult / mobileId/ msPower / pcm / recordingEntity / rrCause / timeSlot /timingAdvance / tracedBts / traceRecId / traceReferenceCrit / trStartTime / trStopTime. / trxIdrxId].


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 493

See NTP < 130> .


Type : DP

traceControl

Description : Identifier of a traceControl object defined with regard to themd object.

It describes the Call tracing function of a BSC.

A traceControl object is created in locked state. Unlock theobject to start collecting data in the related BSC.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]


Type : Id

• [C]:The traceControl object is not created for themd object.

• [C/M/D]:The application database of the related BSCis not being built.

• [C/M/D]:If the application database of the relatedBSC is built, the BSS/OMC-R link isestablished and no audit is in-progress inthe BSC.

Checks :

• [M/D]:The traceControl object is created.

Release : V8

traceDayAccessed

Description : Date of data recording


Setting this parameter limits the display to trace datarecorded on the specified day.



Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


traceFileName

Description : Name of a call tracing or call path tracing data file on theOMC-R agent disks. The naming rules are described inNTP < 07 >.

Object : traceFileReadyRecord

Type : DP

Note : Use only alphanumeric characters (30 max.), beginningwith a letter and is case sensitive, for ALL objectnames (TRX, BSC, BTS, BTSSM, etc.). All othersymbols/characters are prohibited.

traceInfoRequested

Description : List of information to display with respect to the type.

See NTP < 129 >.

Value range : [abisInfo / bsicInfo / bssMapInfo / btsInfo / ChannelInfo /cicInfo / dtapInfo / handoverInfo / manufacturerExtInfo Aand Ater / manufacturerExtInfo Abis / measurementInfo/ msClassmarkInfo / powerControlIn fo / rrInfo /timingAdvanceInfo / trxInfo / txPowerInfo]


Type : DP

traceReference

Description : Reference of a trace message received from the MSC.

Value range : [0 to 63] (Phase I)[0 to 65535] (Phase II)

Object : traceFileReadyRecord

Type : DP

traffic PCM allocation priority Class 2

Description : Allocation priority of a TDMA frame on the covering sitePCMs.

This attribute is used in case of Abis PCM reconfiguration.



Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and theparent bts object is locked.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 495

Release : V9

Note : "0" should be assigned to the highest priority frame(s).

transceiver

Description : Identifier of a transceiver object defined with regard to a btsobject.

It defines the parent transceiver object.


Object : channel

Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The transceiver object is created.

transceiver

Description : Identifier of a transceiver object defined with regard to a btsobject.

By definition, a TDMA frame is related to a cell, a cell isrelated to a site, and a site is related to a BSC.

In all MMI commands, a transceiver object can be referredto by the sequence "siteName.cellName.transceiver",where siteName and cellName respectively identify thecovering site and cell by name.

A TDMA frame is brought in service on the network atcreation time. It is working when the parent bts object isunlocked.



Type : Id

Checks : • [C]: The maximum number of TDMA framescontrolled by a BSC depends on its type andhardware version, as shown in the followingtable:


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


BSC 12000HC

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5

120 120 160 160 160

Checks : • [C]:The number of TDMA frames per cell is limitedto 16, regardless of the type of the BSC thatcontrols the cell.

• [C]:The handOverControl and powerControlobjects are created for the parent bts object.

• [C]:If the parent bts object describes a concentriccell, two transceiverZone objects are createdfor that object.

• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe parent bts object is locked.


transceiver equipment class Class 2

Description : The class of a TRX/DRX.

The class of a TRX/DRX sets, among others, its maximumtransmission power. The attribute possible values have thefollowing meaning:

• Class 1 corresponds to GSM 900 class 5 or GSM1800/1900 class 1 (20W to 40W transmitters).

• Class 2 corresponds to GSM 900 class 6 which is notsupported or GSM 1800/1900 class 2 (10W to 20Wtransmitters).

When dual band (concentric cell) is used, the class of aTRX/DRX enables to distinguish which DRX and whichTDMA are used in the outer zone or inner zone.

Class 1 corresponds to a TDMA in the frequency bandcarrying BCCH so belonging to transceiverZone = 0(large/outer zone).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 497

Class 2 corresponds to a TDMA in the frequency bandnot carrying BCCH so belonging to transceiverZone = 1(small/inner zone).

When cell is dualband, transceiver equipment class valuesdifferentiate TRX of the main band (for which the classvalue is 1) and TRX of the extended band (for which theclass value is 2).

Value range : [0 (reserved) / 1 / 2]


Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:Concentric cell: If the TRX/DRX is partneredwith a TDMA frame, its class matches theTRX/DRX class allotted to the zone to whichthe TDMA frame belongs (refer to the nextentry).

Release : V9

transceiver zone Ref Class 2

Description : Identifier of the transceiverZone object that defines thezone to which a TDMA frame belongs in a concentric cell.

Value range : [0 (large or outer zone) / 1 (small or inner zone)]


Condition : To define if the covering cell is concentric

Type : DP

• [C]:The referenced transceiverZone object iscreated for the parent bts object.

Checks :

• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and theparent bts object is locked.

Release : V9

transceiverEquipment

Description : Identifier of a transceiverEquipment object defined withregard to a bts object.

It defines the related transceiverEquipment object.


Object : software


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The transceiverEquipment object is created.

transceiverEquipment

Description : Identifier of a transceiverEquipment object defined withregard to a bts object.

By definition, a TRX/DRX is related to a cell, a cell isrelated to a site, and a site is related to a BSC.

In all MMI commands, a transceiverEquipment object canbe referred to by the sequence "siteName.cellName.transceiverEquipment", where siteName and cellNamerespectively identify the covering site and cell by name.



Type : Id

• [C]:The number of TRX/DRXs per site is limitedto 24, regardless of the type of the BSC thatcontrols the site.

• [C]:The number of TRX/DRXs per cell is limitedto 16, regardless of the type of the BSC thatcontrols the cell.

• [C]:The handOverControl and powerControlobjects are created for the parent bts object.

• [C]:The referenced lapdLink objects (lapdLinkOMLRef and lapdLinkRSLRef) are created forthe parent bsc object.

• [C]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe parent bts object is locked.

• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked, theparent btsSiteManager and bts objects arelocked, and the transceiverEquipment objectis locked.


Checks :

• [D]:No traceControl or callPathTrace object refersto the transceiverEquipment object (the BSCCall tracing or Call path tracing function doesnot monitor that object).


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 499

transceiver equipment class

Description : Class of the TRX/DRXs partnered with the TDMA framesof the zone.

The class of a TRX/DRX sets, among others, its maximumtransmission power. Refer to the previous entry.

When dual band (concentric cell) is used, the class of aTRX/DRX enables to distinguish which DRX and whichTDMA are used in the outer zone or inner zone.

Class 1 corresponds to a TDMA in the frequency bandcarrying BCCH so belonging to transceiverZone = 0(large/outer zone).

Class 2 corresponds to a TDMA in the frequency bandnot carrying BCCH so belonging to transceiverZone = 1(small/inner zone).


Object : transceiverZone

Type : DP


Release : V9

Note : The transceiverZone objects are only created for btsobjects that describe concentric cells.

transceiverZone

Description : Identifier of a transceiverZone object that describes thelarge zone or the small zone of a concentric cell.

The transceiverZone objects are only significant for the btsobjects that describe concentric cells. Two transceiverZoneobjects are created for each created concentric bts object;one describes the large or outer transmission zone, and theother describes the small or inner transmission zone.

Value range : [0 (large or outer zone) / 1 (small or inner zone)]


Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The associated bts object is created and thetransceiverZone object is not created for thatobject.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• [C]:The number of transmission zones in aconcentric cell equals 2. Each transceiverZoneobject is one-of-a -kind to the associated btsobject.

• [C/D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe associated bts object is locked.



• [D]:No transceiver object refers to thetransceiverZone object.

Release : V9

transcoder2GEqptId

Description : Identifier of the ’transcoder2GEqpt’ object class. Thisidentifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. Theonly value allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannotbe modified. This attribute is relevant for TCU 2G.


Object : transcoder2GEqpt

Type : DP

Release : V13

transcoder3GEqptId

Description : Identifier of the ’hardware transcoder 3G’ object class. Thisidentifier is allocated by the MD-R at object creation. Theonly value allocated by the MD-R is 0. This attribute cannotbe modified. This attribute is relevant for TCU 3000.



Type : DP

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 501

transcoder

Description : Identifier of a transcoder object defined with regard to a bscobject.

It defines the parent transcoder object.

Value range : [0 to 11] (BSC 12000HC, E1 PCM network),[0 to 13] (BSC 12000HC, T1 PCM network),

[0 to 33] (BSC 3000, E1 PCM network),[0 to 33] (BSC 3000, T1 PCM network)

Object : pcmCircuit (A interface)

Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The transcoder object is created.

transcoder


Value range : [0 to 11] (BSC 12000HC, E1 PCM network),[0 to 13] (BSC 12000HC, T1 PCM network),

[0 to 33] (BSC 3000, E1 PCM network),[0 to 33] (BSC 3000, T1 PCM network)

Object : transcoder

Type : Id

• [C]:The number of remote transcoders linked to aBSC is limited to maxTranscdPerBsc (staticconfiguration data).


• [C]:The referenced lapdLink object (lapdLinkOMLRef) is created for the parent bscobject.


• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe transcoder object is locked.

Checks :



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


transcoder


It defines the parent transcoder object.

Value range : [0 to 11] (BSC 12000HC, E1 PCM network),[0 to 13] (BSC 12000HC, T1 PCM network).


Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The transcoder object is created.

transcoderAlarmList

Description : This attribute is relevant only for BSC 12000HC. Activationstate of the internal alarm loops of the transcoder. Themanager may either display it (in French) without previousdecoding, or decode provided raw data for displaying inEnglish. This attribute is dynamically managed by the BSS.Value changes are not notified to the Manager.

Value range : [KO/OK]

Object : transcoder2GEqpt

Type : DD

Release : V13

transcoderAlarmMask Class 3

Description : Configuration of external alarms in a TCU [xx]: Theexternal alarm loop is monitored (not monitored) when bit 0is set to 1 (0), bit 1 indicates whether operating anomaliesof the TCU external clock are notified (1) or not (0) to theOMC-R.

Object : transcoder

Default value : 11

Type : DP


transcoderArchitecture

Description : Indicates the TCU hardware configuration. This attributeis modified by the Manager. Value changes are notified tothe Manager. This attribute can only be modified if the BDAis not built.

Value range : [tcu2G / tcu3G ]


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 503

Object : transcoder

Default value :

Type : DP

Release : V13

transcoderBoard

Description : Identifier of a transcoderBoard object defined with regardto a transcoder object.

Value range : [0 to 7] (GSM 1900/850 network),[0 to 9] (other networks).


Type : Id

• [C]:The number of transcoding boards housed in aTCU is limited to maxTranscdBPerTranscd(static configuration data).


• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe transcoderBoard object is locked.

Checks :


transcoderBoard

Description : Identifier of a transcoderBoard object defined with regardto a transcoder object.

It defines the related transcoderBoard object.

Value range : [0 to 7] (GSM 1900 or GSM 850 network),[0 to 9] (other networks).

Object : software-transcoderBoard

Type : Id

Checks : • [C]:The transcoderBoard object is created.

transcoderBoardIntState

Description : TCB internal state.


• working ..........The board is working.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• fault ............An error was detected on theboard.


Type : DD

transcoderId Class 2

Description : Identifier of the remote transcoder linked to the PCM linkthat carries the SS7 channel on the A interface.



Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The referenced transcoder object is createdand the pcmCircuit object used by thesignallingLink object (pcmCircuitId) is relatedto that object.

transcoderId Class 2

Description : Identifier of the remote transcoder linked to the PCM linkthat carries the terrestrial circuit on the A interface.


Object : xtp

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The referenced transcoder object is createdand the pcmCircuit object used by the xtpobject (pcmCircuitId) is related to that object.

transcoderIntPcmIntState

Description : State of the TCU internal PCM links. Each link is identifiedby a serial number n = [0 to 15].

Value range : [0 to 15] [working / fault]

• working ..........The internal PCM is working.

• fault ............An error was detected on the PCMlink.

Object : transcoder

Type : DD



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 505

transcoderMatrix

Description : Configuration of the TCU switching matrix = mapping PCMAter TS <=> PCM A TS.

This attribute describes the relation between the TSs of thefour PCM A links used by the TCU (A interface) and theTSs of the PCM Ater link used by the TCU (Ater interface).The following tables show the correspondence when PCME1 or T1 links are used.

Object : transcoder - Display

Type : DP


PCM E1 links

TS PCMAter

PCM A TS PCM A

1 (LAPDchannel)

- no equivalence

23456789

00000000

1591317212529

26101418222630

37111519232731

481216202428

91011121314151617

111111111

26101418222630

37111519232731

481216202428

1591317212529

171819202122232425

222222222

37111519232731

481216202428

1591317212529

26101418222630


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


TS PCMAter

PCM A TS PCM A

25262728293031-

33333333

481216202428

1591317212529

26101418222630

37111519232731

PCM T1 links

TS PCMAter

PCM A TS PCM A

1 (LAPDchannel)

- no equivalence

234567

000000

159131721

2610141822

3711151923

4812162024

8910111213

111111

159131721

2610141822

3711151923

4812162024

141516171819

222222

159131721

2610141822

3711151923

4812162024

2021222324-

333333

159131721

2610141822

3711151923

4812162024


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 507

transparentSiteAttrib2 Class 2

Description : BSC 2nd class transparent attribute on bstSiteManager MO.



Value range : String [0 to 129]


Type : DP

Release : V14

transparentTeiAttrib2 Class 2

Description : BSC transparent attribute on bts MO. Transmitted toSUP-TEI AO and then to the bts in LOAD_READYmessage.



Value range : String [0 to 27]

Object : bts

Type : DP

Release : V14

tResumeAck Class 3

Description : Timer used by the bsc waiting for an MS Resume Ack froma pcu. On timer expiry, the procedure is canceled. A TCHRelease is sent to the MS, requesting this MS to send aRouting Area Update.

Value range : [0..10] (1 unit = 100 ms). The recommended value is 1.

Default value : 0

Object : bsc


Type : DP

Release : V15

Note : Value 0 is considered as 1 by the BSC.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


trm

Description : The Transcoding Resource Module, which is responsiblefor GSM vocoding of the voice channels.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : trm

Type : Id

trmArchipelagoCalls

Description : Number of calls per archipelago and per TRM.

Value range : List of 3 archipelagoes. Each of them is a list [coderAlgo,maximumNumberOfCalls, currentNumberOfCalls] with:coderAlgo: fullRatecoder / enhancedFullRateCoder /ctmEnhancedFullRateCode / amrFullHalfRateCoder maximumNumberOfCalls: 0 to 65535 currentNumberOfCalls: 0to 65535

Object : trm

Feature : BSC/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement

Type : DD

Release : V16

trmId

Description : Identifier of the ’trm’ object class. This identifier is allocatedby the MD-R at object creation, depending on the shelf andslot numbers indicated by the BSC. This attribute cannot bemodified. This attribute is relevant for BSC 3000 and TCU3000.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : trm

Type : DP

Release : V13

tSCBNumber

Description : This attribute is significant only for BSC 12000HC. Thisattribute indicates which is the number of the TSCB(Transcoder Signalling Concentration Board) board,managing the signalling for transcoders, and the numberof the BSCB (BTS signalling Concentration Board) board,managing the signalling for BTS. This board is redundantat BSC level.


Object : bsc2GEqpt


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 509

Type : DD

Release : V13

tSCBUse

Description : This attribute is significant only for BSC 12000HC. 1xSCBBoards Use: indicates the internal state and LAPDmapping for each created TSCB and BSCB board. Thisattribute is dynamically managed by the BSS. Valuechanges are notified to the Manager.


Object : bsc2GEqpt

Type : DD

Release : V13

tsConfiguration

Description : Configuration of the radio TDMA frame time slots.

This dynamic attribute indicates, for each time slot, thereconfiguration state, the type of logical channel supported,the frequency channel used (absoluteRFChannelNo)if the time slot does not hop, the list of frequencychannels used (mobileAllocation), the maio, and thehoppingSequenceNumber if the time slot hops.

When frequency hopping is used if "reconfiguration state"is "true", it means that BSC has recalculated the frequencyhopping law following the loss of one or several TRX(defence of TDMA carrying the BCCH. If "reconfigurationstate" is "false", it means that the TDMA configuration is theoriginal one.

When frequency hopping is not used, this boolean has nomeaning and would be set to "false".



Type : DD

Remark : Since the time slots are reconfigured after each dynamicreconfiguration of the hopping frequencies, the data can bedifferent from those defined by the user when creating thechannel objects.

Release : V8


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


tSuspendAck Class 3

Description : Timer used by the bsc waiting for an MS Suspend Ackmessage from a pcu. On timer expiry, the Suspendmessage is repeated. After three unsuccessful attempts,the procedure is canceled.

Value range : [1..10] seconds. The recommended value is 1.

Default value : 1

Object : bsc


Type : DP

Release : V15

Note : Value 0 is considered as 1 by the BSC.

tUsfExt Class 3

Description : Throughput optimization timer.

On timer expiry, the USF allocation is optimized in orderto give priority to active MSs that share the TS with theinactive MS.


Object : bts

Default value : 0


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:tUsfExt value must be lower than or equal totNwExtUtbf value.

Release : V15

txPowerMaxReduction Class 2

Description : Maximum transmission power level allowed in a TDMAframe (attenuation versus bsTxPowerMax) per transceiver.

Value range : [0 to 30 by step of 2] dB. "0" is the only value accepted.


Default value : 0

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The only value accepted by the system is 0dB.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

T 511

type

Description : Type of data to archive or restore.

Value range : [faults / observations / trace data / backup / other data]

• Fault data are stored in the "/MD/notif" partition on theOMC-R agent disks.

• Observation data are stored in the "/MD/obs" partitionon the OMC-R agent disks.

• Trace data are stored in the "/MD/trace_function"partition on the OMC-R agent disks.

• Backup data are stored on the OMC-R agent disks.

• Other data files are defined in the "/MD/config" partitionon the OMC-R agent disks.

Object : md - Archive

Type : DP

type



• Fault data are restored to the "/MD/restored/notif"partition on the OMC-R agent disks.

• Observation data are restored to the "/MD/restored/obs"partition on the OMC-R agent disks.

• Trace data are restored in the "/MD/restored/trace_function" partition on the OMC-R agent disks.

• Other data files are restored to their source directory onthe OMC-R agent disks.

Object : md - Restore

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


type


Value range : [faults / observations / trace data / backup / backup withouteft / PCUOAM / other data]

• Fault data are stored in the "/CMN/base/save_rest"partition on the OMC-R manager disks.

• Observation data are stored in the "/OMC/obs" partitionon the OMC-R manager disks.

• Trace data are stored in the "/CMN/base/save_rest"partition on the OMC-R manager.

• Backup data are stored on the OMC-R manager disks.

• Other data files are defined in the "/OMC/data" partitionon the OMC-R manager disks.

Object : omc - Archive

Type : DP

type



• Fault data are restored to the "/CMN/base/save_rest"partition on the OMC-R manager disks.

• Observation data are restored to the "/OMC/obs"partition on the OMC-R manager disks.

• Trace data are restored to the "/CMN/base/save_rest"partition on the OMC-R manager disks.

• Other data files are restored to their source directory"/OMC/data" on the manager disks.

Object : omc - Restore

Type : DP

type

Description : Type of observation report.

Value range : [single observed instance / several observed instance]

• single observed instance .......several observedcounters on a singleobject


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

U 513

• several observed instance .......single counterobserved on severalobjects


Type : DP

Release : V11

type of data to be purged

Description : Type of the OMC data to be purged.

Value range : [traceData]

Object : omc - Data purge

Type : DP

Release : V10

type of display

Description : Choice of the observation counter display mode.

Value range : [Chart / Table / Text]


Type : DP

Release : V11

UulBepPeriod Class 2

Description : The parameter is used by BTS to derive the forgettingfactor used in the UL to compute averaged MEAN-BEP andCV-BEP.




Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V15

ulGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3

Description : The parameter allows the operator to set the thresholdbetween MCS2 and the next code in the UL GMSK OnlyLink Adaptation table.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : bts


Default value : 0 (disabled MCS2 in the Link Adaptation Tables)

Type : DP

Release : V15

ulGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold Class 3

Description : The parameter allows to set the threshold between MCS3and the next code in the UL GMSK Only Link Adaptationtable.


Object : bts



Type : DP

Release : V15

ulMCS2UpperThreshold Class 3

Description : The parameter is used to set the threshold between MCS2and the next code in the UL Link Adaptation table.


Object : bts



Type : DP

Release : V15




Object : bts



Type : DP

Release : V15


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

U 515




Object : bts



Type : DP

Release : V15




Object : bts



Type : DP

Release : V15




Object : bts



Type : DP

Release : V15




Object : bts




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

Release : V15

UMTS access min level Class 3

Description : A minimum threshold for Ec/No for UTRAN FDD cellre-selection (3GPP reference: FDD_Qmin).

Value range : V15: [-20 / -19 / -18 / -17 / -16 / - 15 / -14 / -13] dBV16: [-20 / -18 / -16 / -14 / -12 / -10 / -8 / -6] dB

Object : bts

Default value : V15: -20 dBV16: -12 dB

Type : DP

Release : V14

UMTS reselection ARFCN Class 3

Description : Neighboring UMTS cell ARFCN.

Although no control is performed on the value, it shallbe indicated on the OMC-R display as a comment thata UTRAN ARFCN FDD is from 10562 to 10838 (3GPPreference: FDD_Qmin).


Object : bts

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : V14

UMTS reselection offset Class 3

Description : Applies an offset to RLA_C for cell re-selection to accesstechnology / mode FDD (3GPP reference: FDD_Qmin).

Value range : [infinity / -28 / -24 / -20 / -16 / -12 / -8 / -4 / 0 / 4 / 8 / 12 / 16/ 20 / 24 / 28] dB

Object : bts

Default value : infinity dB

Type : DP

Release : V14


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

U 517

UMTS search min level Class 3

Description : Search for 3G cell if signal level is below or above thethreshold (3GPP reference: Qsearch_I).

Value range : [<-98 / <-94 / <-90 / <-86 / <-82 / <-78 / <-74 / Always />-78 / > -74 / >-70 / >-66 / >-62 / >-58 / >-54 / Never] dB

Object : bts

Default value : <-98 dB

Type : DP

Release : V14

unequippedCircuit Class 1

Description : Whether the UNEQUIPPED CIRCUIT messages are used(Phase II compliance).



Feature : Unequipped circuit and circuit group block (UF1169.1 -V12)


Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The only accepted value is "false" in V10 andV11.

Remark : Since the system accepts only one value for this attribute inV10 and V11, changing it has no meaning.

Release : V8

unit

Description : The name that identifies the unit.

Value range : String [1 to 2 characters]


Type : DD

Note : This parameter is applicable for TCU3G only.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


unknownNCellWarning Class 3

Description : Whether feedback of measurements performed by mobileson neighbor cells that are unknown to the BSC is allowed.

When feedback of measurements is enabled, notificationswith codano 1260 are generated. These notificationsindicate that measurements are performed on cells whichuse the same BCCH as a neighbor cell of the serving cellbut have different BSICs.


Object : bts


Type : DP

unmasked users alarms Class 2

Description : Configuration of the user (unprotected) external alarmloops controlled by the BTS. When an alarm is unmasked,it means the relevant equipment is monitored by the BTS.There are 6 user alarms per cabinet.

• on the S8000 Outdoor (up to 18 user alarms = 3cabinets * 6 user alarms per cabinet).

• on the S8002 BTS (up to 6 user alarms = 1 cabinet * 6user alarms)

A user alarm is used when an external equipment isinserted in the BTS (for instance a microwave terminal) anddoes not require a new DLU.

Value range : [All masked, Base 1, Base 1 to 2, Base 1 to 3, Base 1 to 4,Base 1 to 5, Base 1 to 6, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1, Base 1 to 6Ext0 1 to 2, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 3, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to4, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 5, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6, Base 1to 6 Ext0 1 to 6 Ext1 1 to 2, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6 Ext1 1to 4, Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1 to 6 Ext1 1 to 6]

For instance:


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

U 519

• Base 1: the first user alarm in the Base cabinet isunmasked

• Base 1 to 2: the first and second user alarm in the Basecabinet are unmasked

• Base 1 to 6 Ext0 1: The 6 user alarms in the Basecabinet and the first one in the Extension cabinet 0 areunmasked


Type : DP

Release : V9

upAckTime Class 3 (packetAckTime)

Description : Defines the DL TBF pre-establishment timer.

Value range : [1 to 64] steps 100 ms for uplink transfer


Feature : GPRS (SV407 - V12 and TF1220 - V12.4c)

Default value :

Type : DP

Release : V12

upgradeStatus

Description : Stands whether an upgrade is complete, or is whether ornot it is still in progress.


Value changes are notified to the manager.

Value range : [notInProgress / inProgress / performed / toBeUpgraded /aborted; duplicateInProgress; frozen; failed; flashUpdated;Unknown]

Object : transcoder, atmRm, cc, cem, controlNode, iem, iom,interfaceNode, omu, tmu, trm, hardware transcoder 3G,sw8kRm, btsSiteManager, transceiverEquipment


Type : DD

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


uplinkMappingChannelNumber Class 2

Description : Channel number used for uplink mapping as the monitoredTS.


Object : bts

Feature : Uplink mapping (TF876 - V12)

Default value : 7

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:The attribute must contain an even value incase of an extended cell (2, 4, 6). In case of amulti CCCH cell it must contain an odd value(1, 3, 5, 7).

Release : V12

uplinkMappingFreq Class 2

Description : The frequency (f0) used for uplink mapping.


Object : bts

Default value : 0


Type : DP

Release : V12

uplinkMappingMeasurementMode Class 2

Description : This attribute is relevant from V11 BTS.

This attribute indicates if the uplink mapping is active(TRUE) or inactive (FALSE) on the BTS.

Once active BTS sends collected data to BSC.


Value range : [disabled/enabled]

Object : bts


Type : DP

Release : V12


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

U 521

uplinkMappingProcessingMode Class 3

Description : Whether or not uplink mapping is active on the BSC.


Object : bsc



Type : DP

Release : V12

uplinkPowerControl Class 3

Description : Whether power control in the MS-to-BTS direction isauthorized at cell level.




Type : DP

Release : V8

uplinkPwrCtrlDuringUTDOA Class 3



Object : bsc


Type : DP

Release : V16

uplinkReply Class 3

Description : Defines the use of the uplink-reply procedure, whichapplies to VBS and VGCS calls for radio resourcesoptimization.

Value range : [0 to 2] with:

• 0: Disabled (recommended value for non-GSM-Rcustomers)

• 1: Enabled on all group calls (recommended value forGSM-R customers)

• 2: Enabled on all group calls except on emergencygroup calls (optional value for GSM-R customers)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : bsc

Feature : ASCI

Default value : 0

Type : DP

Release : GSM-R V15

uplinkReplyTimer Class 3

Description : Timer value of the uplink-reply procedure.

Value range : [0 to 65535] seconds, with:

• 0: the feature is not allowed

• 6: recommended minimum value

• 120: recommended value

Object : bts

Feature : ASCI

Default value : 120

Type : DP

Release : GSM-R V15

uRxLevDLP Class 3

Description : Upper strength threshold for BTS txpwr decrease for stepby step algorithm.

It is greater than lRxLevDLP.




Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:lRxLevDLP + powerIncrStepSize ≤uRxLevDLP

• [M]:uRxLevDLP - powerRedStepSize ≥lRxLevDLP

Note : This parameter is significant only when the BTS uses thestandard "step by step" power control algorithm.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

U 523

uRxLevULP Class 3

Description : Upper strength threshold for MS txpwr decrease for stepby step algorithm.

It is greater than lRxLevULP.




Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:lRxLevULP + powerIncrStepSize ≤uRxLevULP

• [M]:uRxLevULP - powerRedStepSize ≥lRxLevULP


uRxQualDLP Class 3

Description : Upper quality threshold to reduce BTS txpwr for step bystep algorithm.

It is lower than or equal to lRxQualDLP.




Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:uRxQualDLP ≤ lRxQualDLP


uRxQualULP Class 3

Description : Upper quality threshold to reduce MS txpwr for step by stepalgorithm.

It is lower than or equal to lRxQualULP.




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:uRxQualULP ≤ lRxQualULP


usageState

Description : Activity state of the Call path tracing function in the BSC.

Refer to the endSessionCriteriaType entry in theDictionary and the operationalState entry related to thecallPathTrace object which describes the possible stateparameter combinations for this type of object.

Value range : [idle / busy ]

• idle .............The PCM time slot that conveys theterrestrial circuit is traffic-free.

• busy .............The PCM time slot conveys theterrestrial circuit is working andcarrying traffic.


Type : DP

usageState


Refer to the operationalState entry related to the xtpobject which describes the possible state parametercombinations for this type of object.

Value range : [idle / busy / active]

• idle .............The PCM time slot that conveys theterrestrial circuit is traffic-free.

• busy .............The PCM time slot conveys theterrestrial circuit is working andcarrying traffic.

• active ...........The PCM time slot that conveys theterrestrial circuit is active.

Object : xtp

Type : DD


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

U 525

use default list

Description : Whether the default counter list has to be used.

Value range : [yes]


Type : DP

Release : V11

user name

Description : Name of an OMC-R user as defined in the user’s profile(default is the logged-in user’s name).




Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:The related user profile object is created onthe OMC-R.


user profile

Description : Identifier (name) of an OMC-R user.

Value range : [case sensitive, 2 characters min]


Type : DP

Checks : • [C]:The name of a user is one-of-a-kind to theOMC-R.

• [M/D]:The user profile object is created.

username

Description : Name of the OMC-R user, as defined in the user’s profile,who created the job.


Type : DD


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Object : job


username

Description : Name of the OMC-R user, as defined in the user’s profile,who created the associated job.


Object : jobResult

Type : DD


usfGranularity Class 3

Description : The type of granularity supported by PCU when dynamicallocation is available.

Value range : [0]

Object : bts

Feature : EDGE dynamic allocation (20230)

Default value : 0 (granularity 1)

Type : DP

Release : V15

Vversion Class 2

Description : Version number of the remote transcoder TCBs.

Version 1 TCB software only manages the FR (Full Rate)service. Version 2 TCB software manages both FR andEFR (Enhanced Full Rate) services.

The following apply:


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

V 527

• All TCBs in a given TCU are the same version.

• All TCUs in a BSS must be equipped with Version 2TCBs for the EFR service to be provided.

Value range : [TCB_1 / TCB_2]

Object : transcoder

Default value : TCB_2

Type : DP

Checks : • [M]:The attribute value is "TCB_2" if thespeechMode attribute of the dependenttranscoderBoard objects contains "enhancedfull rate".

Release : V8

voiceBroadcastService Class 3

Description : Authorize Voice Broadcast Service.





Type : DP

Release : V12

voiceGroupCallService Class 3

Description : Authorize Voice Group Call Service.





Type : DP

Release : V12

vSWR meter Class 2

Description : Presence or absence of the optional equipment "voltagestationary wave rate meter" in S8000 Indoor or Outdoor.




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Type : DP

Release : V9

Wworkstation name

Description : Name of a workstation as defined in its profile (default isthe logged-in user’s workstation).


Object : omc - Display workstation markers

Type : DP

Checks : • [A]:The terminal profile object describing theworkstation is created on the OMC-R.


wPSManagement Class 3

Description : WPS feature is enabled or disabled.

Value range : [disabled 0 ; enabled 1]

Object : bsc

Feature : WPS queuing managment (22463)


Type : DP


Release : V15

wPSQueueStepRotation Class 3

Description : One out of the WPSQueueStepRotation value to first havean evaluation of the WPS queues in the radio resourceallocator.


Object : bts

Feature : WPS public access bandwidth protection (22465)

Default value : 4

Type : DP


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

X 529


Release : V15

XX25 port 0 operational

Description : Operational State of the OMU module external X.25 port 0.



Value changes are not notified to the Manager.



Object : omu


Type : DD

Release : V13

X25 port 1 operational

Description : Operational State of the OMU module external X.25 port 1.

ISO operational state (enabled/ disabled).




Object : omu


Type : DD

Release : V13


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


xSCBConfiguration Class 0

Description : Number of TSCBs and BSCBs concentrating LAPDsignaling in the BSC.

The TSCBs are used for TCU signaling on the Aterinterface. The BSCBs are used for BTS signaling on theAbis interface.

A BSC which manages BTS LAPD signaling concentrationcan control up to 138 radio sites with redundancy, or 147radio sites without redundancy.

When a BSC does not manage BTS LAPD signalingconcentration, the number of radio sites it controls is limitedto the number of SICD ports available, minus 1 (which isreserved for TCU LAPD signaling), that is 39 sites.


Object : bsc

Default value : 2

Type : DP

Release : V8


xSCBNumber

Description : Number of the TSCB that concentrates TCU LAPDsignaling in the BSC

This dynamic attribute is managed by the BSC.


Object : bsc

Type : DD


xSCBUse

Description : State and assignment of the BSC TSCBs and BSCBs.

This dynamic attribute indicates, for each TSCB and BSCBhoused in the BSC, its operational state and the list of theLAPD links it concentrates.


Object : bsc


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

X 531

Type : DD

Release : V8

xtp

Description : Identifier of an xtp object (eXchange Termination Point)defined with regard to a bsc object.

Value range : [0 to 2147483646]

Object : xtp

Type : Id

Checks : • [C]: The number of terrestrial circuits linked to aBSC 12000HC is limited to 1288 if PCM E1links are used and to 1440 if PCM T1 links areused.

Checks : • [C]:The software object related to the bsc objectis created.

• [C/M]:The referenced pcmCircuit object(pcmCircuitId) is assigned to the A interfaceand depends on the same transcoder object(transcoderId) as the xtp object.

• [C]:The time slot used by the xtp object(timeSlotNumber) is identical to themscPcmTsNumber component of the cicattribute.

• [C/M]:The referenced PCM,TS pair (pcmCircuitIdand timeSlotNumber) is not already assignedto an xtp or signallingLink object dependenton the same transcoder object, and the timeslot is not mapped on the TS used by the OMCchannel on the Ater interface.

• [C/M]:If the terrestrial circuit uses PCMA link no.3(pcmCircuitId), the timeSlotNumber is in therange [1 to 27] if the PCM link is an E1 link orin the range [1 to 20] if the PCM link is a T1link. Since the last four time slots of that linkare not mapped on the Ater interface, they areunusable (refer to the transcoderMatrix entryin the Dictionary).


• [D]:If the application database of the related BSCis built, the parent bsc object is unlocked andthe xtp object is locked.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



• [D]:No traceControl or callPathTrace object refersto the xtp object (the Call tracing and Call pathtracing functions do not monitor that object).

Restrictions : • [M]:The cic and timeSlotNumber attributes of anxtp object cannot be modified.

ZzI bss

Description : List of selected BSCs that defines a BSS zone of interest.Enter "all" to include all the BSCs created on the OMC-R.

If the ZI bss list should include only a subset of BSCs, fill inthe list as follows:

• The Add button allows to add a BSC to the list.

• The Delete button allows to remove selected BSCs fromthe list.

A BSS terminal zone of interest allows users to filter theunsolicited messages (output domain) that can be outputon the terminal outside users’ work sessions according tothe BSS entities that send them.


Type : DP

Note : The user can enter a BSC in the list that is not created yet.When it is created, this BSC will be handle as the otherBSCs already created.

zI bss

Description : List of selected BSCs that defines a BSS zone of interest.Enter "all" to include all the BSCs created on the OMC-R.

If the ZI bss list should include only a subset of BSCs, fill inthe list as follows:

• The Add button allows to add a BSC to the list.

• The Delete button allows to remove selected BSCs fromthe list.


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

Z 533

A BSS user’s zone of interest defines the BSS entities theuser is entitled to work on. It allows to filter both the MMIcommands they can enter (command domain) accordingto the objects managed by these commands and theunsolicited messages (output domain) they have access toaccording to the BSS entities that send them.


Type : DP

Note : The user can enter a BSC in the list that is not created yet.When it is created, this BSC will be handle as the otherBSCs already created.

zone frequency hopping Class 2

Description : Whether frequency hopping is authorized in the zone.

If frequency hopping is not allowed in a zone, the channelobjects that describe the radio time slots of the TDMAframes used in the zone cannot be allowed to hop.

Value range : [hopping / not hopping]


Default value : not hopping

Type : DP


Release : V9


zone frequency threshold Class 2

Description : Minimum number of frequencies needed to allow frequencyreconfiguration in the zone.



Default value : 1

Type : DP



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Release : V9


zone Tx power max reduction Class 2

Description : Attenuation vs bsTxPowerMax that defines the maximumTRX/DRX transmission power in the zone.



Default value : 0

Type : DP

Checks : • [C/M]:zone Tx power max reduction equals zeroif the transceiverZone object describes thecell outer zone. It is greater than zero if thetransceiverZone object describes the cell innerzone.

• [M]:The parent bsc object is unlocked and theassociated bts object is locked.

Release : V9



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

535.

Appendix AObjects and parameters evolution

This appendix categorizes new configuration parameters and objects byrelease.

A.1 New V16 parametersParameter Object

aterLapd lsaRc

bckgDLLayer3WindowSize bsc

channelReleaseonAbisFailure bts

eGPRSlrUlActivation bts

enableRepeatedFacchFr bts

facchPowerOffset bts

frPowerControlTargetModeDl PowerControl

hrPowerControlTargetModeDl PowerControl

interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts bts

interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc bsc

minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain transceiver

monitoredObjectClass mdWarning

nACCActivation bts

packetFlowContext powerControl

packetSiStatus bts

pcuCellState pcu

pfcActivation bts

pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection powerControl

pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection powerControl




411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

536 Appendix A Objects and parameters evolution

Parameter Object



pfcFlowControlActivation bts

pfcMinNrtBandwidthPerTs transceiver

pfcMinNumberOfJokersforTsGuaranteedBitRate

transceiver

pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold powerControl

pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold powerControl

pfcPreemptionRatioGold powerControl

pfcPreemptionRatioSilver powerControl

pfcRtDowngradeAllowed powerControl

pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold powerControl

pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold powerControl

pfcT6 powerControl

pfcT8 powerControl

pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl powerControl

pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl powerControl

privilegedCell bts

sacchPowerOffset bts

sacchPowerOffsetSelection bts

sigPowerOverboost bts

tcu2gGroup tcu2g

trmArchipelagoCalls trm

uplinkPwrCtrlDuringUTDOA bsc


allocPriorityTable bts

allocPriorityTimers bts

amrUlHrAdaptationSet bts

amrDlHrAdaptationSet bts

amrUlFrAdaptationSet bts

amrDlFrAdaptationSet bts

available synchronizationsources

bts


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

A.2 New V15 parameters 537

Parameter Object

beacBatteryRemoteControllerPresence

btsSiteManager

batteryRemoteControllerPresence

btsSiteManager

bEPPeriod bts

bscHighSwitchingCapacity bsc

bssSccpConnEst signallingPoint or signallingLinkSet

bssSccpInactRx signallingPoint or signallingLinkSet

bssSccpInactTx signallingPoint or signallingLinkSet

bssSccpRelease signallingPoint or signallingLinkSet

bssSccpSubSysTest signallingPoint or signallingLinkSet

btsSMSynchroMode btsSiteManager

callDropActivation bts

concentricCell bts

cpueNumber btsSiteManager

css7LocalSubSystemNumber signallingLinkSet

css7RemoteSubSystemNumber

signallingLinkSet

current synchronization mode bts

dARPPh1Priority transceiver

degradedCause bts

degradedCause transceiver

delivery bts

distributionActivation bts

distributionDuration bts

distributionQualityThreshold bts

distributionTime bts

dlGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold bts

dlGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold bts

dlMCS2UpperThreshold bts







411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Parameter Object

edgeDataServiceType transceiver

edgeFavor transceiver

eDGEMixity bts

egprsServices bts

emergencyThreshold signallingPoint

agpsTimer bsc

estimatedSiteLoad btsSiteManager

extUtbfNoData bts

fERThreshold1 bts

fERThreshold2 bts

fERThreshold3 bts

fERThreshold4 bts

filteredTrafficCoefficient bts

floor bts

fnOffset btsSiteManager

fullDlKa bts

gprsNetworkModeOperation bts

gprsState bts

gprsState transceiver

initialMCSDL transceiver

initialMCSUL transceiver

jokerPerMainTarget transceiver

mainNetworkBand bsc

masterBtsSMId btsSiteManager

msPowerClassToggle bts

nbLargeReuseDataChannels bts

numberOfJokerDS0 transceiver

nUsfExt bts

nwExtUtbf bts

onePhaseAccess bts

onePhaseDnMsCapability bts

onlyExtUtbf bts

reportTypeMeas bts

rLCPolling bts


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Parameter Object

sGSNRelease bts

securedLoopActivation btsSiteManager

standardIndicator bts

suspendResumeActivation bsc

systemInfoType2 bts

tGMMKeepAlive bts

timerGcchNotif signallingPoint

tnOffset btsSiteManager

tNwExtUtbf bts

tResumeAck bsc

tSuspendAck bsc

tUsfExt bts

ulBepPeriod transceiver

ulGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold bts

ulGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold bts

ulMCS2UpperThreshold bts






uplinkReply bsc

uplinkReplyTimer bts

usfGranularity bts

wPSManagement bsc

wPSQueueStepRotation bts


peakThroughputLimitation powerControl

upQoSCriterion powerControl

dwQoSCriterion powerControl

minThroughputGold powerControl

minThroughputSilver powerControl


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Parameter Object

minThroughputBronze powerControl

preemptionRatioGold powerControl

preemptionRatioSilver powerControl

voicePreemptionGold powerControl

voicePreemptionSilver powerControl

voicePreemptionBronze powerControl

admissionCtrlGold powerControl

admissionCtrlSilver powerControl

admissionCtrlBronze powerControl

frPowerControlTargetMode powerControl

hrPowerControlTargetMode powerControl

powerIncrStepSizeDL powerControl

powerIncrStepSizeUL powerControl

powerRedStepSizeDL powerControl

powerRedStepSizeUL powerControl

gsmToUmtsReselection bts

uMTSSearchLevel bts

uMTSReselectionOffset bts

uMTSAccessMinLevel bts

uMTSReselectionARFCN bts

amrAdaptationSet bts

hrCellLoadEnd bts

hrCellLoadStart bts

selfAdaptActivation bts

hrAmrPriority transceiver

nbOfFramesForFER bts

rxLevRxQualDistributionActivation

bts

rxQualThresholdDistribution bts

transparentTeiAttrib2 bts

amrDirectAllocIntRxLevDL handOverControl

amrDirectAllocIntRxLevUL handOverControl

amrDirectAllocRxLevDL handOverControl

amrDirectAllocRxLevUL handOverControl


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


Parameter Object

amrFRIntracellCodec handOverControl

amrHRIntercellCodec handOverControl

amrHRToFRIntraCodec handOverControl

amrReserved1 handOverControl

amrReserved2 handOverControl

amriRxLevDLH handOverControl

amriRxLevULH handOverControl

capacityTimeRejection handOverControl

enhCellTieringConfiguration handOverControl

nCapacityFRRequestedCodec handOverControl

offsetNeighbouringCell handOverControl

nFRRequestedCodec handOverControl

nHRRequestedCodec handOverControl

pRequestedCodec handOverControl

minTimeQualityIntraCellHO handOverControl

rxQualAveBeg handOverControl

servingFactorOffset handOverControl

adjacentCellReselectionId adjacentCellReselection

adjacentCellHandOverId adjacentCellHandOver

hoMarginAMR adjacentCellHandOver

bscCapacityReduction bsc, signallingPoint

frAmrPriority transceiver

lcsType bsc

sIkAssociatedTmuPortPosition signallingLink

sIkATerResource signallingLink

transparentSiteAttrib2 btsSiteManager

dynamicAgprsAllowed pcu

cCCHGprsAtBtsLevel bts

agprsFilterCoefficient bts

t3168 bts

t3192 bts

flowControlMaxDelay pcusn


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

543.

Appendix BParameters per feature

This appendix presents BSS parameters per feature.

B.1 AMR based on traffic• filteredTrafficCoefficient (bts)

B.2 AMR Optimizations• amrDlFrAdaptationSet (bts)

• amrDlHrAdaptationSet (bts)

• amrUlFrAdaptationSet (bts)

• amrUlHrAdaptationSet (bts)

B.3 BSC/TCU 3000• administrativeState (atmRm, cc, cem, controlNode, hardware bsc

3G, hardware transcoder 3G, iem, interfaceNode, lsaRc, mms, omu,sw8kRm, tmu, trm, )

• operationalState (atmRm, cc, cem, controlNode, hardware bsc 3G,hardware transcoder 3G, iem, interfaceNode, lsaRc, mms, omu,sw8kRm, tmu, trm, )

• cTU cable (iem)

• hsaPcmList (hsaRcTcu, iom)

• hsaRc Reference (iom)

• interOmuEtherlinkOper (controlNode)

• lsaPcmList (iem, lsaRc)

• lsaRc Reference (iem)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

544 Appendix B Parameters per feature

• mmsUsage (mms)

• numberOfEnabledHDLCPorts (iem, tmu)

• port Ethernet operational (omu)

• port Ethernet status (omu)

• port 0 X25 status (omu)

• port 1 X25 status (omu)

• positionInShelf (atmRm, cc, cem, iem, lsaRc, mms, omu, sw8kRm,tmu, trm)

B.4 BSC 3000 cell group management/load balancing• associatedTMUPosition (btsSiteManager, signallingLinkSet,

transcoder, pcu)

B.5 BSC 3000 switching increase capacity• bscHighSwitchingCapacity (bsc)

B.6 BSC overload management• processorLoadSupConf (bsc)

B.7 Dualband cell management• biZonePowerOffset (adjacentCellHandOver)

• biZonePowerOffset (handOverControl)

• concentric cell (bts)

• msTxPwrMax2ndBand (bts)

• standard indicator AdjC (adjacentCellHandover)

• standard indicator AdjC (adjacentCellReselection)

• standardIndicator (bts)

B.8 EDGE dynamic allocation• eDGEMixity (bts)

• usfGranularity (bts)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B.11 GSM-R V12 545

B.9 EDGE traffic management• bEPPeriod (bts)

• edgeFavor (transceiver)

• egprsServices (bts)

• initialMCSDL (transceiver)

• initialMCSUL (transceiver)

• jokerPerMainTarget (transceiver)

• sGSNRelease (bts)

B.10 EDGE link adaptation• dlGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold (bts)

• dlGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold (bts)

• dlMCS2UpperThreshold (bts)






• ulBepPeriod (transceiver)

• ulGMSKMCS2UpperThreshold (bts)

• ulGMSKMCS3UpperThreshold (bts)

• ulMCS2UpperThreshold (bts)






B.11 GSM-R V12• additional supervised PCM 0 (btsSiteManager)

• additional supervised PCM 1 (btsSiteManager)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.






• additional unmasked users alarms (btsSiteManager)

• eMLPPThreshold (signallingPoint)

• nCHPosition (bts)

• preemptionAuthor (signallingPoint)

• preemptionConfiguration (signallingPoint)

• voiceBroadcastService (signallingPoint)

• voiceGroupCallService (signallingPoint)

B.12 GSM-R V15• emergencyThreshold (signallingPoint)

• msPowerClassToggle (bts)

• timerGcchNotif (signallingPoint)

• uplinkReply (bsc)

• uplinkReplyTimer (bts)

B.13 GPRS (SV407 - V12)• administrativeState (pcu)

• associatedInterface (lapdLink)

• availabilityStatus (pcu)

• availabilityStatus (pcusn)

• bscGprsActivation (bsc)

• bscRefList (pcusn)

• bsCvMax (bts)

• btsSensitivity (bts)

• btsSensitivityInnerZone (bts)

• channelType (channel)

• codingScheme (transceiver)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B.13 GPRS (SV407 - V12) 547

• drxTimerMax (bts)

• dwAckTime (transceiver)

• geographical coordinates (pcusn)

• gprsCellActivation (bts)

• gprsPermittedAccess (bts)

• gprsTimerWaitPUAM (bts)

• gprsTimerWaitRLC (bts)

• lapdConcentration (lapdLink)

• lapdTerminalNumber (lapdLink)

• longTbfLossThroughput (bts)

• longTbfSizeThreshold (bts)

• maxBsTransmitPowerInnerZone (bts)

• maxDnTbfP1P2Threshold (bts)

• maxDnTbfPerTs (bts)

• maxDwAssign (bts)

• maxNbrPDAAssig (transceiver)

• maxNbrPUDWithoutVchange (transceiver)

• maxNbrRLCEmptyBlock (transceiver)

• maxUpTbfP1P2Threshold (bts)

• maxUpTbfPerTs (bts)

• msCapWeightActive (bts)

• muxNumber (pcusn)

• n3103 (bts)

• n3105max (transceiver)

• nAvgl (bts)

• nAvgT (bts)

• nAvgW (bts)

• nbrFreeTchBeforeAnticipation (bts)

• nbrFreeTchToEndAnticipation (bts)

• nbrTch (pcu)

• operationalState (pcu)

• operationalState (pcusn)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


• panDec (bts)

• panInc (bts)

• panMax (bts)

• pcmCircuit (pcmCircuit)

• pcmNbr (pcu)

• pcmType (pcmCircuit)

• pcu (pcu)

• pcuLapdEqptRefList (pcu)

• pcusn (pcusn)

• routingArea (bts)

• speechOnHoppingTs (bts)

• t3172 (bts)

• upAckTime (transceiver)

B.14 GPRS (TF1134 - NMO I)• gprsNetworkModeOperation (bts)

B.15 GPRS (TF1121 - V12)• gprsPreemption (bts)

• gprsPreemptionProtection (bts)

• gprsPriority (transceiver)

• minNbrGprsTs (bts)

• radioAllocator (bts)

B.16 GPRS TBF establishment improvement: one phase access• onePhaseAccess (bts)

• onePhaseDnMsCapability (bts)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B.21 Automatic Cell Tiering 549

B.17 GPRS / EDGE Suspend and Resume• suspendResumeActivation (bsc)

• tResumeAck (bsc)

• tSuspendAck (bsc)

B.18 PCUSN - more than 12 Agprs PCMs per BSC• bscPcuPcmRefList (pcu)

• gprsPcuCrossConnectList

B.19 Network Synchronization• btsSMSynchroMode (btsSiteManager)

• dARPPh1Priority (transceiver)

• fnOffset (btsSiteManager)

• tnOffset (btsSiteManager)

B.20 BTS Synchronization• available synchronization sources

• current synchronization mode

• masterBtsSMId (btsSiteManager)

B.21 Automatic Cell Tiering• btsReserved3 (bts)

• hoMarginTiering (handOverControl)

• interferenceType (adjacentCellHandOver)

• intraCell (handOverControl)

• numberOfPwciSamples (handOverControl)

• selfTuningObs (handOverControl)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


B.22 Handover for traffic reasons• hoMarginTrafficOffset (adjacentCellHandOver)

• hoTraffic (bsc)

• hoTraffic (bts)

B.23 Handover decision (adjacent cell priority and load)• offsetLoad (adjacentCellHandOver)

• offsetPriority (adjacentCellHandOver)

B.24 General protection against pingpong handover• bts time between HO configuration (bts)

• directedRetryPrio (bts)

• hoPingpongCombination (adjacentCellHandOver)

• hoPingpongTimeRejection (adjacentCellHandOver)

• timeBetweenHOConfiguration (bsc)

B.25 Intracell handover enhancements• lRxQualDLH (handOverControl)

• lRxQualULH (handOverControl)

B.26 AR 264• cellReselectOffset (bts)

• penaltyTime (bts)

• temporaryOffset (bts)

B.27 Mixed hybrid and cavity combiner BTSs• btsWithCavity (bts)

B.28 Call drop analysis• callDropActivation (bts)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B.34 L1M evolutions for advanced features support 551

B.29 Extended CCCH• channelType (channel)

B.30 CPU/BIFP load sharing• cpueNumber (btsSiteManager)

B.31 Distribution on Radio measurements• distributionActivation (bts)

• distributionDuration (bts)

• distributionTime (bts)

• distributionQualityThreshold (bts)

• fERThreshold1 (bts)




• nbOfFramesForFER (bts)

B.32 Extended UL TBF• extUtbfNoData (bts)

• fullDlKa (bts)

• nUsfExt (bts)

• nwExtUtbf (bts)

• onlyExtUtbf (bts)

• tNwExtUtbf (bts)

• tUsfExt (bts)

B.33 Broadcast of PSI 13• maxRACH (bts)

B.34 L1M evolutions for advanced features support• measurementProcAlgorithm (bts)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


B.35 Fast power control at TCH assignment• new power control algorithm (bts)

B.36 Data Backhaul Evolution• numberOfJokerDS0 (transceiver)

B.37 Disabling TBF Keep Alive• tGMMKeepAlive (bts)

B.38 PCM error correction• enhancedTRAUFrameIndication (bsc)

• pcmErrorCorrection (bts)

B.39 Unequipped circuit and circuit group block• circuitGroupBlock (signallingPoint)

• unequippedCircuit (signallingPoint)

B.40 Uplink mapping• rxLevULIH (handOverControl)

• uplinkMappingChannelNumber (bts)

• uplinkMappingFreq (bts)

• uplinkMappingProcessingMode (bsc)

B.41 WPS public access bandwidth protection• wPSQueueStepRotation (bts)

B.42 WPS queuing management• allocPriorityTable (bts)

• allocPriorityTimers (bts)

• allocWaitThreshold (bts)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B.45 BSS Packet Flow Context 553

B.43 BSC/TCU e3 GET DATA enhancement• aterLapd (lsaRc)

• trmArchipelagoCalls (trm)

B.44 Network Assisted Cell Change for release 4 MS• nAccActivation (bts)

• packetSiStatus (bts)

B.45 BSS Packet Flow Context• packetFlowContext (powerControl)

• pfcActivation (bts)

• pfcArp1ConversationalCSCallProtection (powerControl)

• pfcArp1StreamingCSCallProtection (powerControl)





• pfcFlowControlActivation (bts)

• pfcMinNrtBandwidthPerTs (transceiver)

• pfcMinNumberOfJokersforTsGuaranteedBitRate (transceiver)

• pfcNrtRequestedDnMbrCounterThreshold (powerControl)

• pfcNrtRequestedUpMbrCounterThreshold (powerControl)

• pfcPreemptionRatioGold (powerControl)

• pfcPreemptionRatioSilver (powerControl)

• pfcRtDowngradeAllowed (powerControl)

• pfcRtRequestedDnGbrCounterThreshold (powerControl)

• pfcRtRequestedUpGbrCounterThreshold (powerControl)

• pfcT6 (powerControl)

• pfcT8 (powerControl)

• pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateDl (powerControl)

• pfcTsGuaranteedBitRateUl (powerControl)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.


B.46 BSC 3000 support of BTS background downloading• bckgDLLayer3WindowSize (bsc)

B.47 Optimized Agprs cell allocation• privilegedCell (bsc)

B.48 EDGE Dynamic Agprs• dynamicAgprsAllowed (pcu)

• minNbOfJokersPerConnectedMain (transceiver)

B.49 Switch Interference Matrix• interferenceMatrixRunningOnBts

• interferenceMatrixRunningOnBsc

B.50 Channel release policy on BTS after Abis failure• channelReleaseOnAbisFailure

B.51 PM1270 - TDMA based counters• monitoredObjectClass

B.52 Tx power offset for signalling channels• facchPowerOffset

• sacchPowerOffsetSelection

• sacchPowerOffset

• hrPowerControlTargetModeDl

• frPowerControlTargetModeDl

• sigPowerOverboost

B.53 Tx power overboost for signaling channels• enableRepeatedFacchFr


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

B.56 Smart Power Management 555

B.54 U-TDOA support on the BSS• uplinkPwrCtrlDuringUTDOA (bsc)

B.56 Smart Power Management• smartPowerManagementConfig

• smartPowerSwitchOffTimer


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.



411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

557.

Appendix CPCUSN components

The PCUSN components are described in the following NTPs:

• Nortel Networks Multiservice switch 7400, 15000, 20000 Component -PcGtl (241-5701-060_PcGtl)

• Nortel Networks Multiservice switch 7400, 15000, 20000 Component -Psusa (241-5701-060_Pcusa)

• Nortel Networks Multiservice switch 7400, 15000, 20000 Component -Psusn (241-5701-060_Pcusn)

For more information on the PCUSN components, refer to:

• Nortel Networks Multiservice switch 7400, 15000, 20000 ComponentOverview (241-5701-060)


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

558 Appendix C PCUSN components


411-9001-124 16.14 Standard28 May 2008


.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Nortel GSM BSS Parameter ReferenceCopyright © 1999, 2008 Nortel NetworksAll Rights Reserved.

Release: 16.0Publication: 411-9001-124Document status: StandardDocument revision: 16.14Document release date: 28 May 2008

To provide feedback or to report a problem in this document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback.

www.nortel.com

Sourced in Canada, France, and the United States of America.

LEGAL NOTICE

While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writingNORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSOR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice.

Nortel, the Nortel logo, the Globemark, S2000, and S8000 are trademarks of Nortel Networks.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

BSS Parameter Dictionary

Documents

Transcript of BSS Parameter Dictionary